You are on page 1of 271

MODEL 2000 FLOW COMPUTER TECHNICAL MANUAL FIRMWARE V6.

300

In the design and construction of this equipment and instructions contained in this manual, due consideration has been given to safety requirements in respect of statutory industrial regulations. Users are reminded that these regulations similarly apply to installation, operation and maintenance, safety being mainly dependent upon the skill of the operator and strict supervisory control.

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual Index CONTENTS Page No. 1. INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................................. 1 1.1. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE START UP SCREENS................................................................................... 1 1.1.1. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE UNIT CONNECTION LIST .................................................................... 2 1.1.2. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE UNIT COMMUNICATION PORT SET-UP.............................................. 3 1.1.3. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE MODBUS COMMUNICATION PORT SET-UP....................................... 4 1.1.4. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE UNIT USERS SET-UP .......................................................................... 5 1.1.5. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE UNIT AUDIT LOG ................................................................................. 6 1.2. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS Version 2 SOFTWARE START UP SCREENS ................................................................... 8 1.2.1. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS Version 2 SOFTWARE UNIT CONNECTION LIST ..................................................... 9 1.2.2. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE USERS SET-UP ................................................................................. 11 1.2.3. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE PREFERENCES SET-UP ................................................................... 12 1.2.4. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE READ DATA OPTIONS ...................................................................... 20 2. MODBUS COMMUNICATION DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................... 24 2.1. MODBUS OPERATION FOR STANDARD VARIABLES ........................................................................................... 24 2.2. MODBUS OPERATION FOR LOGGING VARIABLES .............................................................................................. 26 2.3. MODBUS OPERATION FOR STATUS BITS ............................................................................................................ 28 2.4.1. TIME FORMAT 64 bit...................................................................................................................................... 29 2.4.2. EG TIME FORMAT 8 bit.................................................................................................................................. 29 2.4.3. UNSIGNED LONG 32 bit ................................................................................................................................ 30 2.4.4. DOUBLE FORMAT 64 bit................................................................................................................................ 30 2.4.5. FLOAT FORMAT 32 bit................................................................................................................................... 30 2.4.6. LONG INTEGER FORMAT 32 bit .................................................................................................................... 30 2.4.7. SHORT INTEGER FORMAT 16 bit.................................................................................................................. 30 2.4.8. CHAR FORMAT 8 bit ...................................................................................................................................... 31 2.4.9. UNSIGNED LONG INTEGER FORMAT 32 bit ................................................................................................. 31 2.4.10. UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER FORMAT 16 bit............................................................................................... 31 2.4.11. UNSIGNED CHAR or BOOLEAN FORMAT 8 bit.............................................................................................. 31 2.5. MODBUS ASCII COMMUNICATIONS PACKET DEFINITIONS ................................................................................ 32 2.6. MODBUS RTU COMMUNICATIONS PACKET DEFINITIONS .................................................................................. 33 2.7. ALARM STATUS BIT DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................ 34 2.7.1. GENERAL ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS ...................................................................................................... 35 2.7.2. GENERAL NON-ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS.............................................................................................. 35 2.7.3. TURBINE ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS........................................................................................................ 35 2.7.4. TURBINE NON-ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS............................................................................................... 35 2.7.5. US METER ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS ..................................................................................................... 36 2.7.6. US METER NON-ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS ............................................................................................ 36 2.7.7. FlowSIC 600 ALARM BITS.............................................................................................................................. 36 2.7.8. GAS CHROMATAGRAPH ALARM BITS ......................................................................................................... 37 2.7.9. STREAM GAS CHROMATAGRAPH ALARM BITS .......................................................................................... 38 2.7.10. DENSITY METER ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS........................................................................................... 38 2.7.11. DENSITY METER NON ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS .................................................................................. 39 2.7.12. SMART INDEX ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS ............................................................................................... 39 2.7.13. SMART INDEX NON ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS....................................................................................... 39 2.7.14. LUBRICATION MODULE NON-ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS ....................................................................... 39 2.7.15. MULTIPLE DP Hi TRANSMITTER ALARM BITS ............................................................................................. 40 2.7.16. MULTIPLE DP Lo TRANSMITTER ALARM BITS............................................................................................. 41 2.7.17. MULTIPLE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ALARM BITS.................................................................................... 42 2.7.18. MULTIPLE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER ALARM BITS ............................................................................ 43 2.7.19. GAS DATA ACCOUNTABLE MAXIMUM ALARM BITS.................................................................................... 44 2.7.20. GAS DATA ACCOUNTABLE MINIMUM ALARM BITS ..................................................................................... 45 2.7.21. GAS DATA NON-ACCOUNTABLE HIGH ALARM BITS ................................................................................... 46 2.7.22. GAS DATA NON-ACCOUNTABLE LOW ALARM BITS.................................................................................... 47 2.7.23. LIQUID DATA ACCOUNTABLE MAXIMUM ALARM BITS................................................................................ 48 2.7.24. LIQUID DATA ACCOUNTABLE MINIMUM ALARM BITS................................................................................. 48 2.7.25. LIQUID DATA NON-ACCOUNTABLE HIGH ALARM BITS............................................................................... 48 2.7.26. LIQUID DATA NON-ACCOUNTABLE LOW ALARM BITS................................................................................ 48 2.7.27. STATION CONTROLLER ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS................................................................................ 48 2.8. ALARM TREE ......................................................................................................................................................... 49 2.9. STATUS CODE DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................ 61 3. SOFTWARE UPDATES................................................................................................................................................. 75 Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 15 (V6.300) 01-02-09

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual Index 3.1. INSTRUCTIONS FOR DOWNLOADING NEW INTERNAL SOFTWARE INTO AN M2000 ......................................... 75 3.1.1. DL2.EXE VERSION 0.5 .................................................................................................................................. 75 3.1.2. WINDOWS 2 DOWNLOADER......................................................................................................................... 76 4. HELP PAGES ............................................................................................................................................................... 80 4.1. BOARDS CONFIGURED ......................................................................................................................................... 80 4.2. DATE & TIME.......................................................................................................................................................... 81 4.3. ANALOGUE INPUTS............................................................................................................................................... 82 4.4. DIGITAL INPUTS .................................................................................................................................................... 83 4.5. HART LOOPS ......................................................................................................................................................... 85 4.6. SELECT STREAM TYPES....................................................................................................................................... 86 4.7. STATION VALUES .................................................................................................................................................. 87 4.8. STATION PRESET COUNTERS.............................................................................................................................. 88 4.9. CHROMATOGRAPH ............................................................................................................................................... 89 4.10. GLOBAL UNITS ...................................................................................................................................................... 91 4.11. STATION UNITS ..................................................................................................................................................... 92 4.12. STATION PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE 1 & 2...................................................................................................... 93 4.13. TURBINE METER ................................................................................................................................................... 94 4.14. LIQUID CORRECTION 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 95 4.15. ULTRASONIC METER ............................................................................................................................................ 97 4.16. ORIFICE PLATE.................................................................................................................................................... 100 4.17. VENTURI TUBE .................................................................................................................................................... 102 4.18. WET GAS VENTURI TUBE 1................................................................................................................................. 103 4.19. WET GAS VENTURI TUBE 2................................................................................................................................. 112 4.20. CORIOLIS............................................................................................................................................................. 123 4.21. GAS LINE DENSITY TABLE.................................................................................................................................. 126 4.22. LIQUID LINE DENSITY TABLE.............................................................................................................................. 127 4.23. GAS MASS FRACTION TABLE ............................................................................................................................. 128 4.24. STEAM DENSITY.................................................................................................................................................. 129 4.25. LIQUIDS (CTL ONLY)............................................................................................................................................ 130 4.26. LIQUIDS................................................................................................................................................................ 131 4.27. LIQUID BASE DENSITY TABLE ............................................................................................................................ 134 4.28. MT PRESSURE..................................................................................................................................................... 135 4.29. MT TEMPERATURE.............................................................................................................................................. 136 4.30. MT Dp High Range ................................................................................................................................................ 137 4.31. MT Dp Low Range................................................................................................................................................. 138 4.32. ISO 6976 DATA..................................................................................................................................................... 139 4.34. SCALING FACTORS ............................................................................................................................................. 141 4.35. UNITS & FORMATTING ........................................................................................................................................ 142 4.36. DENSITY SET-UP................................................................................................................................................. 143 4.37. COMPRESSIBILITY EQUATION (Z FACTOR) ....................................................................................................... 144 4.38. TABLE Z FACTOR ................................................................................................................................................ 147 4.39. COMPRESSIBILITY EQUATION ORIFICE DENSITY VERSION............................................................................. 148 4.40. SOLARTRON MODEL 7835 LIQUID DENSITY METER ......................................................................................... 150 4.41. SARASOTA DENSITY METER .............................................................................................................................. 151 4.42. DENSITY METER (ORIFICE) SOLARTRON .......................................................................................................... 152 4.43. SOLARTRON DENSITY METER ........................................................................................................................... 154 4.44. GAS DATA ALARMS ............................................................................................................................................. 156 4.45. GAS DATA ALARMS (DENSITY VERSION)........................................................................................................... 157 4.46. RELATIVE DENSITY METER ................................................................................................................................ 158 4.47. PRESET COUNTERS ........................................................................................................................................... 159 4.48. BASE CONDITIONS.............................................................................................................................................. 160 4.49. MODE SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................................ 161 4.50. PID CONTROLLER ............................................................................................................................................... 162 4.51. GRAB SAMPLER .................................................................................................................................................. 164 4.52. LUBRICATION MODULE....................................................................................................................................... 166 4.53. ANALOGUE OUTPUTS......................................................................................................................................... 167 4.54. DIGITAL OUTPUTS............................................................................................................................................... 168 4.55. LOGGING ............................................................................................................................................................. 170 4.56. MODBUS .............................................................................................................................................................. 171 4.57. ACTIVE DATA....................................................................................................................................................... 173 4.58. DATA TO PRINT ................................................................................................................................................... 174 Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 15 (V6.300) 01-02-09

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual Index 4.59. 4.60. 4.61. 4.62. 4.63. 4.64. 4.65. 4.66. 4.67. 4.68. 4.69. 4.70. 4.71. 4.72. 4.73. 4.74. 4.75. 4.76. 4.77. 4.78. 4.79. 4.80. 4.81. 4.82. 4.83. 4.84. 4.85. 4.86. 4.87. 4.88. 4.89. 4.90. 4.91. 4.92. 4.93. 4.94. 4.95. 5. 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. PRINT JOBS ......................................................................................................................................................... 176 PORTS (MODBUS ASCII/RTU) ............................................................................................................................. 177 PORTS (PASSWORD MODBUS ASCII/RTU)......................................................................................................... 178 PORTS (CHROMAT ASCII/RTU) ........................................................................................................................... 179 PORTS (OSC-01-E)............................................................................................................................................... 180 PORTS (PRINTER) ............................................................................................................................................... 181 PORTS (INSTROMET ULTRASONIC 1) ................................................................................................................ 182 PORTS (INSTROMET THRU PORT 1) .................................................................................................................. 183 PORTS (INSTROMET ULTRASONIC MODBUS RTU) ........................................................................................... 184 PORTS (PANAMETRICS GM868 ULTRASONIC) .................................................................................................. 185 PORTS (PANAMETRICS IGM 878 ULTRASONIC)................................................................................................. 186 PORTS (DANIEL SENIOR SONIC ULTRASONIC) ................................................................................................. 188 PORTS (FLOWSIC 600) ........................................................................................................................................ 190 PORTS (STATION CONTROLLER) ....................................................................................................................... 191 PORTS (SMART INDEX) ....................................................................................................................................... 192 MODBUS PASSWORDS ....................................................................................................................................... 193 INFORMATION PAGE........................................................................................................................................... 194 DISPLAY PAGES .................................................................................................................................................. 195 UNIT SECURITY ................................................................................................................................................... 196 ETHERNET 2 BOARD ........................................................................................................................................... 197 STATION CONTROLLER ...................................................................................................................................... 199 CHANGE ID TEXT................................................................................................................................................. 200 CHANGE ID UNITS ............................................................................................................................................... 201 AUDIT LOG........................................................................................................................................................... 203 FUNCTION EDITOR.............................................................................................................................................. 205 READING EVENT LOG DATA VIA MODBUS......................................................................................................... 206 PROVER LOOP UNITS ......................................................................................................................................... 208 PROVER LOOP PRESSURE................................................................................................................................. 209 PROVER LOOP TEMPERATURE.......................................................................................................................... 211 DENSITY LOOP UNITS......................................................................................................................................... 213 DENSITY LOOP PRESSURE ................................................................................................................................ 214 DENSITY LOOP TEMPERATURE ......................................................................................................................... 215 PROVER SETTINGS............................................................................................................................................. 216 FOUR WAY VALVE............................................................................................................................................... 217 PROVER LOOP INFORMATION............................................................................................................................ 218 PROVER CALCULATIONS.................................................................................................................................... 219 VALVE CONTROL................................................................................................................................................. 220 DATA TREE................................................................................................................................................................ 221 PRESET DATA...................................................................................................................................................... 222 ACTIVE DATA....................................................................................................................................................... 239 LOCAL VALUES.................................................................................................................................................... 260 COUNTERS .......................................................................................................................................................... 262 STATION CONTROLLER ...................................................................................................................................... 265

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 15 (V6.300) 01-02-09

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE START UP SCREENS

OK Button

Cancel Button User Name Text Box Default USER

Password Test Box Default password It will show as ********

Build Date Box , may be required for diagnostics

Language option from : English

ENTER User name. Default Level 3 User with Full access is USER ENTER Password. Default Level 3 Password is password it will appear on the screen as ******** SELECT Language option. At present English is only available type. SELECT OK Button to confirm and move to next window SELECT Cancel Button to Clear and start again.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 1 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.1.1. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE UNIT CONNECTION LIST

Highlighted Unit type Highlight Unit Type to connect to CONNECT NEW MODIFY DELETE EDIT OFFLINE

Unit Connection List Window

Connects to a Previously configured Unit Creates a new connec tion See Box below Function Buttons Changes a existing connection See Box below Deletes an Existing connection Enables a Virtual set-up which can be alter ed , saved or downloaded into a machi ne.

Connection baud rate Unit name text box OK Button Cancel Button Comms Id Normally 0

Instrument Serial Number

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 2 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.1.2. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE UNIT COMMUNICATION PORT SET-UP

Select Options Select Comms Port

Selected Comms Port Port Status

Select Port to be Used Status box indicates current status of Selected Port OK Button confirms Cancel Button clears and cancels the option

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 3 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.1.3. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE MODBUS COMMUNICATION PORT SET-UP

Select Options Modbus Comm Settings

Selected Comms Port Port Status

Select Port to be Used Status box indicates current status of Selected Port Select Modbus id 1 to 255 Baud Rate 1200 to 115k baud Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop Bits 1 or 2 No Bits 7 or 8 Protocol Modbus ASCII or Modbus RTU Connection RS232 or RS485 OK Button confirms Cancel Button clears and cancels the option

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 4 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.1.4. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE UNIT USERS SET-UP

Select Users Select Edit Users List

Current Users List

New Users Entry Window Select Edit Users List Users window will show list of current Users and their Access Level. Note Only Level 3 Access Users can create new Users. To create a New User, select New User and Enter the data on the New User Window. To Modify an existing User, Highlight the User to be modified and use Modify User button. To Delete an existing User, Highlight the User to be deleted and use Delete User button. If creating a Level 2 User, the operator will be prompted to make each of the Various pages or parts of pages for this USER either : Editable. Data is allowed to be changed Read Only. Data can be Read but not changed Hidden. Page is hidden. Close button closes the create new USER Session.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 5 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.1.5. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE UNIT AUDIT LOG

Select Audit Log

Select or

Read Event Log Read Alarm Log

Select Audit Log Select Read Event Log or Select Read Alarm Log or Select Read Event Log using Modbus protocol or Select Load Previous (Loads a saved Alarm or Event Log)

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 6 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction

Event Number

Event Details

Time and Date of Event

Event or Alarm Log can be saved ,or printed

The Event or Alarm Log can also be displayed in various forms using the Display options Menu.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 7 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.2. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS Version 2 SOFTWARE START UP SCREENS

User Name Text Box Default USER

Password Test Box Default password It will show as ********

Language option from : English

OK Button

Cancel Button

ENTER User name. Default Level 3 User with Full access is USER ENTER Password. Default Level 3 Password is password it will appear on the screen as ******** SELECT Language option. At present English is only available type. SELECT OK Button to confirm and move to next window SELECT Cancel Button to Clear and start again.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 8 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.2.1. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS Version 2 SOFTWARE UNIT CONNECTION LIST

Highlighted Unit type Highlight Unit Type to connect to

Unit Connection List Window

Function Buttons Connects to a Previously configured Unit Unit name text box Unit type Comms Id Normally 0 Instrument Serial Number Connection Method PC Comms Port Number

OK Button

Cancel Button

Connection baud rate

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 9 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction

Enables a Virtual set-up which can be altered , saved or downloaded into a machine. Standard or Large memory Retreive Software Version from Unit Software Version Flow Computer type

OK Button

Cancel Button

Creates a new connection automatically. Follow the On screen Instructions for setting up a unit.

Allows a new software version to be downloaded into the FC2000. See Section 3 for details

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 10 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.2.2. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE USERS SET-UP

Select Edit Users List Users window will show list of current Users and their Access Level o Note Only Level 3 Access Users can create new Users. To create a New User , select New User and Enter the data on the New User Window. To Modify an existing User, Highlight the User to be modified and use M odify User button. To Delete an existing User, Highlight the User to be deleted and use Delete User button. If creating a Level 2 User, the operator will be prompted to make each of the Various pages or parts of pages for this USER either : Editable Data is allowed to be changed Read Only Data can be Read but not changed Hidden Page is hidden. Close button closes the create new USER Session.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 11 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.2.3. Communications Serial MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE PREFERENCES SET-UP

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 12 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Communication TCP I/P

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 13 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Users

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 14 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Appearance, Connection List, Column Widths

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 15 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Appearance, Connection List, Position & Size

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 16 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Appearance, Main Frame Position & Size, Child Frame, Position & Size

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 17 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Appearance, Tool tips

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 18 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Behaviour

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 19 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.2.4. MODEL 2000 WINDOWS SOFTWARE READ DATA OPTIONS Once a selected Unit has been connected to , the following option page will be available , each of the Read buttons can be se lected and the following pages will be shown . Preset Data Screen

Active Data Screen

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 20 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Read Log Data Set -up Screen

Log Data Screen

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 21 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Event Log Screen

Alarm Log Screen

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 22 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 1.0 Introduction Clear Data Screen

Typical Set-up Data Screen

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 23 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2. MODBUS COMMUNICATION DESCRIPTION 2.1. MODBUS OPERATION FOR STANDARD VARIABLES

The Modbus set-up page allows the operator to set-up MODBUS COMMUNICATION data lists that can then be accessed via the communication ports of the unit. The Modbus page is divided into a number of sections a) Allows the user to do the following functions :Create a New set-up. Rename an existing set-up. Delete an existing set-up. Under the Extra Key. Import Modbus Set-up from other units. Export Modbus Set-up to other files or unit. Print Modbus Set-up NOTE the user can create up to 10 different set-ups, however only one set-up can be accessed from each communication port at a time. b) Data Tree This contains all the possible data that can be accessed via a MODBUS communication port. Any required data item or data file can be dragged across to the MODBUS set-up window to be included in the active set-up. c) Modbus Set-up The Modbus set-up window assigns the necessary MODBUS communication set-up to each data item or block of data items that are dragged into the Window from the data tree. The items that need to be configured, and the options for each data item are as follows:Address Number type any address in the range 0H to FFFFH or 0D to 65535D can be selected from :Char 8 bit Unsigned Char 8 bit Boolean 8 bit Integer 32 bit Unsigned Int 32 bit Short 16 bit Unsigned Short 16 bit Float 32 bit Double 64 bit Time 64 bit egTime 8 bit Modbus Time 64 bit 8 Byte Status 64 bit can be selected from 1234 4321 2143 3412 can be selected from 1 byte 2 bytes 4 bytes 8 bytes can be selected from None Read Write Read/Write Set-up

Byte Order

Register size

Latch

Each of the above parameters can be set by selecting the variable name to be formatted and left clicking on it a selection box for each of the above items will appear and the format can be set. If it is required to set a complete column of items to have the same format then this can be achieved by instead of selecting an individual item, selecting the header for that column, a small menu will appear detailing the options for that column and the required item can then be selected.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 24 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication d) Auto-Functions All the data fields in the Modbus window can be both autom atically filled if the Ask to Fill Fields tick box is enabled and can be automatically adjusted for register size and number format if the Auto Adjust Address tick box is enabled. e) Logged Data This button allows the user to switch between a standard data set-up and a logged data set-up.

f) Validate The Validate button function checks to determine if the set-up that is currently in the MODBUS set-up window is valid and can be used. This function should be checked whenever a new set-up is created. g) Modbus Timeout The Modbus Timeout value allows a time in seconds to be set, if the Modbus comms register is not accessed within that time either by a valid Modbus read or write then a Modbus Communication Timeout alarm will be set.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 25 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.2. MODBUS OPERATION FOR LOGGING VARIABLES The Modbus page is divided into approximately 6 different sections a) Set-up Allows the user to do the following functions :Create a New set-up. Rename an existing set-up. Delete an existing set -up. Under the Extra Key. Import Modbus Set-up from other units. Export Modbus Set-up to other files or unit. Print Modbus Set-up NOTE the user can create up to 10 different set-ups, however only one set-up can be accessed from each communication port at a time. b) Data Tree This contains all the possible data that can be accessed via a MODBUS communication port. Any required data item or data file can be dragged across to the MODBUS set-up window to be included in the active set-up. c) Modbus Set-up The Modbus set-up window assigns the necessary MODBUS communication set-up to each data item or block of data items that are dragged into the Window from the data tree. The items that need to be configured, and the options for each data item are as follows:Address any address in the range 0H to FFFFH or 0D to 65535D Number type can be selected from :Char 8 bit Unsigned Char 8 bit Boolean 8 bit Integer 32 bit Unsigned Int 32 bit Short 16 bit Unsigned Short 16 bit Float 32 bit Double 64 bit Time 64 bit egTime 8 bit Modbus Time 64 bit 8 Byte Status 64 bit Byte Order can be selected from 1234 4321 2143 3412 Register size can be selected from 1 byte 2 bytes 4 bytes 8 bytes Each of the above parameters can be set by selecting the variable name to be formatted and left clicking on it a selection box for each of the above items will appear and the format can be set. If it is required to set a complete column of items to have the same format then this can be achieved by instead of selecting an individual item, selecting the header for that column, a small menu will appear detailing the options for that column and the required item can then be selected. At the top of each logging MODBUS set up window will be a line of symbols similar to as follows;Log : 1 AM : Address AI : Auto LE : 100

These symbols refer to the access methods for this MODBUS Logging set-up. There are 2 basic access methods which can be altered by selecting the top line and clicking on the edit function. the methods are as follows;1) Address Based means that each logged item will have a separate address, this method can be sub-divided into two further types Push Up and Push Down. Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 26 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Push Up Push Down means that all addresses increment from a given starting address. means that all addresses decrement from a given starting address.

The definition line for an Address Based set-up would be as follows;Log : 1 Log AM AI LE AM : Address AI : Auto LE : 100 means Log set-up number 1 to 16 means Access method can be Address Based or Register Based. means Address increment this can be automatic or entered means the number of log entries

2) Register Based means that the address of the logged record to be read is defined in a separate register, this method can be sub-divided into two further types Push Up and Push Down. Push Up means that all addresses increment from a given starting address. Push Down means that all addresses decrement from a given starting address. This method is only intended to be used where the amount of logged data that is available in the Model 2000 far exceeds the available MODBUS addresses. The method used would then be to have Data stored for any particular log time stored at a range of defined addresses. Then the particular record to be accessed would always be read from the same range of addresses. The definition line for an Register Based set-up would be as follows;Log : 1 AM : Register EA : Fixed Log means Log set-up number 1 to 16 AM means Access method can be Address Based or Register Based. EA means Entry Address i.e. the Address of the register to be written to define a the actual log required, for example if 1000 log entries exist and it is required to read 123 then 123 would be written in the Entry Address register and the logged data for record 123 out of 1000 could be read from the addresses set up in the Modbus window. d) Auto-Functions All the data fields in the Modbus window can be both autom atically filled if the Ask to Fill Fields tick box is enabled and can be automatically adjusted for register size and number format if the Auto Adjust Address tick box is enabled. e) Logged Data This button allows the user to switch between a standard data set-up and a logged data set-up.

f) Validate The Validate button function checks to determine if the set-up that is currently in the MODBUS set-up window is valid and can be used. This function should be checked whenever a new set-up is created. g) Modbus Timeout The Modbus Timeout value allows a time in seconds to be set, if the Modbus comms register is not accessed within that time either by a valid Modbus read or write then a Modbus Communication Timeout alarm will be set.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 27 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.3. MODBUS OPERATION FOR STATUS BITS

The Modbus page is divided into approximately 6 different sections data covered under this section is referred to under the status bits tab. a) Set-up Allows the user to do the following functions :Create a New set-up. Rename an existing set-up. Delete an existing set -up. Under the Extra Key. Import Modbus Set-up from other units. Export Modbus Set-up to other files or unit. Print Modbus Set-up

NOTE the user can create up to 10 different set-ups, however only one set-up can be accessed from each communication port at a time. b) Logged Data This button allows the user to switch between a standard data set-up and a logged data set-up.

c) Data Tree This contains all the possible status bits that can be accessed via a MODBUS communication port. Any required data item or data file can be dragged across to the MODBUS set-up window to be included in the active set-up. d) Modbus Set-up The Modbus set-up window assigns the necessary MODBUS communication set-up to each data item or block of data items that are dragged into the Window from the data tree. The items that need to be configured, and the options for each data item are as follows:Address any address in the range 0H to FFFFH or 0D to 65535D Number type can be selected from :Boolean Byte Order can be selected from 1234 4321 2143 3412 No Change Register size can be selected from 1 byte 2 bytes 4 bytes 8 bytes No Change Latch can be selected from No latch Latch on Read Latch on Write Latch on Read or Write No Change Each bit can also be inverted so that either a Logic 0 or Logic 1 can represent an ON state. Each of the above parameters can be set by selecting the variable name to be formatted and left clicking on it a selection box for each of the above items will appear and the format can be set. If it is required to set a complete column of items to have the same format then this can be achieved by instead of selecting an individual item, selecting the header for that column, a small menu will appear detailing the options for that column and the required item can then be selected. e) Auto-Functions All the data fields in the Modbus window can be both automatically filled if the Auto Fill Fields tick box is enabled and can be au tomatically adjusted for register size and number format if the Auto Adjust Address tick box is enabled. f) Validate The Validate button function checks to determine if the set-up that is currently in the MODBUS set-up window is valid and can be used. This function should be checked whenever a new set-up is created. g) Modbus Timeout The Modbus Timeout value allows a time in seconds to be set, if the Modbus comms register is not accessed within that time either by a valid Modbus read or write then a Modbus Communication Timeout alarm will be set.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 28 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication NUMBER FORMATS 2.4.1. TIME FORMAT 64 bit All Times and Dates available to be read or written via MODBUS in the Model 2000 are in the TIME or Modbus TIME format which is a 64 bit number with the following attributes:SSMMHHWDDDmmYYxx Where SS MM HH WD DD mm YY xx Seconds valid numbers in the range 0 to 59 Minutes valid numbers in the range 0 to 59 Hours valid numbers in the range 0 to 23 (0=midnight) Week Day Number valid numbers in the range 1 to 7 (1=Sunday) Day valid numbers in the range 1 to 31 Month valid numbers in the range 1 to 12 Years valid numbers in the range 0 to 99 (assumed to be 20xx) Fault/Validation code 2.4.

Notes The above item will be recognised by the M2000 and windows software as a time and Date format. It cannot be cast as any other format i.e. a double or float etc. It can be sent in any available byte order i.e. 1234 or 4321. It can be split in to available register sizes i.e. 1*8 or 2*4 etc. For writing the Time and Date the Week Day does not need to be correct only valid the M2000 will correct it, so e.g. it could always be written as 1. For writing the Time and Date the Fault/Validation code is ignored i.e. it does not need to have any value. For reading if the Validation code is set the Time and Date is Valid if it is returned as 0 (zero) then the RTC device in the M2000 is faulty. 2.4.2. EG TIME FORMAT 8 bit Times and Dates available to be written via MODBUS in the Model 2000 as individual 8 bit registers in the EG TIME or Modbus EG TIME format which is an 8 bit number with the same attributes as an unsigned Char:A typical implementation follows:Register Description Register Type Address 9006 Writable register for Month EG Time 9007 Writable register for day EG Time 9008 Writable register for year EG Time 9009 Writable register for hour EG Time 9010 Writable register for minute EG Time 9011 Writable register for second EG Time As the above registers can be written individually i.e. the hours can be written without affecting the values of the hours for example, these registers should not be used for reading the Time individually, for this function a separate set of registers should be used. An example of a typical implementation for reading the System time as individual registers follows:Register Address 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 Description Month (1-12) (read register) Day (1 31) (read register) Year (0 65535) (read register) Hour (0 23) (read register) Minute (0 59) (read register) Register Type Unsigned Char Unsigned Char Unsigned Char Unsigned Char Unsigned Char

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 29 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.4.3. UNSIGNED LONG 32 bit Status Format The Status items are sent as 32 bit Unsigned Long integer Range 0 to FFFFFFFFH (4294967295) with individual bits defined in the Alarm Status Bit Lists See Section 2.7 2.4.4. DOUBLE FORMAT 64 bit Data items are sent as 64 bit IEEE Float format Range 1.7 x 10-308 to 1.7 x 10308. !increasing significance i double 63 s 51 biased exponent 1 significand 0 Number of bits

s = Sign bit ( 0 = positive , 1 = negative ) i = Position of implicit binary point 1 = Integer bit of significand Exponent bias (normalised value) 1023 (3FFH) 2.4.5. FLOAT FORMAT 32 bit Data items are sent as 32 bit IEEE Float format Range 3.4 x 10-38 to 3.4x 10 38. !increasing significance i float s 31 22 biased exponent 1 significand 0 Number of bits

s = Sign bit ( 0 = positive , 1 = negative ) i = Position of implicit binary point 1 = Integer bit of significand Exponent bias (normalised value) 127 (7FH) 2.4.6. LONG INTEGER FORMAT 32 bit Data items are sent as 32 bit Long Integer format Range 2147483648 to 2147483647 !increasing significance long int s 31 s = Sign bit ( 0 = positive , 1 = negative ) magnitude 0 Number of bits

2.4.7. SHORT INTEGER FORMAT 16 bit Data items are sent as 16 bit Long Integer format Range 32768 to 32767 !increasing significance Int s 15 s = Sign bit ( 0 = positive , 1 = negative ) magnitude 0 Number of bits

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 30 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.4.8. CHAR FORMAT 8 bit

8 bit Character Range -128 to 127 2.4.9. UNSIGNED LONG INTEGER FORMAT 32 bit

Data items are sent as 32 bit Long Integer format Range 0 to 4294967295 2.4.10. UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER FORMAT 16 bit

Data items are sent as 32 bit Long Integer format Range 0 to 65535 2.4.11. UNSIGNED CHAR or BOOLEAN FORMAT 8 bit

Data items are sent as 8 bit Unsigned Char or Boolean format Range 0 to 255.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 31 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 1) 2) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 2.5. MODBUS ASCII COMMUNICATIONS PACKET DEFINITIONS Read requests :KK03ssssnnnnLL<CRLF> Write requests :KK10ssssnnnnbb<DATA>LL<CRLF> COMMUNICATION RESPONSES Valid Read Requests: :KK03bb<DATA>LL<CRLF Valid Write Requests: :KK10ssssnnnnLL<CRLF> Invalid Read Requests :KK83ccLL<CRLF> Invalid Write Requests :KK90ccLL<CRLF> Nothing

No reply will be received if either the request contains less than 17 characters, or a request packet that does not contain valid hex characters is received or the checksum is invalid. Where: a) : (colon) is an ASCII colon character, all characters before this are ignored except <CRLF> b) KK is the Modbus identification number this must be set to the Modbus identification number of the unit c) 01hex is the Modbus code "Read Coil Status registers" d) 02hex is the Modbus code "Read Input Status registers" e) 03hex is the Modbus code "Read Holding registers" f) 10hex is the Modbus code "Preset multiple registers" g) ssss is the start address in the range 0000 to FFFF (0 to 63535 decimal). h) nnnn number of registers in the range 0001 to 00FF (1 to 255 decimal). i) bb is the number of bytes to be transferred. j) LL is the LRC a checksum formed by summing each pair of hex digits and then subtracting the result from 0, modulo 256 k) <DATA> data nnnn items l) <CRLF> Carriage return, line feed in ASCII i.e. 0DH and 0AH m) cc which is an error code this can be: i) 01 The message function received is not an allowable action, it is allowable to read (03hex) or to write (10hex) valid addresses only in the range 0-FFFFH (0-65535).

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 32 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 1) 2) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 2.6. MODBUS RTU COMMUNICATIONS PACKET DEFINITIONS Read requests [T1-T2-T3-T4]KK03ssssnnnn<CRC>[T1-T2-T3-T4] Write requests [T1-T2-T3-T4]KK10ssssnnnnbb<DATA><CRC>[T1-T2-T3-T4] COMMUNICATION RESPONSES Valid Read Requests: [T1-T2-T3-T4]KK03bb<DATA><CRC>[T1-T2-T3-T4] Valid Write Requests: [T1-T2-T3-T4]KK10ssssnnnn<CRC>[T1-T2-T3-T4] Invalid Read Requests [T1-T2-T3-T4]KK83cc<CRC>[T1-T2-T3-T4] Invalid Write Requests [T1-T2-T3-T4]KK90cc<CRC>[T1-T2-T3-T4] Nothing

No reply will be received if either the request does not contain valid characters or the checksum is invalid. Where: a) [T1-T2-T3-T4] is at least 3.5 character times of silent interval b) KK is the identification number this must be set to the identification number of the unit c) 01hex is the Modbus code "Read Coil Status registers" d) 02hex is the Modbus code "Read Input Status registers" e) 03hex is the Modbus code "Read Holding registers" f) 10hex is the Modbus code "Preset multiple registers" g) ssss is the start address in the range 0000 to FFFF (0 to 63535 decimal). h) nnnn number of registers in the range 0001 to 00FF (1 to 255 decimal). i) bb is the number of bytes to be transferred. j) <CRC> Checksum calculated as a 16 bit CRC as follows 1. Load a 16 bit register with 0000H (all zeros), call this the CRC register. 2. XOR the first 8 bit byte of the message with the low -order byte of the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register. 3. Shift the CRC register one bit to the right (towards the LSB), zero filling the MSB. Extract and examine the LSB. 4. (If the LSB was 0 ) then Repeat Step 3 (another shift), (If LSB was 1) then XOR the CRC register with the Poly value of A001H 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until 8 shifts have been performed. When this is done a complete 8 bit byte will have been processed. 6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for the next 8 bit byte of the message. Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed. 7. The final contents of the CRC register is the CRC value. k) <DATA> data nnnn items l) cc which is an error code this can be: i) 01 The message function received is not an allowable action.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 33 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7. ALARM STATUS BIT DEFINITIONS General Acc.N General Non Acc.N Turbine Acc.N Turbine Non Acc.N Ultrasonic Acc.N Ultrasonic Non.Acc.N Chr.Alarms Stream Chromat.Alarms Status 1 (Acc) Status 2 (Temp) Modbus Alarm Density Acc .Alarms Density Non Acc . Alarms Smart Index Acc .Alarms Smart Index Non Acc .Alarms Oil Level Non Acc.N MT DP Hi.N MT DP Lo.N MT Pressure.N MT Temperature.N Gas Data Max Alarms.N Gas Data Min Alarms.N Gas Data High Alarms.N Gas Data Low Alarms.N Liquid Data Max Alarms.N Liquid Data Min Alarms.N Liquid Data High Alarms.N Liquid Data Low Alarms.N Stn.Con. Alarm Total Alarms Stn.Con. Comparison Alarm The above status words are all 32bit Unsigned Integer types individual bits are defined as follows, any unused bits are set to a 0 (zero).

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 34 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.1. GENERAL ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS General Acc.N qN high The uncorrected flow rate is above the value of Hi qN. for more than 1 minute. znN low Base compressibility outside tolerance znN low. znN high Base compressibility outside tolerance znN high. znN calc Base Compressibility cannot be calculated. zN calc Compressibility cannot be calculated. Any Accountable Gas Data Alarm rdN f hi Relative Density Frequency Alarm High (>5000Hz) rdN f lo Relative Density Frequency Alarm Low (<500Hz) Any Accountable Density Alarm Any Accountable Liquids Alarm crit teN A Liquid Critical Temperature Alarm ZN timeout The Z factor calculations took too long to calculate the correct answer. ZN error The calculated Z was above 10, or below 0.001 and the used value has been fixed to 1. ZnN error The calculated Zn was above 10, or below 0.001 and the used value has been fixed to 1. VoS Dev Deviation between calculated and measured VoS Any Accountable Turbine Alarm Any Accountable US Meter Alarm MT Pressure Accountable Alarm MT Temperature Accountable Alarm MT dp Hi Accountable Alarm MT dp Lo Accountable Alarm 2.7.2. GENERAL NON-ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS General Non Acc.N qN low The uncorrected flow rate is below the value of Lo qN. qN high The uncorrected flow rate is above the value of Hi qN. tempN alrm Temperature below t-alarm and qb above Lo.q for more than preset time period. Any Non - Accountable Gas Data Alarm Any Non - Accountable Density Alarm rd dev Relative Density values in deviation Alarm Any Non - Accountable Liquids Any Non - Accountable Coriolis Alarm VoS Dev Deviation between calculated and measured VoS Any Non - Accountable Turbine Alarm Any Non - Accountable US Meter Alarm MT Pressure Non - Accountable Alarm MT Temperature Non - Accountable Alarm MT dp Hi Non - Accountable Alarm MT dp Lo Non - Accountable Alarm Turbine Acc.N turbN hf Meter IPN 2.7.3. TURBINE ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS 0000 0001 0000 0002

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0100 0000 0200 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0000

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0100 0000 0200 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0000

An hf turbine meter alarm (blade failure). A liquid pulse input alarm has been detected

2.7.4. TURBINE NON-ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS Turbine Non Acc.N turbN lf An lf turbine meter alarm (blade failure).

0000 0001

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 35 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.5. US METER ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS Ultrasonic Acc.N usN paths Wrong number of acoustic paths specified. usN secur Meter security alarm bit set. usN level1 Reduced accuracy alarm. usN level2 Reduced accuracy alarm. usN number Invalid number received alarm. usN comms No valid comms from the meter for last 5 seconds. usN mode FlowSIC Meter in Configuration (Non operational) Mode usN acc st Status alarm usN path1 The meter is indicating an error on path 1 usN path2 The meter is indicating an error on path 2 usN path3 The meter is indicating an error on path 3 usN path4 The meter is indicating an error on path 4 usN eeprom The meter is indicating an error with its EEprom usN ioparm The meter is indicating an error with an IO parameter usN dspflt The meter is indicating an error with its DSP usN dspprm The meter is indicating an error with a DSP parameter usN valid The meter is indicating a valid data error 2.7.6. US METER NON-ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS Ultrasonic Non.Acc.N usN eff.1% Meter path 1 efficiency is below pre-set % limit. usN eff.2% Meter path 2 efficiency is below pre-set % limit. usN eff.3% Meter path 3 efficiency is below pre-set % limit. usN eff.4% Meter path 4 efficiency is below pre-set % limit. usN eff.5% Meter path 5 efficiency is below pre-set % limit. usN units FlowSIC Meter wrong units (not m3) usN Status FlowSIC System Status Alarm usN Status1 FlowSIC Path 1 alarm usN Status2 FlowSIC Path 2 alarm usN Status3 FlowSIC Path 3 alarm usN Status4 FlowSIC Path 4 alarm usN config The meter is indicating a configur ation error usN chkreq The meter is indicating a check r equest alarm usN limwrn The meter is indicating a limit warning usN iornge The meter is indicating an I/O range alarm usN path1 The meter is indicating an error on path 1 usN path2 The meter is indicating an error on path 2 usN path3 The meter is indicating an error on path 3 usN path4 The meter is indicating an error on path 4 usN path5 The meter is indicating an error on path 5 usN hwlock The meter is indicating a hardware lock alarm A non-Accountable alarm is present in FlowSIC status register 1. A non-Accountable alarm is present in FlowSIC status register 2. 2.7.7. FlowSIC 600 ALARM BITS FlowSIC 600 Status register 1 usN SNRw1 The meter is indicating a SNR warning on path 1 usN SNRw2 The meter is indicating a SNR warning on path 2 usN SNRw3 The meter is indicating a SNR warning on path 3 usN SNRw4 The meter is indicating a SNR warning on path 4 usN AGCD1 The meter is indicating an AGC D war ning on path 1 usN AGCD2 The meter is indicating an AGC D war ning on path 2 usN AGCD3 The meter is indicating an AGC D war ning on path 3 usN AGCD4 The meter is indicating an AGC D war ning on path 4 usN AGCL1 The meter is indicating an AGC L warning on path 1 usN AGCL2 The meter is indicating an AGC L warning on path 2 usN AGCL3 The meter is indicating an AGC L warning on path 3 Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 36 of 265

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 4000 0000 8000 0000

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication usN AGCL4 usN SOS1 usN SOS2 usN SOS3 usN SOS4 usN burst1 usN burst2 usN burst3 usN burst4 usN math1 usN math2 usN math3 usN math4 usN big1 usN big2 usN big3 usN big4 usN small1 usN small2 usN small3 usN small4 The meter is indicating an AGC L warning on path 4 The meter is indicating an SOS bur st on path 1 The meter is indicating an SOS bur st on path 2 The meter is indicating an SOS bur st on path 3 The meter is indicating an SOS bur st on path 4 The meter is indicating a burst alarm on path 1 The meter is indicating a burst alarm on path 2 The meter is indicating a burst alarm on path 3 The meter is indicating a burst alarm on path 4 The meter is indicating a maths alarm on path 1 The meter is indicating a maths alarm on path 2 The meter is indicating a maths alarm on path 3 The meter is indicating a maths alarm on path 4 The meter is indicating an overrange alarm on path 1 The meter is indicating an overrange alarm on path 2 The meter is indicating an overrange alarm on path 3 The meter is indicating an overrange alarm on path 4 The meter is indicating an underrange alarm on path 1 The meter is indicating an underrange alarm on path 2 The meter is indicating an underrange alarm on path 3 The meter is indicating an underrange alarm on path 4 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0000

FlowSIC 600 Status register usN early1 The meter is indicating an early alarm on path 1 usN early2 The meter is indicating an early alarm on path 2 usN early3 The meter is indicating an early alarm on path 3 usN early4 The meter is indicating an early alarm on path 4 usN late1 The meter is indicating a late alar m on path 1 usN late2 The meter is indicating a late alar m on path 2 usN late3 The meter is indicating a late alar m on path 3 usN late4 The meter is indicating a late alar m on path 4 usN pther1 The meter is indicating an error on path 1 usN pther2 The meter is indicating an error on path 2 usN pther3 The meter is indicating an error on path 3 usN pther4 The meter is indicating an error on path 4 usN SNRl1 The meter is indicating a SNR error on path 1 usN SNRl2 The meter is indicating a SNR error on path 2 usN SNRl3 The meter is indicating a SNR error on path 3 usN SNRl4 The meter is indicating a SNR error on path 4 usN iter1 The meter is indicating an iteration error on path 1 usN iter2 The meter is indicating an iteration error on path 2 usN iter3 The meter is indicating an iteration error on path 3 usN iter4 The meter is indicating an iteration error on path 4 usN delta1 The meter is indicating a delta alar m on path 1 usN delta2 The meter is indicating a delta al arm on path 2 usN delta3 The meter is indicating a delta alar m on path 3 usN delta4 The meter is indicating a delta alar m on path 4 usN chk1 The meter is indicating a check er ror on path 1 usN chk2 The meter is indicating a check er ror on path 2 usN chk3 The meter is indicating a check er ror on path 3 usN chk4 The meter is indicating a check er ror on path 4 usN MSE1 The meter is indicating a MSE error on path 1 usN MSE2 The meter is indicating a MSE error on path 2 usN MSE3 The meter is indicating a MSE error on path 3 usN MSE4 The meter is indicating a MSE error on path 4 2.7.8. GAS CHROMATAGRAPH ALARM BITS

Chr.Alarms

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 37 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Chrm port Chrm comms Chrm alarm Chrm comp Chrm off Chrm NETst Chrm NETEr Chrm str Chrm cal Chrm state Chrm data Gas Chromatograph port error Accountable Gas Chromatograph communication alarm Accountable Gas Chromatograph status alarm Accountable Gas Chromatograph component alarm Accountable Gas Chromatograph offline alarm Accountable Gas Chromatograph network status error Accountable Gas Chromatograph network error Accountable Gas Chromatograph stream error Non Accountable Gas Chromatograph in cal mode Non Accountable Gas Chromatograph in wrong state Non Accountable Gas Chromatograph has no new data Non Accountable 0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0010 0000

2.7.9. STREAM GAS CHROMATAGRAPH ALARM BITS Stream Chromat.Alarms Chrm str N Gas Chromatograph Stream specific Alarm Status 1 (Acc) Status 1 (Acc) Alarm Status 2 (Temp) Status 2 (Temp) Alarm Modbus Alarm Modbus Err Modbus Timeout Accountable Alarm

0000 0001 0000 0010 0000 0080 0000 0001

2.7.10. DENSITY METER ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS Density Acc .Alarms dm1.N-f hi Density Meter 1 frequency input above 5000Hz. dm2.N-f hi Density Meter 2 frequency input above 5000Hz. dm1.N-f lo Density Meter 1 frequency input below 500Hz dm2.N-f lo Density Meter 2 frequency input below 500Hz dm1.N val Density Meter 1 Temperature sensor has no value. dm1.N hart Density Meter 1 Temperature sensor has a hart alarm. dm1.N htst Density Meter 1 Temperature sensor has a hart status alarm dm1.N unit Density Meter 1 Temperature sensor is in the wrong units dm1.N min Density Meter 1 Temperature sensor is below the minimum. dm1.N max Density Meter 1 Temperature sensor is above the maximum. dm2.N val Density Meter 2 Temperature sensor has no value. dm2.N hart Density Meter 2 Temperature sensor has a hart alarm. dm2.N htst Density Meter 2 Temperature sensor has a hart status alarm dm2.N unit Density Meter 2 Temperature sensor is in the wrong units dm2.N min Density Meter 2 Temperature sensor is below the minimum. dm2.N max Density Meter 2 Temperature sensor is above the maximum. dm val max Density value received from the coriolis meter is above the maximum. dm val min Density value received from the coriolis meter is below the minimum.

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 38 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.11. DENSITY METER NON ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS Density Non Acc . Alarms dens.1 hi Density 1 above Hi alarm levels. dens.2 hi Density 2 above Hi alarm levels. dens.1 lo Density 1 below Lo alarm levels. dens.2 lo Density 2 below Lo alarm levels. dens. dev Density values in deviation 2.7.12. SMART INDEX ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS Smart index Acc .Alarms si.1 comms Smart Index Communication failure si.1 packet Smart Index Packet failure 2.7.13. SMART INDEX NON ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS Smart index Non Acc . Alarms si.1.reset1 Code 0x31 reset and no valid code in EEPROM si.1.reset2 Code 0x32 reset and index values are equal si1.2ram Code 0x33 2 of 3 Ram index values are equal si.1.3ram Code 0x34 all of 3 index values are equal si.1.wire Code 0x35 Failure of Wiegand pulse wire si.1.namur Code 0x36 items missing in Namur protocol si.1.ram Code 0x37 Ram check failure si1.eeprom Code 0x38 EPROM check failure si.1.other Any other received status code 2.7.14. LUBRICATION MODULE NON-ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS Oil Level Non Acc.N lubN flow Lubrication low flow lubN oil Lubrication system oil level lubN pistn Lubrication system piston count deviation lubN press Lubrication system pressure vent

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0100

0000 0001 0000 0002

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100

0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 39 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication MT DP Hi.N dph1.N val dph2.N val dph3.N val dph1.N hrt dph2.N hrt dph3.N hrt dph1.N hst dph2.N hst dph3.N hst dph1.N unt dph2.N unt dph3.N unt dph1.N min dph2.N min dph3.N min dph1.N max dph2.N max dph3.N max dph1.N dev dph2.N dev dph3.N dev dphserN min dphserN max dphN Low dphN High 2.7.15. MULTIPLE DP Hi TRANSMITTER ALARM BITS 0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000

There is no value for dp hi sensor 1. There is no value for dp hi sensor 2. There is no value for dp hi sensor 3. A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and dp hi sensor 1. A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and dp hi sensor 2. A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and dp hi sensor 3. dp hi sensor 1 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. dp hi sensor 2 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. dp hi sensor 3 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. The selected dp hi units do not match the units indicated by dp hi sensor 1. The selected dp hi units do not match the units indicated by dp hi sensor 2. The selected dp hi units do not match the units indicated by dp hi sensor 3. dp hi of sensor 1 is below the values of dp hiN min. dp hi of sensor 2 is below the values of dp hiN min. dp hi of sensor 3 is below the values of dp hiN min. dp hi sensor 1 is above the values of dp hiN max. dp hi sensor 2 is above the values of dp hiN max. dp hi sensor 3 is above the values of dp hiN max. dp hi sensor 1 is outside the deviation limit. dp hi sensor 2 is outside the deviation limit. dp hi sensor 3 is outside the deviation limit. The serial check dp hi is below the value of dp hi.N min. The serial check dp hi is above the value of dp hi.N max. The dp hi used is below the values of dp hiN Low. Non Accountable The dp hi used is above the values of dp hiN High. Non Accountable

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 40 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication MT DP Lo.N dpl1.N val dpl2.N val dpl3.N val dpl1.N hrt dpl2.N hrt dpl3.N hrt dpl1.N hst dpl2.N hst dpl3.N hst dpl1.N unt dpl2.N unt dpl3.N unt dpl1.N min dpl2.N min dpl3.N min dpl1.N max dpl2.N max dpl3.N max dpl1.N dev dpl2.N dev dpl3.N dev dplserN min dplserN max dplN Low dplN High 2.7.16. MULTIPLE DP Lo TRANSMITTER ALARM BITS 0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000

There is no value for dp lo sensor 1. There is no value for dp lo sensor 2. There is no value for dp lo sensor 3. A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and dp lo sensor 1. A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and dp lo sensor 2. A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and dp lo sensor 3. dp lo sensor 1 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. dp lo sensor 2 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. dp lo sensor 3 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. The selected dp lo units do not match the units indicated by dp lo sensor 1. The selected dp lo units do not match the units indicated by dp lo sensor 2. The selected dp lo units do not match the units indicated by dp lo sensor 3. dp lo of sensor 1 is below the values of dp loN min. dp lo of sensor 2 is below the values of dp loN min. dp lo of sensor 3 is below the values of dp loN min. dp lo sensor 1 is above the values of dp loN max. dp lo sensor 2 is above the values of dp loN max. dp lo sensor 3 is above the values of dp loN max. dp lo sensor 1 is outside the deviation limit. dp lo sensor 2 is outside the deviation limit. dp lo sensor 3 is outside the deviation limit. The serial check dp lo is below the value of dp lo.N min. The serial check dp lo is above the value of dp lo.N max. The dp lo used is below the values of dp loN Low. Non Accountable The dp lo used is above the values of dp loN High. Non Accountable

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 41 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.17. MULTIPLE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ALARM BITS MT Pressure.N pr1.N val There is no value for pressure sensor 1. pr2.N val There is no value for pressure sensor 2. pr3.N val There is no value for pressure sensor 3. pr1.N hart A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and pressure sensor 1. pr2.N hart A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and pressure sensor 2. pr3.N hart A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and pressure sensor 3. pr1.N hsts Pressure sensor 1 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. pr2.N hsts Pressure sensor 2 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. pr3.N hsts Pressure sensor 3 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. pr1.N unit The selected pressure units do not match the units indicated by pressure sensor 1. pr2.N unit The selected pressure units do not match the units indicated by pressure sensor 2. pr3.N unit The selected pressure units do not match the units indicated by pressure sensor 3. pr1.N min Pressure sensor 1 is below the values of pressureN min. pr2.N min Pressure sensor 2 is below the values of pressureN min. pr3.N min Pressure sensor 3 is below the values of pressureN min. pr1.N max Pressure sensor 1 is above the values of pressureN max. pr2.N max Pressure sensor 2 is above the values of pressureN max. pr3.N max Pressure sensor 3 is above the values of pressureN max. pr1.N dev Pressure sensor 1 is outside the deviation limit. pr2.N dev Pressure sensor 2 is outside the deviation limit. pr3.N dev Pressure sensor 3 is outside the deviation limit. prserlN min The serial check pressure is below the value of pressure.N min. prserlN max The serial check pressure is above the value of pressure.N max. prN Low The pressure used is below the values of PressureN Low. Non Accountable prN High The pressure used is above the values of PressureN High. Non Accountable

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 42 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.18. MULTIPLE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER ALARM BITS MT Temperature.N te1.N val There is no value for temperature sensor 1. te2.N val There is no value for temperature sensor 2. te3.N val There is no value for temperature sensor 3. te1.N hart A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and temperature sensor 1. te2.N hart A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and temperature sensor 2. te3.N hart A communications failure has occurred between the Model 2000 and temperature sensor 3. te1.N hsts Temperature sensor 1 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. te2.N hsts Temperature sensor 2 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. te3.N hsts Temperature sensor 3 is in a sensor generated alarm condition. te1.N unit The selected temperature units do not match the units indicated by temperature sensor 1. pr2.N unit The selected temperature units do not match the units indicated by temperature sensor 2. te3.N unit The selected temperature units do not match the units indicated by temperature sensor 3. te1.N min Temperature sensor 1 is below the values of temperatureN min. te2.N min Temperature sensor 2 is below the values of temperatureN min. te3.N min Temperature sensor 3 is below the values of temperatureN min. te1.N max Temperature sensor 1 is above the values of temperatureN max. te2.N max Temperature sensor 2 is above the values of temperatureN max. te3.N max Temperature sensor 3 is above the values of temperatureN max. te1.N dev Temperature sensor 1 is outside the deviation limit. te2.N dev Temperature sensor 2 is outside the deviation limit. te3.N dev Temperature sensor 3 is outside the deviation limit. teserlN min The serial check temperature is below the value of temperature.N min. teserlN max The serial check temperature is above the value of temperature.N max. teN Low The temperature used is below the values of TemperatureN Low. Non Accountable teN High The temperature used is above the values of TemperatureN High. Non Accountable

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 43 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.19. GAS DATA ACCOUNTABLE MAXIMUM ALARM BITS Gas Data Max Alarms.N rd.N max Relative Density Maximum Alarm Hs.N max Superior Heating Value Maximum Alarm Hi.N max Inferior Heating Value Maximum Alarm CH4.N max Methane Maximum Alarm N2.N max Nitrogen Maximum Alarm CO2.N max Carbon Dioxide Maximum Alarm C2H6.N max Ethane Maximum Alarm C3H8.N max Propane Maximum Alarm H2O.N max Water Vapour Maximum Alarm H2S.N max Hydrogen Sulphide Maximum Alarm H2.N max Hydrogen Maximum Alarm CO.N max Carbon Monoxide Maximum Alarm O2.N max Oxygen Maximum Alarm IC4H10.N max I-Butane Maximum Alarm NC4H10.N max N-Butane Maximum Alarm IC5H12.N max I-Pentane Maximum Alarm NC5H12.N max N-Pentane Maximum Alarm NC6H14.N max Hexane Maximum Alarm NC7H16.N max Heptane Maximum Alarm NC8H18.N max Octane Maximum Alarm NC9H20.N max Nonane Maximum Alarm NC10H22.N max Decane Maximum Alarm He.N max Helium Maximum Alarm Ar.N max Argon Maximum Alarm neo-C5.N max neo-pentane Maximum Alarm IC6H14.Nmx 2 Methylpentane Maximum Alarm MC6H14.Nmx 3 Methylpentane Maximum Alarm NC6H14.Nmx 2,2 Dimethylbutane Maximum Alarm DC6H14.Nmx 2,3 Dimethylbutane Maximum Alarm C2H4.N max Ethylene Maximum Alarm C3H6.N max Propylene Maximum Alar m C4H8.N max 1 Butene Maximum Alarm CC4H8.Nmax TC4H8.Nmax IC4H8.Nmax PC5H10.Nmx C3H4.N max AC4H6.Nmax BC4H6.Nmax C2H2.N max CC5H10.Nmx MC6H12.Nmx EC6H12.Nmx C6H12.Nmax MC7H14.Nmx EC8H16.Nmx C6H6.N max C7H8.N max EC8H10.Nmx C8H10.Nmax CH3OH.Nmax CH4S.N max NH3.N max HCN.N max OCS.N max CS2.N max Cis 2 Butene Maximum Alarm Trans 2 Butene Maximum Alarm 2 Methylpropene Maximum Alarm 1 Pentene Maximum Alarm Propadiene Maximum Alarm 1,2 Butadiene Maximum Alarm 1,3 Butadiene Maximum Alarm Acetylene Maximum Alarm Cyclopentane Maximum Alarm Methylcyclopentane Maximum Alarm Ethylcyclopentane Maximum Alarm Cyclohexane M aximum Alarm Methylcyclohexane Maximum Alarm Ethylcyclohexane Maximum Alarm Benzene Maximum Alarm Toluene Maximum Alarm Ethylbenzene Maximum Alarm 0 Xylene Maximum Alarm Methanol Maximum Alarm Methanethiol Maximum Alarm Ammonia Maximum Alarm Hydrogen Cyanide Maximum Alarm Carbonyl sulphide Maximum Alarm Carbon disulphide Maximum Alarm

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 44 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.20. GAS DATA ACCOUNTABLE MINIMUM ALARM BITS Gas Data Min Alarms.N rd.N min Relative Density Minimum Alarm Hs.N min Superior Heating Value Minimum Alarm Hi.N min Inferior Heating Value Minimum Alarm CH4.N min Methane Minimum Alarm N2.N min Nitrogen Minimum Alarm CO2.N min Carbon Dioxide Minimum Alarm C2H6.N min Ethane Minimum Alarm C3H8.N min Propane Minimum Alarm H2O.N min Water Vapour Minimum Alarm H2S.N min Hydrogen Sulphide Minimum Alarm H2.N min Hydrogen Minimum Alarm CO.N min Carbon Monoxide Minimum Alarm O2.N min Oxygen Minimum Alarm IC4H10.N min I-Butane Minimum Alarm NC4H10.N min N-Butane Minimum Alarm IC5H12.N min I-Pentane Minimum Alarm NC5H12.N min N-Pentane Minimum Alarm NC6H14.N min Hexane Minimum Alarm NC7H16.N min Heptane Minimum Alarm NC8H18.N min Octane Minimum Alarm NC9H20.N min Nonane Minimum Alarm NC10H22.N min Decane Minimum Alarm He.N min Helium Minimum Alarm Ar.N min Argon Minimum Alarm neo-C5.N min neo-pentane Minimum Alarm IC6H14.Nmn 2 Methylpentane Minimum Alarm MC6H14.Nmn 3 Methylpentane Minimum Alarm NC6H14.Nmn 2,2 Dimethylbutane Minimum Alarm DC6H14.Nmn 2,3 Dimethylbutane Minimum Alarm C2H4.N min Ethylene Minimum Alarm C3H6.N min Propylene Minimum Alarm C4H8.N min 1 Butene Minimum Alarm CC4H8.Nmin TC4H8.Nmin IC4H8.Nmin PC5H10.Nmn C3H4.N min AC4H6.Nmin BC4H6.Nmin C2H2.N min CC5H10.Nmn MC6H12.Nmn EC6H12.Nmn C6H12.Nmin MC7H14.Nmn EC8H16.Nmn C6H6.N min C7H8.N min EC8H10.Nmn C8H10.Nmin CH3OH.Nmin CH4S.N min NH3.N min HCN.N min OCS.N min CS2.N min Cis 2 Butene Minimum Alarm Trans 2 Butene Minimum Alarm 2 Methylpropene Minimum Alarm 1 Pentene Minimum Alarm Propadiene Minimum Alarm 1,2 Butadiene Minimum Alarm 1,3 Butadiene Minimum Alarm Acetylene Minimum Alarm Cyclopentane Minimum Alarm Methylcyclopentane Minimum Alarm Ethylcyclopentane Minimum Alarm Cyclohexane M inimum Alarm Methylcyclohexane Minimum Alarm Ethylcyclohexane Minimum Alarm Benzene Minimum Alarm Toluene Minimum Alarm Ethylbenzene Minimum Alarm 0 Xylene Minimum Alarm Methanol Minimum Alarm Methanethiol Minimum Alarm Ammonia Minimum Alarm Hydrogen Cyanide Minimum Alarm Carbonyl sulphide Minimum Alarm Carbon disulphide Minimum Alarm

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 00800000 01000000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 45 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.21. GAS DATA NON-ACCOUNTABLE HIGH ALARM BITS Gas Data High Alarms.N rd.N hi Relative Density High Alarm Hs.N hi Superior Heating Value High Alarm Hi.N hi Inferior Heating Value High Alarm CH4.N hi Methane High Alarm N2.N hi Nitrogen High Alarm CO2.N hi Carbon Dioxide High Alarm C2H6.N hi Ethane High Alarm C3H8.N hi Propane High Alarm H2O.N hi Water Vapour High Alarm H2S.N hi Hydrogen Sulphide High Alarm H2.N hi Hydrogen High Alarm CO.N hi Carbon Monoxide High Alarm O2.N hi Oxygen High Alarm IC4H10.N hi I-Butane High Alarm NC4H10.N hi N-Butane High Alarm IC5H12.N hi I-Pentane High Alarm NC5H12.N hi N-Pentane High Alarm NC6H14.N hi Hexane High Alarm NC7H16.N hi Heptane High Alarm NC8H18.N hi Octane High Alarm NC9H20.N hi Nonane High Alarm NC10H22.N hi Decane High Alarm He.N hi Helium High Alarm Ar.N hi Argon High Alarm neo-C5.N hi neo-pentane High Alarm IC6H14.Nhi 2 Methylpentane High Alarm MC6H14.Nhi 3 Methylpentane High Alarm NC6H14.Nhi 2,2 Dimethylbutane High Alarm DC6H14.Nhi 2,3 Dimethylbutane High Alarm C2H4.N hi Ethylene High Alarm C3H6.N hi Propylene High Alarm C4H8.N hi 1 Butene High Alarm CC4H8.Nhi TC4H8.Nhi IC4H8.Nhi PC5H10.Nhi C3H4.N hi AC4H6.Nhi BC4H6.Nhi C2H2.N hi CC5H10.Nhi MC6H12.Nhi EC6H12.Nhi C6H12.Nhi MC7H14.Nhi EC8H16.Nhi C6H6.N hi C7H8.N hi EC8H10.Nhi C8H10.Nhi CH3OH.Nhi CH4S.N hi NH3.N hi HCN.N hi OCS.N hi CS2.N hi Cis 2 Butene High Alarm Trans 2 Butene High Alarm 2 Methylpropene High Alarm 1 Pentene High Alarm Propadiene High Alarm 1,2 Butadiene High Alarm 1,3 Butadiene High Alarm Acetylene High Alarm Cyclopentane High Alarm Methylcyclopentane High Alarm Ethylcyclopentane High Alarm Cyclohexane High Alarm Methylcyclohexane High Alarm Ethylcyclohexane High Alarm Benzene High Alarm Toluene High Alarm Ethylbenzene High Alarm 0 Xylene High Alarm Methanol High Alarm Methanethiol High Alarm Ammonia High Alarm Hydrogen Cyanide High Alarm Carbonyl sulphide High Alarm Carbon disulphide High Alarm

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 00800000 01000000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 46 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.22. GAS DATA NON-ACCOUNTABLE LOW ALARM BITS Gas Data Low Alarms.N rd.N lo Relative Density Low Alarm Hs.N lo Superior Heating Value Low Alarm Hi.N lo Inferior Heating Value Low Alarm CH4.N lo Methane Low Alarm N2.N lo Nitrogen Low Alarm CO2.N lo Carbon Dioxide Low Alarm C2H6.N lo Ethane Low Alarm C3H8.N lo Propane Low Alarm H2O.N lo Water Vapour Low Alarm H2S.N lo Hydrogen Sulphide Low Alarm H2.N lo Hydrogen Low Alarm CO.N lo Carbon Monoxide Low Alarm O2.N lo Oxygen Low Alarm IC4H10.N lo I-Butane Low Alarm NC4H10.N lo N-Butane Low Alarm IC5H12.N lo I-Pentane Low Alarm NC5H12.N lo N-Pentane Low Alarm NC6H14.N lo Hexane Low Alarm NC7H16.N lo Heptane Low Alarm NC8H18.N lo Octane Low Alarm NC9H20.N lo Nonane Low Alarm NC10H22.N lo Decane Low Alarm He.N lo Helium Low Alarm Ar.N lo Argon Low Alarm neo-C5.N lo neo-pentane Low Alarm IC6H14.Nlo 2 Methylpentane Low Alarm MC6H14.Nlo 3 Methylpentane Low Alarm NC6H14.Nlo 2,2 Dimethylbutane Low Alarm DC6H14.Nlo 2,3 Dimethylbutane Low Alarm C2H4.N lo Ethylene Low Alarm C3H6.N lo Propylene Low Alarm C4H8.N lo 1 Butene Low Alarm CC4H8.Nlo TC4H8.Nlo IC4H8.Nlo PC5H10.Nlo C3H4.N lo AC4H6.Nlo BC4H6.Nlo C2H2.N lo CC5H10.Nlo MC6H12.Nlo EC6H12.Nlo C6H12.Nlo MC7H14.Nlo EC8H16.Nlo C6H6.N lo C7H8.N lo EC8H10.Nlo C8H10.Nlo CH3OH.Nlo CH4S.N lo NH3.N lo HCN.N lo OCS.N lo CS2.N lo Cis 2 Butene Low Alarm Trans 2 Butene Low Alarm 2 Methylpropene Low Alarm 1 Pentene Low Alarm Propadiene Low Alarm 1,2 Butadiene Low Alarm 1,3 Butadiene Low Alarm Acetylene Low Alarm Cyclopentane Low Alarm Methylcyclopentane Low Alarm Ethylcyclopentane Low Alarm Cyclohexane Low A larm Methylcyclohexane Low Alarm Ethylcyclohexane Low Alarm Benzene Low Alarm Toluene Low Alarm Ethylbenzene Low Alarm 0 Xylene Low Alarm Methanol Low Alarm Methanethiol Low Alarm Ammonia Low Alarm Hydrogen Cyanide Low Alarm Carbonyl sulphide Low Alarm Carbon disulphide Low Alarm

0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 00800000 01000000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0400 0000 0800 0000 1000 0000 2000 0000 4000 0000 8000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 47 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.7.23. LIQUID DATA ACCOUNTABLE MAXIMUM ALARM BITS Liquid Data Max Alarms.N SG.N max Specific Gravity Maximum Alarm 2.7.24. LIQUID DATA ACCOUNTABLE MINIMUM ALARM BITS Liquid Data Min Alarms.N SG.N min Specific Gravity Minimum Alarm 2.7.25. LIQUID DATA NON-ACCOUNTABLE HIGH ALARM BITS Liquid Data High Alarms.N SG.N hi Specific Gravity High Alarm 2.7.26. LIQUID DATA NON-ACCOUNTABLE LOW ALARM BITS Liquid Data Low Alarms.N SG.N lo Specific Gravity Low Alarm 2.7.27. Stn.Con. Alarm SCread 1 SCread 2 SCread 3 SCread 4 SCread 5 SCwrite 1 SCwrite 2 SCwrite 3 SCwrite 4 SCwrite 5 Total Alarms Totals Err STATION CONTROLLER ACCOUNTABLE ALARM BITS Station Controller to FC No 1 read Alarm Station Controller to FC No 2 read Alarm Station Controller to FC No 3 read Alarm Station Controller to FC No 4 read Alarm Station Controller to FC No 5 read Alarm Station Controller to FC No 1 write Alarm Station Controller to FC No 2 write Alarm Station Controller to FC No 3 write Alarm Station Controller to FC No 4 write Alarm Station Controller to FC No 5 write Alarm Station totals Alarm 0000 0001 0000 0002 0000 0004 0000 0008 0000 0010 0000 0020 0000 0040 0000 0080 0000 0100 0000 0200 0000 0001 0000 0001 0000 0002

0000 0001

0000 0001

0000 0001

0000 0001

Stn.Con. Comparison Alarm Vb Compare Station Controller Vb Comparison Alarm Vn Compare Station Controller Vn Comparison Alarm

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 48 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.8. ALARM TREE
Modbus Alarms Folder Modbus Alarm General Accountable Alarm Folder Q High Alarm occurs after 1 minute Zn Low Alarm Zn High Alarm Z Calculation Alarm Zn Calculation Alarm Any Gas Data Alarm Relative Density High Frequency Alarm Relative Density Low Frequency Alarm Density selection process Alarm. Not Used Any SG max or min Alarm A liquid critical temperature Alarm Z calculation timeout Alarm Z has been calculated above 10 or below 0.001 Zn has been calculated above 10 or below 0.001 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Turbine Meter Alarms Ultrasonic Meter Alarms Not Used Not Used Multiple Transmitter Pressure Sensor Alarms Multiple Transmitter Temperature Sensor Alarms Multiple Transmitter DPHi Sensor Alarms Multiple Transmitter DPLo Sensor Alarms General Non Accountable Alarm Folder Q Low Alarm Q High Alarm Temperature Alarm Any Gas Data Alarm Density Meter Alarms Relative Density Deviation Alarm Liquid Data Alarms Coriolis Meter Alarm Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Turbine Meter Alarms Ultrasonic Meter Alarms Not Used Not Used Multiple Transmitter Pressure Sensor Alarms Multiple Transmitter Temperature Sensor Alarms Multiple Transmitter DPHi Sensor Alarms Multiple Transmitter DPLo Sensor Alarms o1 Station Alarms Station Alarms Folder o 1 Modbus Alarms Modbus Alarm o 1 Stream 1 Stream 1 Folder o1 General Acc. 1 Q High (1min) Zn Low Zn High Z calc Zn calc Gasdata alarms RD Freq High RD Freq Low Density Alarm Not Used SG Alarm Critical Temperature Z Timeout Z Error Zn Error Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Turbine Alarms Ultrasonic Alarms Not Used Not Used MT Pressure Alarms MT Temperature Alarms MT DPHi Alarms MT DPLo Alarms o1 General Non Acc. 1 Q Low Q High Temperature Alarm Gasdata alarms Density Alarms Rd deviation Liquid Data Alarms Coriolis Alarm Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Turbine Alarms Ultrasonic Alarms Not Used Not Used MT Pressure Alarms MT Temperature Alarms MT DPHi Alarms MT DPLo Alarms

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 49 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 Turbine Acc. 1 Turbine HF Turbine IP o1 Turbine Non Acc. 1 Turbine LF o1 Ultrasonic Acc 1 Paths Security Level 1 Level 2 Invalid Comms Mode Status Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4 EEProm IO Parameter DSP Fault DSP Parameter Valid o1 Ultrasonic Non Acc 1 Efficiency 1 Efficiency 2 Efficiency 3 Efficiency 4 Efficiency 5 Units Status Status 1 Status 2 Status 3 Status 4 Config Accuracy Diagnostics IO Range Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4 Security Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used FlowSIC 1 FlowSIC 2 Turbine Meter Accountable Alarm Folder Turbine Meter HF failure Alarm Liquid Turbine Meter Input Alarm Turbine Meter Non Accountable Alarm Folder Turbine Meter LF failure Alarm Ultrasonic Meter Accountable Alarm Folder Number of paths Alarm Meter security Alarm Axial and swirl level 1 Alarm Axial and swirl level 2 Alarm Invalid flow received from meter Meter communication Alarm Meter is not in operational mode Meter is indicating a status alarm Path 1 Alarm Path 2 Alarm Path 3 Alarm Path 4 Alarm Meter is indicating an EEprom Alarm Meter is indicating an IO parameter Alarm Meter is indicating a DSP Alarm Meter is indicating a DSP parameter Alarm Meter is indicating a validity Alarm Ultrasonic Meter Non Accountable Alarm Folder Path 1 efficiency Alarm Path 2 efficiency Alarm Path 3 efficiency Alarm Path 4 efficiency Alarm Path 5 efficiency Alarm Meter units don t match flow computer units Alarm Meter is indicating a status alarm Meter is indicating a status alarm on stream 1 Meter is indicating a status alarm on stream 2 Meter is indicating a status alarm on stream 3 Meter is indicating a status alarm on stream 4 Meter is indicating a configuration alarm Meter is indicating an accuracy alarm Meter is indicating a diagnostice alarm Meter is indicating an IO range alarm Path 1 Alarm Path 2 Alarm Path 3 Alarm Path 4 Alarm Security Switch Alarm Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Any FlowSIC 600 alarm on register 1 Any FlowSIC 600 alarm on register 2

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 50 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 FlowSIC 600 nAcc Alarm 1 Warning Sensor 1 Warning Sensor 2 Warning Sensor 3 Warning Sensor 4 Warning AGC D 1 Warning AGC D 2 Warning AGC D 3 Warning AGC D 4 Warning AGC L 1 Warning AGC L 2 Warning AGC L 3 Warning AGC L 4 Warning SOS 1 Warning SOS 2 Warning SOS 3 Warning SOS 4 Burst 1 Burst 2 Burst 3 Burst 4 Matrix 1 Matrix 2 Matrix 3 Matrix 4 Max 1 Max 2 Max 3 Max 4 Min 1 Min 2 Min 3 Min 4 o1 FlowSIC 600 nAcc Alarm 1 Early 1 Early 2 Early 3 Early 4 Late 1 Late 2 Late 3 Late 4 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4 SNR 1 SNR 2 SNR 3 SNR 4 Iterations 1 Iterations 2 Iterations 3 Iterations 4 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 3 Delta 4 Check 1 Check 2 Check 3 Check 4 MSE 1 MSE 2 MSE 3 MSE 4 FlowSIC 600 Ultrasonic Meter Alarm Folder Sensor 1 warning. Sensor 2 warning. Sensor 3 warning. Sensor 4 warning. Meter is indicating an AGC warning on path 1. Meter is indicating an AGC warning on path 2. Meter is indicating an AGC warning on path 3. Meter is indicating an AGC warning on path 4. Meter is indicating an AGC warning on path 1. Meter is indicating an AGC warning on path 2. Meter is indicating an AGC warning on path 3. Meter is indicating an AGC warning on path 4. Meter is indicating an speed of sound warning on path 1. Meter is indicating an speed of sound warning on path 2. Meter is indicating an speed of sound warning on path 3. Meter is indicating an speed of sound warning on path 4. Meter is indicating a burst alarm on path 1. Meter is indicating a burst alarm on path 2. Meter is indicating a burst alarm on path 3. Meter is indicating a burst alarm on path 4. Meter is indicating a matrix alarm on path 1. Meter is indicating a matrix alarm on path 2. Meter is indicating a matrix alarm on path 3. Meter is indicating a matrix alarm on path 4. Meter is indicating an overrange alarm on path 1. Meter is indicating an overrange alarm on path 2. Meter is indicating an overrange alarm on path 3. Meter is indicating an overrange alarm on path 4. Meter is indicating an underrange alarm on path 1. Meter is indicating an underrange alarm on path 2. Meter is indicating an underrange alarm on path 3. Meter is indicating an underrange alarm on path 4. FlowSIC 600 Ultrasonic Meter Alarm Folder Meter is indicating a max early alarm on path 1. Meter is indicating a max early alarm on path 2. Meter is indicating a max early alarm on path 3. Meter is indicating a max early alarm on path 4. Meter is indicating a max late alarm on path 1. Meter is indicating a max late alarm on path 2. Meter is indicating a max late alarm on path 3. Meter is indicating a max late alarm on path 4. Meter is uindicating an alarm on path 1. Meter is uindicating an alarm on path 2. Meter is uindicating an alarm on path 3. Meter is uindicating an alarm on path 4. Meter is uindicating an SNR alarm on path 1. Meter is uindicating an SNR alarm on path 2. Meter is uindicating an SNR alarm on path 3. Meter is uindicating an SNR alarm on path 4. Meter is uindicating an Iterations alarm on path 1. Meter is uindicating an Iterations alarm on path 2. Meter is uindicating an Iterations alarm on path 3. Meter is uindicating an Iterations alarm on path 4. Meter is uindicating a delta alarm on path 1. Meter is uindicating a delta alarm on path 2. Meter is uindicating a delta alarm on path 3. Meter is uindicating a delta alarm on path 4. Meter is uindicating a check alarm on path 1. Meter is uindicating a check alarm on path 2. Meter is uindicating a check alarm on path 3. Meter is uindicating a check alarm on path 4. Meter is uindicating an MSE alarm on path 1. Meter is uindicating an MSE alarm on path 2. Meter is uindicating an MSE alarm on path 3. Meter is uindicating an MSE alarm on path 4.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 51 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 MT Pressure. 1 Acc Sensor1 None Acc Sensor2 None Acc Sensor3 None Acc Sensor1 Hart Acc Sensor2 Hart Acc Sensor3 Hart Acc Sensor1 Hart st Acc Sensor2 Hart st Acc Sensor3 Hart st Acc Sensor1 Units Acc Sensor2 Units Acc Sensor3 Units Acc Sensor1 Min Acc Sensor2 Min Acc Sensor3 Min Acc Sensor1 Max Acc Sensor2 Max Acc Sensor3 Max Acc Sensor1 Dev Acc Sensor2 Dev Acc Sensor3 Dev Acc Serial Min Acc Serial Max Not Used Non Acc Low Alarm Non Acc High Alarm Not Used Not Used Sensor 1 Average Deviation Sensor 2 Average Deviation Sensor 3 Average Deviation Not Used o1 MT Temperature. 1 Acc Sensor1 None Acc Sensor2 None Acc Sensor3 None Acc Sensor1 Hart Acc Sensor2 Hart Acc Sensor3 Hart Acc Sensor1 Hart st Acc Sensor2 Hart st Acc Sensor3 Hart st Acc Sensor1 Units Acc Sensor2 Units Acc Sensor3 Units Acc Sensor1 Min Acc Sensor2 Min Acc Sensor3 Min Acc Sensor1 Max Acc Sensor2 Max Acc Sensor3 Max Acc Sensor1 Dev Acc Sensor2 Dev Acc Sensor3 Dev Acc Serial Min Acc Serial Max Not Used Non Acc Low Alarm Non Acc High Alarm Not Used Not Used Sensor 1 Average Deviation Sensor 2 Average Deviation Sensor 3 Average Deviation Not Used Multiple Transmitter Pressure Folder Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Serial value Minimum Alarm Accountable Alarm Serial value Maximum Alarm Not Used Non Accountable Alarm Low alarm Non Accountable Alarm High alarm Not Used Not Used Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 average deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 average deviation alarm s Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 average deviation alarm Not Used Multiple Transmitter Temperature Folder Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Serial value Minimum Alarm Accountable Alarm Serial value Maximum Alarm Not Used Non Accountable Alarm Low alarm Non Accountable Alarm High alarm Not Used Not Used Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 average deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 average deviation alarm s Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 average deviation alarm Not Used

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 52 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 MT dp High Alarms. 1 Acc Sensor1 None Acc Sensor2 None Acc Sensor3 None Acc Sensor1 Hart Acc Sensor2 Hart Acc Sensor3 Hart Acc Sensor1 Hart st Acc Sensor2 Hart st Acc Sensor3 Hart st Acc Sensor1 Units Acc Sensor2 Units Acc Sensor3 Units Acc Sensor1 Min Acc Sensor2 Min Acc Sensor3 Min Acc Sensor1 Max Acc Sensor2 Max Acc Sensor3 Max Acc Sensor1 Dev Acc Sensor2 Dev Acc Sensor3 Dev Acc Serial Min Acc Serial Max Not Used Non Acc Low Alarm Non Acc High Alarm Not Used Not Used Sensor 1 Average Deviation Sensor 2 Average Deviation Sensor 3 Average Deviation Not Used o1 MT dp Low Alarms. 1 Acc Sensor1 None Acc Sensor2 None Acc Sensor3 None Acc Sensor1 Hart Acc Sensor2 Hart Acc Sensor3 Hart Acc Sensor1 Hart st Acc Sensor2 Hart st Acc Sensor3 Hart st Acc Sensor1 Units Acc Sensor2 Units Acc Sensor3 Units Acc Sensor1 Min Acc Sensor2 Min Acc Sensor3 Min Acc Sensor1 Max Acc Sensor2 Max Acc Sensor3 Max Acc Sensor1 Dev Acc Sensor2 Dev Acc Sensor3 Dev Acc Serial Min Acc Serial Max Not Used Non Acc Low Alarm Non Acc High Alarm Not Used Not Used Sensor 1 Average Deviation Sensor 2 Average Deviation Sensor 3 Average Deviation Not Used Multiple Transmitter DP High Range Folder Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Serial value Minimum Alarm Accountable Alarm Serial value Maximum Alarm Not Used Non Accountable Alarm Low alarm Non Accountable Alarm High alarm Not Used Not Used Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 average deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 average deviation alarm s Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 average deviation alarm Not Used Multiple Transmitter DP Low Range Folder Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 no value Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 Hart comms Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 Hart status Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 wrong units Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 minimum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 maximum alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Serial value Minimum Alarm Accountable Alarm Serial value Maximum Alarm Not Used Non Accountable Alarm Low alarm Non Accountable Alarm High alarm Not Used Not Used Accountable Alarm Sensor 1 average deviation alarm Accountable Alarm Sensor 2 average deviation alarm s Accountable Alarm Sensor 3 average deviation alarm Not Used

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 53 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 GD Alarms (Max) 1.1 rd (Max) Hs (Max) Hi (Max) C (Max) N2 (Max) CO2 (Max) C2 (Max) C3 (Max) H2O (Max) H2S (Max) H2 (Max) CO (Max) O2 (Max) i C4 (max) n C4 (Max) i C5 (Max) n C5 (Max) n C6 (Max) n C7 (Max) n C8 (Max) n C9 (Max) n C10 (Max) He (Max) Ar (Max) neo C5 (Max) i C6H14 (Max) m C6H14 (Max) neo C6H14 (Max) dC6H14 (Max) C2H4 (Max) C3H6 (Max) C4H8 (Max) o1 GD Alarms (Max) 2.1 cC4H8 (Max) tC4H8 (Max) iC4H8 (Max) pC5H10 (Max) C3H4 (Max) aC4H6 (Max) bC4H6 (Max) C2H2 (Max) cC5H10 (Max) mC6H10 (Max) eC6H12 (Max) C6H12 (Max) mC7H14 (Max) eC8H16 (Max) C6H6 (Max) C7H8 (Max) eC8H10 (Max) C8H10 (Max) CH3OH (Max) CH4S (Max) NH3 (Max) HCN (Max) OCS (Max) CS2 (Max) Gas Data Alarms Maximum Folder Relative Density Superior Heating Value Inferior Heating Value Methane Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide Ethane Propane Water Hydrogen Sulphide Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide Oxygen iso - Butane n - Butane iso - Pentane n - Pentane Hexane Heptane Octane Nonane Decane Helium Argon neo Pentane 2, Methylpentane 3, Methylpentane 2,2, Dimethylbutane 2,3, Dimethylbutane Ethylene Propylene 1, Butene Gas Data Alarms Maximum Folder cis 2 Butene trans 2 Butene 2 Methylpropene 1 Pentene Propadiene 1,2 Butadiene 1,3 Butadiene Acetylene Cyclopentane Methylcyclopentane Ethylcyclopentane Cyclohexane Methylcyclohexane Ethylcyclohexane Benzene Toluene Ethylbenzene 0 Xylene Methanol Methanethion Ammonia Hydrogen Cyanide Carbonyl sulphide Carbon disulphide

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 54 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 GD Alarms (Min) 1 rd (Min) Hs (Min) Hi (Min) C (Min) N2 (Min) CO2 (Min) C2 (Min) C3 (Min) H2O (Min) H2S (Min) H2 (Min) CO (Min) O2 (Min) i C4 (Min) n C4 (Min) i C5 (Min) n C5 (Min) n C6 (Min) n C7 (Min) n C8 (Min) n C9 (Min) n C10 (Min) He (Min) Ar (Min) neo C5 (Min) i C6H14 (Min) m C6H14 (Min) neo C6H14 (Min) dC6H14 (Min) C2H4 (Min) C3H6 (Min) C4H8 (Min) o1 GD Alarms (Min) 2.1 cC4H8 (Min) tC4H8 (Min) iC4H8 (Min) pC5H10 (Min) C3H4 (Min) aC4H6 (Min) bC4H6 (Min) C2H2 (Min) cC5H10 (Min) mC6H10 (Min) eC6H12 (Min) C6H12 (Min) mC7H14 (Min) eC8H16 (Min) C6H6 (Min) C7H8 (Min) C8H10 (Min) C8H10 (Min) CH3OH (Min) CH4S (Min) NH3 (Min) HCN (Min) OCS (Min) CS2 (Min) Gas Data Alarms Minimum Folder Relative Density Superior Heating Value Inferior Heating Value Methane Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide Ethane Propane Water Hydrogen Sulphide Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide Oxygen iso - Butane n - Butane iso - Pentane n - Pentane Hexane Heptane Octane Nonane Decane Helium Argon neo Pentane 2, Methylpentane 3, Methylpentane 2,2, Dimethylbutane 2,3, Dimethylbutane Ethylene Propylene 1, Butene Gas Data Alarms Minimum Folder cis 2 Butene trans 2 Butene 2 Methylpropene 1 Pentene Propadiene 1,2 Butadiene 1,3 Butadiene Acetylene Cyclopentane Methylcyclopentane Ethylcyclopentane Cyclohexane Methylcyclohexane Ethylcyclohexane Benzene Toluene Ethylbenzene 0 Xylene Methanol Methanethion Ammonia Hydrogen Cyanide Carbonyl sulphide Carbon disulphide

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 55 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 GD Alarms (High) 1 rd (High) Hs (High) Hi (High) C (High) N2 (High) CO2 (High) C2 (High) C3 (High) H2O (High) H2S (High) H2 (High) CO (High) O2 (High) i C4 (High) n C4 (High) i C5 (High) n C5 (High) n C6 (High) n C7 (High) n C8 (High) n C9 (High) n C10 (High) He (High) Ar (High) neo C5 (High) i C6H14 (High) m C6H14 (High) neo C6H14 (High) dC6H14 (High) C2H4 (High) C3H6 (High) C4H8 (High) o1 GD Alarms (HIgh) 2.1 cC4H8 (High) tC4H8 (High) iC4H8 (High) pC5H10 (High) C3H4 (High) aC4H6 (High) bC4H6 (High) C2H2 (High) cC5H10 (High) mC6H10 (High) eC6H12 (High) C6H12 (High) mC7H14 (High) eC8H16 (High) C6H6 (High) C7H8 (High) eC8H10 (High) C8H10 (High) CH3OH (High) CH4S (High) NH3 (High) HCN (High) OCS (High) CS2 (High) Gas Data Alarms High Folder Relative Density Superior Heating Value Inferior Heating Value Methane Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide Ethane Propane Water Hydrogen Sulphide Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide Oxygen iso - Butane n - Butane iso - Pentane n - Pentane Hexane Heptane Octane Nonane Decane Helium Argon neo Pentane 2, Methylpentane 3, Methylpentane 2,2, Dimethylbutane 2,3, Dimethylbutane Ethylene Propylene 1, Butene Gas Data Alarms High Folder cis 2 Butene trans 2 Butene 2 Methylpropene 1 Pentene Propadiene 1,2 Butadiene 1,3 Butadiene Acetylene Cyclopentane Methylcyclopentane Ethylcyclopentane Cyclohexane Methylcyclohexane Ethylcyclohexane Benzene Toluene Ethylbenzene 0 Xylene Methanol Methanethion Ammonia Hydrogen Cyanide Carbonyl sulphide Carbon disulphide

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 56 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 GD Alarms (Low) 1 rd (Low) Hs (Low) Hi (Low) C (Low) N2 (Low) CO2 (Low) C2 (Low) C3 (Low) H2O (Low) H2S (Low) H2 (Low) CO (Low) O2 (Low) i C4 (Low) n C4 (Low) i C5 (Low) n C5 (Low) n C6 (Low) n C7 (Low) n C8 (Low) n C9 (Low) n C10 (Low) He (Low) Ar (Low) neo C5 (Low) i C6H14 (Low) m C6H14 (Low) neo C6H14 (Low) dC6H14 (Low) C2H4 (Low) C3H6 (Low) C4H8 (Low) o1 GD Alarms (Low) 2.1 cC4H8 (Low) tC4H8 (Low) iC4H8 (Low) pC5H10 (Low) C3H4 (Low) aC4H6 (Low) bC4H6 (Low) C2H2 (Low) cC5H10 (Low) mC6H10 (Low) eC6H12 (Low) C6H12 (Low) mC7H14 (Low) eC8H16 (Low) C6H6 (Low) C7H8 (Low) eC8H10 (Low) C8H10 (Low) CH3OH (Low) CH4S (Low) NH3 (Low) HCN (Low) OCS (Low) CS2 (Low) Gas Data Alarms Low Folder Relative Density Superior Heating Value Inferior Heating Value Methane Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide Ethane Propane Water Hydrogen Sulphide Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide Oxygen iso - Butane n - Butane iso - Pentane n - Pentane Hexane Heptane Octane Nonane Decane Helium Argon neo Pentane 2, Methylpentane 3, Methylpentane 2,2, Dimethylbutane 2,3, Dimethylbutane Ethylene Propylene 1, Butene Gas Data Alarms Low Folder cis 2 Butene trans 2 Butene 2 Methylpropene 1 Pentene Propadiene 1,2 Butadiene 1,3 Butadiene Acetylene Cyclopentane Methylcyclopentane Ethylcyclopentane Cyclohexane Methylcyclohexane Ethylcyclohexane Benzene Toluene Ethylbenzene 0 Xylene Methanol Methanethion Ammonia Hydrogen Cyanide Carbonyl sulphide Carbon disulphide

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 57 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o1 Density Acc Alarms 1 Dens 1 Freq High Dens 2 Freq High Not Used Not Used Dens 1 Freq Low Dens 2 Freq Low Not Used Not Used Dens 1 Temp None Dens 1 Temp Hart Dens 1 Temp Hart Status Dens 1 Temp Units Dens 1 Temp min Dens 1 Temp max Not Used Not Used Dens 2 Temp None Dens 2 Temp Hart Dens 2 Temp Hart Status Dens 2 Temp Units Dens 2 Temp min Dens 2 Temp max Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Density Max Density Min o1 Density Non Acc Alarms. 1 Dens 1 Value High Dens 2 Value High Dens 1 Value Low Dens 2 Value Low Dens Deviation o1 LD Max Alarms. 1 sg (Low) o1 LD Min Alarms. 1 sg (Min) o1 LD High Alarms. 1 sg (High) o1 LD Low Alarms. 1 sg (Low) o1 Stream Chromat Acc. Alarm 1 Alarm o1 Stream Flags 1 Stream Offline o1 Coriolis Acc 1 Port Alarm Comms Alarm Unit Alarm Status Alarm o1 Coriolis Non Acc Alarm 1 Deviation o 0 Stream 2 o 0 Stream 3 Density Meter Accountable Alarms Folder Density Input 1 Frequency High Alarm Density Input 2 Frequency High Alarm Not Used Not Used Density Input 1 Frequency Low Alarm Density Input 2 Frequency Low Alarm Not Used Not Used Density 1 temperature sensor has no value Density 1 temperature sensor Hart alarm Density 1 temperature sensor Hart status alarm Density 1 temperature sensor units alarm Density 1 temperature sensor min alarm Density 1 temperature sensor max alarm Not Used Not Used Density 1 temperature sensor has no value Density 1 temperature sensor Hart alarm Density 1 temperature sensor Hart status alarm Density 1 temperature sensor units alarm Density 1 temperature sensor min alarm Density 1 temperature sensor max alarm Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Density max alarm Density min alarm Density Meter Non Accountable Alarms Folder Density Input 1 High Alarm Density Input 2 High Alarm Density Input 1 Low Alarm Density Input 1 Low Alarm Density Deviation Alarm Liquid Data Maximum Alarms Folder Specific Gravity Liquid Data Minimum Alarms Folder Specific Gravity Liquid Data High Alarms Folder Specific Gravity Liquid Data Low Alarms Folder Specific Gravity Stream Gas Chromatograph Accountable Alarm Folder All 32 bits can be used to indicate an alarm on the Encal 3000 if selected Stream Flags Folder Coriolis Meter Alarm Folder Coriolis meter Communication port alarm Coriolis meter communication alarm Coriolis meter wrong units Coriolis meter status alarm Coriolis Non Acc Alarm Folder Deviation between Coriolis serial flow and Pulse flow Stream 2 Folder Stream 3 Folder

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 58 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 Chromatograph o1 Chromat Alarms Acc port Alarm Acc comms Alarm Acc status Alarm Acc composition Alarm Acc chromatograph offline Alarm Acc Ethernet status Alarm Acc Ethernet Alarm Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used nAcc Stream nAcc Analysis nAcc State Not Used nAcc No Data o 1 Station o1 Station Controller Alarms Read Unit 1 Read Unit 2 Read Unit 3 Read Unit 4 Read Unit 5 Write Unit 1 Write Unit 2 Write Unit 3 Write Unit 4 Write Unit 5 o1 Totals Alarms Totals Alarms o1 Comparison Alarms Comp Vb Comp Vn o 1 General o1 General Alarms Maintenance Mode P/T Calibrate Proving Mode Bad Maintenance o 1 Digital Inputs o1 Switched Inputs Board 2 Switch 1 Board 2 Switch 2 Board 2 Switch 3 Board 3 Switch 1 Board 3 Switch 2 Board 3 Switch 3 Board 4 Switch 1 Board 4 Switch 2 Board 4 Switch 3 o 1 Data Update o1 Preset Data Change Preset Data o 1 Unit Faults o1 Unit Faults Calculation Chromatograph Folder Chromatograph Alarms Folder Accountable Port Alarm Accountable Communication Alarm Accountable Chromatograph Status Alarm Accountable composition alarm Accountable chromatograph offline alarm Accountable Ethernet communications status alarm Accountable Ethernet communications alarm Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Non-Accountable chromatograph stream alarm Non-Accountable chromatograph in analysis alarm Non-Accountable chromatograph incorrect state alarm Not Used Non-Accountable chromatograph no new data alarm Station Folder Station Controller alarms Folder Read From Unit 1 alarm Read From Unit 2 alarm Read From Unit 3 alarm Read From Unit 4 alarm Read From Unit 5 alarm Write to Unit 1 alarm Write to Unit 2 alarm Write to Unit 3 alarm Write to Unit 4 alarm Write to Unit 5 alarm Totals Alarm Folder Station Comparison Alarm Vb Comparison alarm Vn Comparison alarm General Folder General Alarms Folder Maintenance Mode ON P/T Calibrate Proving Mode Bad Maintenance Digital Inputs Folder Switched Digital Inputs Folder Input Board position 2 Switch input 1 Input Board position 2 Switch input 2 Input Board position 2 Switch input 3 Input Board position 3 Switch input 1 Input Board position 3 Switch input 2 Input Board position 3 Switch input 3 Input Board position 4 Switch input 1 Input Board position 4 Switch input 2 Input Board position 4 Switch input 3 Data Update Folder Preset Data Change Folder Preset Data Change Flag Unit Faults Folder Calculation Fault

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 59 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication
o 1 Ensonic o1 Main Status Normal Operation Mode Instrument in Startup Mode Calibration Mode Reserved Main Alarm o1 Alarm Status Meas VOS High pres cell below range Min Meas VOS Low pres cell below range Min Meas CO2 mol% below range Min Meas pres High pres cell below range Min Meas pres Low pres cell below range Min Meas body temp below range Min Meas flow High pres cell below range Min Meas flow Low pres cell below range Min Meas pres High pres cell below range Min Calc density below range Min Calc heating value below range Min Calc Wobbe below range Min Calc compressibility below range Min Calibration out of range Empty reference gas bottle detected Convergence error of iterative calculation Internal communication error Meas VOS High pres cell above range Max Meas VOS Low pres cell above range Max Meas CO2 mol% above range Max Meas pres High pres cell above range Max Meas pres Low pres cell above range Max Meas body temp above range Max Meas flow High pres cell above range Max Meas flow Low pres cell above range Max Meas pres High pres cell above range Max Calc density above range Max Calc heating value above range Max Calc Wobbe above range Max Calc compressibility above range Max Calc VOS High Calc VOS Low Calc CO2 Calc REF o1 Alarm Status 2 CO2 pres min CO2 pres max o 1 Grab Sampler o1 Sampler 1 Can Full Active Reset Overspeed Production Expired Can Warning Deviation Sample Rate o1 Sampler 2 Can Full Active Reset Overspeed Production Expired Can Warning Deviation Sample Rate o 1 Lubrication Non Acc Alarm 1 Flow Alarm Oil Level Alarm Piston Input Pressure Alarm Ensonic Folder Main Status Folder

Alarm Status Folder

Alarm Status 2 Folder

Grab Sampler Folder Sampler 1 Folder Can full alarm Sampler Reset Sampler Overspeed Alarm Production period expired Can Level Alarm warning Deviation between actual flow and expected flow Sampler Rate exceeded Sampler 2 Folder Can full alarm Sampler Reset Sampler Overspeed Alarm Production period expired Can Level Alarm warning Deviation between actual flow and expected flow Sampler Rate exceeded Lubrication Module Alarm Folder Flow rate is too low to lubricate The oil level in the attached lubrication system is too low The piston input is in deviation with the piston output The pressure is being vented in the attached lubrication system

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 60 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 2.9. STATUS CODE DEFINITIONS The following data defines the status of all selectable type parameters that can be read via a Modbus Communication port, so if shown on the windows software or on the display of the Model 2000 it will be shown as text , and when read via the Modbus communication port it will be shown as the corresponding numbers as follows:Preset Data Preset Data Machine Type

0 = "Not Configured" 1 = "Gas Turbine" 2 = "Gas Ultrasonic" 3 = "Gas Orifice" 4 = "Gas Turbine (Density)" 5 = "Gas Ultrasonic (Density)" 6 = "Station Controller" 7 = "Liquid Turbine" 8 = "Liquid Ultrasonic" 9 = "Venturi Tube" 10 = "Gas Orifice (Density)" 11 = "Liquid Turbine (Density)" 12 = "Wet Gas Venturi

Preset Data Station Sum Flags s.Sum.X

0 = "No Action" 1 = "Sum" 2 = "Subtract" 3 = "Average" 0 = "Off" 1 = "On" 0 = "Off" 1 = "On" 0 = "Off" 1 = "On" 0 = "Off" 1 = "On" 0 = bar 1 = kPa 2 = kg/cm2 3 = PSI 0 = abs 1 = gau 0 = C 1 = F 0 = "2" 1 = "3" 2 = "4" 3 = "5"

Preset Data Station Temperature 1 Use Station Temperature 1 Preset Data Station Temperature 2 Use Station Temperature 2 Preset Data Station Pressure 1 Use Station Pressure 1 Preset Data Station Pressure 2 Use Station Pressure 2 Preset Data Units S.Pressure Units

S.Pressure Abs/Gauge S.Temperature Units S.Temperature DPs S.Pressure DPs

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 61 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Preset Data Stream X Ultrasonic UL Paths.X

0 = "1 path" 1 = "2 paths" 2 = "3 paths" 3 = "4 Paths" 4 = "5 paths" 0 = "None" 1 = "Flange" 2 = Weld" 0 = "None" 1 = "20 point" 0 = "Standard" 1 = "ISO6976" 2 = "ISO6976 (No Z/Zb)" 3 = "Cats" 0 = "No Change" 1 = "m3/hr to ft3/hr" 2 = "ft3/hr to m3/hr" 0 = "Serial" 1 = "4-20mA" 0 = "Use Vn" 1 = "Use Vdry"

ULP/T corr.X

UL.Linear.X US Meter Eg.X

UL Conversion.X

UL Input.X UL Calc Mass.X UL Calc Energy.X Preset Data Stream X Orifice Data Or.dpXmtrs.X Or.Exp.Fac.X Or.Tapping.X

0 = "1" 1 = "2" 0 = "Up stream" 1 = "Down stream" 0 = "Flange" 1 = "Corner" 2 = "D and D/2" 0 = "ReaderHarris" 1 = "Stoltz" 0 = "ISO 5167 (1997)" 1 = "AGA3 (1995)" 2 = "Preset CoD" 3 = "ISO 5167/6976 4 = AGA3 (1965) 5 = "ISO 5167 (2003)" 6 = "ISO 5167/6976 (2003) 0 = "Preset" 1 = "Calc Method 1" 2 = "Calc Method 2" 0 = "None" 1 = "5 point" 0 = No Correction

Or.CoD Eqn.X Or.calc.std.X

Or.mu.pt.X

Or.Linear.X Or.Temp.X

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 62 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication 1 = ISO 5167 (1997) 2 = ISO 5167 (2003) Preset Data Stream X Venturi Tube Ven.Tube Type.X

0 = "As Cast" 1 = "Machined" 2 = "Rough Welded" 3 = "Preset CoD" 0 = "Up stream" 1 = "Down stream" 0 = "1" 1 = "2" 0 = "Preset" 1 = "Calculated" 0 = "Use coefficients" 1 = "Use Tables" 0 = "Dickinson Jamieson" 1 = "Steven" 2 = "Chisholm" 3 = "Homogeneous" 4 = "De Leeuw"

Ven.Exp.Fac.X Ven.dpXmtrs.X Ven.Tube Pressure Loss.X

Ven.Density Calculations.X Ven.WGC Equation.X

Preset Data Stream X Linearity Correction Linear Corr.X (Only Displayed For Turbine)

0 = "None" 1 = "20 point"

Preset Data Stream X Liquid Data Base Density Rho S Select.X 0 = "350-637kg/m3" 1 = "638-1047kg/m3" 2 = "Table" 3 = "Preset" Preset Data Stream X Liquid Data CTS Use CTS.X Preset Data Stream X Liquid Data CPS Use CTS.X 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = No 1 = Yes

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 63 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Preset Data Stream X Mode Switches Atot en.X Tot en.X Tot Loq.X Flw Log.X Vn Error Cntrs.X Vn Normal Cntrs.X Acc Alarm Low Flow.X Non Acc Alarm Low Flow.X Non Acc LED Low Flow.X Stop Acc Alm Flow Low.X MM Preset Flow.X CO2 Calculate.X Use DP Max/Min alarms.X Use DP Hi/Lo alarms.X Reject all components on error.X E.calc.X 0 = No 1 = Yes

0 = "Hs" 1 = "Hi"

Preset Data Stream X Equation Z type.X

0 = "Sgerg:rd,hs,CO2" 1 = "Sgerg:rd,hs,N2" 2 = "Sgerg:rd,hs,CO2,H2" 3 = "Sgerg:rd,hs,N2,H2" 4 = "Sgerg:rd,N2,CO2" 5 = "Nx19:rd,N2,CO2" 6 = "Nx19 GOST:rd,N2,CO2" 7 = "Aga8" 8 = "Preset" 9 = "Z Table" 0 = "25,0" 1 = "0,0" 2 = "15,15" 3 = "25,20" 4 = 25,15 5 = 15,0

Hs.comb.X

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 64 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Preset Data Stream X Data Sources Component Source (Normal).X 0 = "Keypad" 1 = "Chromat" 2 = "Modbus" 3 = "Analogue" 4 = "HrAVG" 5 = "DyAVG" 0 = "Keypad" 1 = "LGV" 2 = "Chromat" 3 = "Modbus" 4 = "Analogue" 5 = "HrAVG" 6 = "DyAVG" 0 = "Chromat rec" 1 = "Modbus rec" 2 = "Analogue rec" 0 = "No" 1 = "Yes" 0 = "None" 1 = "100%" 2 = "100%-non-measureds"

Component Source (Error).X

Component Averages.X

Use rn Normalisation.X

Preset Data Stream X Gas Data Chrm Str.1

0 = "Not Used", 1 = "1" 2 = "2" 3 = "3" 4 = "4" 5 = "5" 6 = "6" 7 = "7" 8 = "8" 9 = "9" 10 = "10" 11 = "11" 12 = "12"

Preset Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Pressure MT.pr.Sensors.X 0 = "No Sensors" 1 = "1 Sensor" 2 = "2 Sensors" 3 = "3 Sensors" Preset Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Pressure Selections MT.pr.sel1.X 0 = "None" MT.pr.sel2.X 1 = "Sens.1" MT.pr.sel3.X 2 = "Sens.2" MT.pr.sel4.X 3 = "Sens.3" MT.pr.sel5.X 4 = "Avg." MT.pr.sel6.X 5 = "Serial" 6 = "Keypad"

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 65 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Preset Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Temperature MT.te.Sensors.X 0 = "No Sensors" 1 = "1 Sensor" 2 = "2 Sensors" 3 = "3 Sensors" Preset Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Temperature Selections MT.te.sel1.X 0 = "None" MT.te.sel2.X 1 = "Sens.1" MT.te.sel3.X 2 = "Sens.2" MT.te.sel4.X 3 = "Sens.3" MT.te.sel5.X 4 = "Avg." MT.te.sel6.X 5 = "Serial" 6 = "Keypad" Preset Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Dp High MT.dp hi.Sensors.X 0 = "No Sensors" 1 = "1 Sensor" 2 = "2 Sensors" 3 = "3 Sensors" Preset Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Dp High Selections MT.dp hi.sel1.X 0 = "None" MT.dp hi.sel2.X 1 = "Sens.1" MT.dp hi.sel3.X 2 = "Sens.2" MT.dp hi.sel4.X 3 = "Sens.3" MT.dp hi.sel5.X 4 = "Avg." MT.dp hi.sel6.X 5 = "Serial" 6 = "Keypad" Preset Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Dp Low MT.dp lo.Sensors.X 0 = "No Sensors" 1 = "1 Sensor" 2 = "2 Sensors" 3 = "3 Sensors" Preset Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Dp Low Selections MT.dp lo.sel1.X 0 = "None" MT.dp lo.sel2.X 1 = "Sens.1" MT.dp lo.sel3.X 2 = "Sens.2" MT.dp lo.sel4.X 3 = "Sens.3" MT.dp lo.sel5.X 4 = "Avg." MT.dp lo.sel6.X 5 = "Serial" 6 = "Keypad"

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 66 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Preset Data Stream X Units Pressure Units.X 0 = bar 1 = kPa 2 = kg/cm2 3 = PSI 0 = abs 1 = gau 0 = C 1 = F 0 = kg/m3 1 = lb/ft3 0 = "2" 1 = "3" 2 = "4" 3 = "5" 0 = "2" 1 = "3" 2 = "4" 3 = "5" 4 = "6" 5 = "7" 6 = "8" 0 = bar.g 1 = mbar.g 2 = PSI.g 3 = mmW.g 4 = inchW.g

Abs/Gau.X Temperature Units.X Density Units.X No. Pressure DPs.X No. Temperature DPs.X No. DP Hi DPs.X No. DP Lo DPs.X rd Significant figures.X Gas data significant figures.X Hs significant figures.X

Dp Units.X

Preset Data Stream X Density Density I Solatron Preset Density Calc or use preset Cc.mI.X 0 = "Preset" Calc or use preset Cg.mI.X 1 = "Calculated" Calc or ignore pt.mI.X Calc or ignore pa.mI.X Density.mI Correction.X Preset Data Stream X Density Density I P Density Equation Used 0 = "None" 1 = "Calculate" 0 = No 1 = Yes 0 = "Solatron" 1 = "Sarasota"

Preset Data Stream X Density Density Selection Dens sel1.X 0 = "None" Dens sel2.X 1 = "Sensor 1" Dens sel3.X 2 = "Sensor 2" Dens sel4.X 3 = "AGA8" Dens sel5.X 4 = "Keypad" Dens sel6.X Preset Data Stream X Density Number of Meters.X 0 = "1" 1 = "2"

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 67 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Preset Data Stream X Relative Density Use Rel Dens Meter.X K Values.X Preset Data Chromat Chromat.Type

0 = "Not Used" 1 = "Used" 0 = "Preset Constants" 1 = "Calculate Constants" 0 = "Not Used" 1 = "Daniels 2251" 2 = "Daniels 2350" 3 = "Daniels 2551" 4 = "Encal 2000" 5 = "Yamatake HGC303" 6 = "US Encal" 7 = "ABB 8000/8100" 8 = Siemens" 9 = "Rosemount GCX" 10 = "ABB 8000/8100 4str eam" 11 = "Daniels 2551 - C7" 12 = "793-7SC" 13 = "M2000 GC" 14 = Ensonic 15 = "Encal CU India" 16 = ABB 3100 17 = OSC-01-E 18 = Siemens Maxum 2 19 = Encal 3000 0 = "Continuous" 1 = "1 minute" 2 = "2 minutes" 3 = "5 minutes" 4 = "10 minutes" 5 = "15 minutes" 6 = "30 minutes" 7 = "1 hour" 0 = "Used" 1 = "Ignore" 0 = "Used" 1 = "Ignore" 0 = "108" 1 = "109" 2 = "110" 3 = "111" 4 = "139" 0 = "Off" 1 = "On"

Chromat.Time

Chromat.Status Chromat.Stream Chromat.C6Code

Ch.Alive

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 68 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Preset Data Units Energy Units 0 = MJ 1 = kWh 2 = kcal 3 = thrm 4 = BTU 0 = "Metric" 1 = "Imperial" 0 = "Metric" 1 = "Imperial" 0 = 1234 1 = 4321 2 = 2143 3 = 3412

Volume Metric/Imperial Mass Metric/Imperial Preset Data Event log Event log Byte order

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 69 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Active Data Active Data Station Temperature Stn Temp Line Status 1 Stn Temp Line Status 2

0 = "OFF" 1 = "ON:OK" 2 = "ON:ALM" 3 = "ON:DEV" 0 = "OFF" 1 = "ON:OK" 2 = "ON:ALM" 3 = "ON:DEV"

Active Data Station Pressure Stn Pres Line Status 1 Stn Pres Line Status 2

Active Data Digital Inputs Digital Inputs Slot Y Digital i/p1.Y 0 = "Off" Digital i/p2.Y 1 = "On" Digital i/p3.Y Active Data Stream X Gas Data Gas Data Used (Statuses) ??(Used St).X 0 = "N/A" Applied to 26 Variables 1 = "Chromat" 2 = "Modbus" 3 = "Analogue" 4 = "LGV" 5 = "Keypad" 6 = "HrAVG" 7 = "DyAVG" 8 = "ISO 6976" 9 = "Sensor" Active Data Stream X Gas Data Chromat Gas Data Received (Statuses) ??(Chromat Rec St).X 0 = "N/A" Applied to all components 1 = "OK" 2 = "ALM" Active Data Stream X Gas Data Modbus Gas Data Received (Statuses) ??(Modbus Rec St).X 0 = "N/A" Applied to all components 1 = "OK" 2 = "ALM" Active Data Stream X Gas Data Analogue Gas Data Received (Statuses) ??(Analogue Rec St).X 0 = "N/A" Applied to all components 1 = "OK" 2 = "ALM" Active Data Stream X Gas Data Calculated Calc Rd St.X 0 = "N/A" Calc Hs St.X 1 = "OK" Calc Hi St.X 2 = "ALM" Meter rd st.X

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 70 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Active Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Pressure Pres.stat1.X 0 = "OFF" Pres.stat2.X 1 = "ON:OK" Pres.stat3.X 2 = "ON:ALM" 3 = "ON:DEV" Pres.key_st.X Pres.ser_st.X Pres.Avg status.X Pres.select.X 0 = "OK" 1 = "ALM" 2 = "N/A" 0 = "None" 1 = "Sensor 1" 2 = "Sensor 2" 3 = "Sensor 3" 4 = "Average" 5 = "Serial Value" 6 = "Keypad Value" 7 = "Not Required"

Active Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Temperature Temp.stat1.X 0 = "OFF" Temp.stat2.X 1 = "ON:OK" Temp.stat3.X 2 = "ON:ALM" 3 = "ON:DEV" Temp.key_st.X Temp.ser_st.X Temp.Avg status.X Temp.select.X 0 = "OK" 1 = "ALM" 2 = "N/A" 0 = "None" 1 = "Sensor 1" 2 = "Sensor 2" 3 = "Sensor 3" 4 = "Average" 5 = "Serial Value" 6 = "Keypad Value" 7 = "Not Required"

Active Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Dp High dphi.stat1.X 0 = "OFF" dphi.stat2.X 1 = "ON:OK" dphi.stat3.X 2 = "ON:ALM" 3 = "ON:DEV" dphi.key_st.X dphi.ser_st.X dphi.Avg status.X dphi.select.X 0 = "OK" 1 = "ALM" 2 = "N/A" 0 = "None" 1 = "Sensor 1" 2 = "Sensor 2" 3 = "Sensor 3" 4 = "Average" 5 = "Serial Value" 6 = "Keypad Value" 7 = "Not Required"

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 71 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Active Data Stream X Multiple Transmitters Dp Low dplo.stat1.X 0 = "OFF" dplo.stat2.X 1 = "ON:OK" dplo.stat3.X 2 = "ON:ALM" 3 = "ON:DEV" dplo.key_st.X dplo.ser_st.X dplo.Avg status.X dplo.select.X 0 = "OK" 1 = "ALM" 2 = "N/A" 0 = "None" 1 = "Sensor 1" 2 = "Sensor 2" 3 = "Sensor 3" 4 = "Average" 5 = "Serial Value" 6 = "Keypad Value" 7 = "Not Required"

Active Data Stream X Density Line Density Used Status.X

0 = "None" 1 = "Sensor 1" 2 = "Sensor 2" 3 = "AGA8" 4 = "Keypad"

Active Data Chromat Status Chr.Read State

0 = "Not Required" 1 = "Waiting" 2 = "Reading Data" 0 = "N/A" 1 = Port Setup Problem" 2 = "Waiting for Port" 3 = "Comms Problem" 4 = "Stream Not Used" 5 = "Calibrate Mode" 6 = "Idle or Cal State" 7 = "Alarm Status" 8 = "OK" 9 = "Component Alarm" 10 = "Power Reset" 11 = "Stopped" 12 = "No Sample Flowing" 13 = No Alarm 14 = GC Not Available 15 = Stream Changed 16 = Ethernet Status 17 = Ethernet IP 18 = Etherent Port 0 = "Cal" 1 = "Analysis" 2 = "N/A" 0 = "Idle" 1 = "Analysis" 2 = "Cal" 3 = "N/A"

Chr.Last Read State

Chr.Analysis

Chr.Analyser state

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 72 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication

Active Data Modbus Security

0 = "No Access" 1 = "Level 1" 2 = "Level 2" 3 = "Level 3"

Active Data US Meter Manufacturer

0 = "Unknown" 1 = "Instromet" 2 = "Sick Eng" 3 = "Daniel" 2 = "Panametrics" 0 = "OK" 1 = "Port Set-up Problem" 2 = "Waiting for port" 3 = Msc. error 4.= Comms problem 0 = "OK" 1 = "Alm" 2 = "N/A" 0 = "OFF" 1 = "ON:OK" 2 = "ON:ALM" 3 = ON:DEV 4 = ON:AVG

US Meter Comms Status

Density average status

Density Sensor X Status

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 73 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 2.0 Modbus Commun ication Local Values Local Values Stream X Density Input Signals Density Selection.X 0 = "Preset Selection" 1 = "Sensor 1" 2 = "Sensor 2" 3 = "AGA8" Density sensor 1 Density sensor 2 Rd Selection.X 0 = "Off" 1 = "On" 0 = "Sensor" 1 = "ISO 6976" 2 = "Keypad"

Local Values General Maintenance Mode Proving Mode P/T Calibrate Ensonic Calibrate Ensonic Reset Security

0 = "Off" 1 = "On"

0 = Not Secure" 1 = "Partially Secure" 2 = "Partially Secure" 3 = "Fully Secure" 0 = "Idle" 1 = "Opening" 0 = "Idle" 1 = "Closing"

Valve Z Open Valve Z Closed

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 74 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 3.0 SOFTWARE UPDATES SOFTWARE UPDATES 3.1. INSTRUCTIONS FOR DOWNLOADING NEW INTERNAL SOFTWARE INTO AN M2000 There are two ways of downloading New internal software into an M2000 flow computer, the original method which uses a separate downloader software programme called DL2 as detailed in paragraph 3.1.1 and a function which is included in the later Version 2 Windows software which is detailed in section 3.1.2 3.1.1. DL2.EXE VERSION 0.5 NOTE DL2.EXE Version 0.5 is compatible with Windows 95, 98, 2000,XP and NT ON M2000 SET MODE SWITCH 2 to ON (DOWNLOAD VIA IR FRONT PORT) OR SET MODE SWITCH 2 to OFF (DOWNLOAD VIA MPU BOARD TOP SKT) 2) SET MODE SWITCH 3 to OFF 3) POWER OFF / POWER ON 4) If the M2000 is fitted with a MPU Board ASSY2000-3-034 Issue 1 or Issue 2 DISPLAY SHOULD INDICATE *********** BSI Downloader V2.1 ************ Main Prog OK Waiting for Download from IR (MPU) Port 3.

If the M2000 is fitted with a MPU Board ASSY2000-3-034 Issue 3 or above DISPLAY SHOULD INDICATE *********** BSI Downloader V3.0********** Main Prog OK Waiting for Download from IR (MPU) Port Baudrate: 38400 Flash Size : 1M (512K) The front panel FAULT LED will flash 5) RUN programme DL2.EXE Version V0.5 6) SELECT File (On the Disc) MODEL_2000s19 7) SET COM PORT being used 8) SET Baud Rate to be 38400 (Note this must be the same as set on the M2000 in the SYSTEM menu item) 9) Position IR Dongle (or USB Cable in later versions) or connect rear comms cable 10) Operate Download Button 11) Download will take approx 2 to 3 mins. Software on PC will indicate download complete. 12) When complete Set Mode Switch 3 to ON. POWER ON /POWER OFF 13) IF THE UPDATE HAS BEEN DONE WITHIN A SMALL VERSION CHANGE FOR EXAMPLE FROM V1.41 to V1.45 THEN UNIT SHOULD RUN AS BEFORE WITH ALL DATA STILL AVAILABLE. HOWEVER IF THE UPDATE HAS BEEN DONE WITHIN A LARGE VERSION CHANGE FOR EXAMPLE FROM V1.41 to V1.51 THEN UNIT WILL NEED TO BE UPDATED USING THE NEW SUPPLIED WINDOWS SOFTWARE. COMPATIBILITY New .s19 files will in general always be supplied with a new windows software as well Windows software is not generally backwards or forwards compatible.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 75 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 3.0 SOFTWARE UPDATES 3.1.2. WINDOWS 2 DOWNLOADER

In order to enable the Downloader function of the Windows 2 M2000 Software a special User Name and Password must be entered as follows:-

User Name Text Box Default EIUser

Password Text Box Default abcd1234 It will show as ********

Language option from : English

OK Button

Cancel Button

ENTER User name. Default Level 3 User with Full access is EIUser ENTER Password Default Level 3 Password is abcd1234 it will appear on the screen as ******** SELECT Language option At present English is only available type. SELECT OK Button to confirm and move to next window SELECT Cancel Button to Clear and start again.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 76 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 3.0 SOFTWARE UPDATES Highlight the M2000 Unit to be downloaded to in the M2000 Connections window as shown above Select the Download Firmware button. The following message will be shown

If yes then the current set up file in the connected F C2000 will be uploaded from the Unit and can be saved as a file on the operating PC. If No then the following Message window will be shown

The .s19 file to be downloaded to the M2000 can be selected from the available files on the PC and once chosen will appear in the Firmware window above. The Mode selection allows the following possibilities Download Firmware, which simply downloads the selected file Download then Verify which downloads the selected file and then verifies it by reading it back and comparing. Verify Firmware which reads the contents of the M2000 and compares the uploaded file against the file selected from the PC files.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 77 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 3.0 SOFTWARE UPDATES 1) 2) 3) ON M2000 SET MODE SWITCH 3 to OFF POWER OFF / POWER ON DISPLAY WILL INDICATE *********** BSI Bootloader V4.0 ************ Main Prog OK F1: USB Communications F2: Serial Communications

Select F1 to perform the function using the Front Panel USB port Select F2 to perform the function using the Rear Panel CPU upper Serial RS232 port Once F1 or F2 is pressed the following screen will be shown Connect USB Cable to front panel or connect rear comms cable depending upon above selection *********** BSI Bootloader V4.0 ************ Main Prog OK F1: Baudrate 115200 kbps F2: Baudrate 38400 kbps

Select F1 to set the communication baud rate to 115200 kbps Select F2 to set the communication baud rate to 38400 kbps Note this speed must match the communication speed of the M2000 Once F1 or F2 is pressed the following screen will be shown

*********** BSI Bootloader V4.0 ************ Main Prog OK Communicating through USB(Serial) Port Baudrate: 38400 Flash Size : 1M

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 78 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 3.0 SOFTWARE UPDATES The front panel FAULT LED will flash 4) 5) Download will take approx 2 to 3 mins. Software on PC will indicate download complete. When complete Set Mode Switch 3 to ON. POWER ON /POWER OFF

6) IF THE UPDATE HAS BEEN DONE WITHIN A SMALL VERSION CHANGE FOR EXAMPLE FROM V1.41 to V1.45 THEN UNIT SHOULD RUN AS BEFORE WITH ALL DATA STILL AVAILABLE. HOWEVER IF THE UPDATE HAS BEEN DONE WITHIN A LARGE VERSION CHANGE FOR EXAMPLE FROM V1.41 to V1.51 THEN UNIT WILL NEED TO BE UPDATED USING THE NEW SUPPLIED WINDOWS SOFTWARE. COMPATIBILITY New .s19 files will in general always be supplied with a new windows software as well Windows software is not generally backwards or forwards compatible.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 79 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4. HELP PAGES 4.1. BOARDS CONFIGURED

The Board set-up information page contains 4 boxes of information about the circuit boards in the current configuration. a) Requested this contains the boards required in the 5 user slot positions (Slot No. 1 5) for the selected configuration. This page also allows the required configuration to be selected. b) Each board can be given attributes :Not Required No warnings if not fitted or wrong board type Required Warning given if not fitted or wrong board type Critical Fault given if not fitted or wrong board type

c) Actual contains information about the actual boards fitted in the current configuration i.e. which board type is currently fitted in which slot. d) fitted. Version contains information about the actual boards fitted in the current configuration i.e. which board version is currently

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 80 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.2. DATE & TIME To set the date and time of the Corrector the operator can select any of the following options:a) or b) Send from PCs Clock by clicking in the adjacent box. The Corrector time and date will be set to the same time and da te as the PC computer time and date. This system of setting the time and date is ideal where a number of correctors are required to be synchronised together. All data can be set-up and the Update button clicked. or c) Send The Following enter the Day, Month, Year and Hours, Minutes, Seconds in the individual boxes. The Month can be selected from the pull down menu. After setting the time and date click the Update button immediately to load the time to the flow computer. This page is also used to enter the Contract Time of the corrector, this is selected from a pull down menu of all available hours, 0(zero) indicates a Contract Time of Midnight. Preset Time When a change of state from a logic 0 to a logic 1 is detected on a digital status input set up for this purpose then the contents of the Preset Time register hh:mm:ss is copied to the current time for the M2000 clock. Dont Send Do not up date the date and time.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 81 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.3. ANALOGUE INPUTS The Analogue inputs for the system can be set up on this page. Analogue inputs consist of four 4-20mA current inputs and one PRT input for direct Temperature measurement. The Analogue Inputs 1-4 are 4-20mA current inputs can be connected to linear transmitters for Pressure, Differential pressure, Hs (Superior Heating Value), Hi (Inferior Heating Value), rd (Relative density), CO2 (Molar % CO2), N2 (Molar %N2) and H2 (Molar % H2). In the case of a Station Controller station pressure and temperature can be selected. In the Case of a Grab Sampler with Analogue inputs for can level indication Can Input 1 or 2 can be selected. The PRT Input should be connected in the three wire typical connection to a 100 ohm Platinum resistance Thermometer. The inputs are set-up by selecting the required input parameter from the Variables tree and dragged across to the input box that is going to be used for that item. A Maximum and Minimum range figure for that parameter must then be entered. Any alteration to this page once it has been configured will almost certainly lead to the need to recalibrate any Analogue Input, this can only be achieved by entering the Calibrate mode of the Corrector. PRT Input Board Inputs consist of two 4 wire PRT inputs for direct Temperature measurement. The PRT Inputs 1 & 2 should be connected in the four wire typical connection to a 100 ohm Platinum resistance Thermometer. The inputs are set-up by selecting the required input parameter from the Variables tree and dragged across to the input box that is going to be used for that item. A Maximum and Minimum range figure for that parameter must then be entered. Any alteration to this page once it has been configured will almost certainly lead to the need to recalibrate any Analogue Input, this can only be achieved by entering the Calibrate mode of the Corrector. Advanced Input Board 2 If a standard input Board is configured for the Analogue Inputs then all the above cases are available, If an Input Board 2 type is used then the Board Function of that Board must be specified from the Pull down menu under the advanced tab:Normal Input Board Prover Input Board Liquid Meter Input Board Function as Above Function as Above. Function as Above

In addition a number of Advanced settings are displayed as follows these cannot be changed in normal operation:Num Retries Before data is flagged as being failed default 15 Num Samples Number of data samples for each result default 8

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 82 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.4. DIGITAL INPUTS

The Digital inputs for the system can be set up on this page. Digital inputs consist of two High Frequency Inputs 1-2 for pulse counting and frequency measurements up to 5000Hz and 3 Status Inputs 1-3 for switch or status inputs. The high frequency inputs would normally be connected to high frequency turbine meters or similar, where as the Status Inputs are intended for Alarm contacts or switch input information or similar functions. To set up any of the High Frequency inputs the following procedure is used:Selecting the required input parameter from the Variables tree and dragged across to the input box that is going to be used for that item. High frequency turbine inputs consist of two components, the pulse counting input and the frequency measuring input. Where as a frequency (Period) measurement for either Line Density or Relative Density consists of one item the Dens meter Freq item or Rel. Dens. meter Freq item which should be dragged across to the frequency input box. To set up any of the Status Inputs the procedure is to select the required function from the pull down menu for each input. The possible pre-set functions for each of the status inputs are as follows:No Function This means that the input has not been assigned any pre set function its status will still be displayed and available for other indication, but it has no actual function. Bi-Dir Turbine In a Model 2000 set up for Pulse counting inputs from a Turbine Meter. The Status input is used to indicate flow direction to the Model 2000 if the meter used is capable of operating in both directions. Enable + In a Model 2000 set up for Pulse counting. The Status input is used to enable or disable the positive pulse count. Enable In a Model 2000 set up for Pulse counting. The Status input is used to enable or disable the negative pulse count. Print This function uses t he Status input as a local or remote Print operation input. If it is enabled then a second menu list appears which allows selection of a particular print job (as set up on the Print Job page) to be printed. Sum Streams This function uses the Status input to Select Streams to be Summated from all the individual streams in a unit. If it is enabled then a menu list appears which allows selection of the streams to be summated under control of that Status input. If this function is enabled then the Sum function on the Station Values set-up page is disabled. Ensonic Reset This function uses the Status input to initiate an Ensonic Reset if such a gas measuring deice (Instromet Ensonic) is connected to the gas chromatograph port of the Model 2000. (See Gas Chromatograph page) Ensonic Calibration This function uses the Status input to initiate an Ensonic Calibration if such a gas measuring deice (Instromet Ensonic) is connected to the gas chromatograph port of the Model 2000. (See Gas Chromatograph page) Security Switch 1 This function uses the Status input to replace Mode switch 1 when operating as a Security Switch On/Off. When this option is selected the internal Mode Switch 1 has no function. Security Switch 2 This function uses the Status input to replace Mode switch 2 when operating as a Security Switch On/Off. When this option is selected the internal Mode Switch 2 has no function. Oil Status This function uses the Status input as a switch contact input, in conjunction with a turbine meter fitted with a Lubrication Oil level indication output. Lube Pressure When a change of state from a logic 0 to a logic 1 is detected on this input then this indicates that the lubrication pressure is in alarm state Lube Piston This input is used to check the lubrication piston output. Hold Counters This function uses the Status input as a switch contact input to provide the Hold Counters function. The Model 2000 can be set to provide copies of the Main and Main Alarm Totals that can be stopped or Held by operating this function. These Totals in a Held position must be enabled in order to be viewed under the Main Menu item Totals. Set Time When a change of state from a logic 0 to a logic 1 is detected on this input then the contents of the Preset Time registers Preset hour, Preset minute and Preset seconds is copied to the current time for the M2000 clock. Can Alarm When a change of state from a logic 0 to a logic 1 is detected on this input then this indicates that the level in the selected Sampler can system 1 or 2 has exceeded the preset alarm level. Under normal circumstances the polarity of the status inputs is as follows: Input open (logic 1) indicates forward +ve or normal flow (also for a single flow direction) Input closed (logic 0) indicates reverse or ve flow. It is possible to reverse the polarity of the input by selecting the tick box Invert adjacent to each input.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 83 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Where the Status inputs appear in any tree list the are described as Digital i/p X.Y. Where X is the input number 1, 2 or 3 and Y is the USER Board Slot number 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Advanced Input Board 2 If a standard input Board is configured for the Digital Inputs then all the above cases are available, If an Input Board 2 type is used then the Board Function of that Board must be specified from the Pull down menu under the advanced tab:Normal Input Board Function as Above Prover Input Board Function is Liquid Prover Input Board All functions are pre-defined there are no user options. Liquid Meter Input Board Meter Inputs are pre-defined and have no user options, and Status input 3 must not be used as it has an internal function. In addition a number of Advanced settings are displayed as follows these cannot be changed in normal operation:Switch Debounce time Default of 8 equates to 20mS Freq Calc Time Frequency Calculation interval default 225 equa tes to 600mS Pulse Timeout Pulse time to zero frequency default 57220 equates to 150 seconds Pulse Averaging Number of pulse for average frequency calc 10 is 10 pulses 0 is no average Prover Switch Time Between successive switch actuations defaul t of 5000 equates to 16 seconds PLD Frequency Digital noise filtering limit default is 16 equates to 24.5 KHz Pulse Limit Number of additional pulses received to indicate failure 10-100 default 10 Pulse Duration Prover pulse length sets pulse length default 2000 equates to 80uS Note all time outs are set in multiples of 2.62144mS except Pulse Duration which is set in multiples of 40nS

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 84 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.5. HART LOOPS

The Hart Loop inputs for the system can be set up on this page. There are two Hart Loops available on each input board each of which can handle up to 3 transmitters . The inputs are set-up by a) Selecting the required input parameter from the Variables tree and dragged across to the input box that is going to be used or that item. b) Assigning a Hart transmitter address for each transmitter on each loop, these addresses are numbered between 1 and 15, each transmitter on each loop should be given a different number. If a transmitter is assigned a loop address of 0(zero) it is assumed that this transmitter will not be in the Smart mode but will produce both a 4-20mA signal and a HART output. When this occurs it is only possible to allow one transmitter on each Hart Loop and all other data boxes f or that loop will not be available. c) Configuring burst mode. If selected then transmitters on the selected loop are expected to be running in Burst mode Advanced Input Board 2 If a standard input Board is configured for the Hart Inputs then all the above cases are available, If an Input Board 2 type is used then the Board Function of that Board must be specified from the Pull down menu under the advanced tab:Normal Input Board Prover Input Board Liquid Meter Input Board Function as Above but additionally each transmitter can have up to four variables assigned which allows the use of multivariable transmitters. Function as Above Function as Above.

In addition an Advanced menu selection is available for each loop with the following functions:Retries Number of retries before failure indicated default 10 Gen Timeout Time from last transmission default 190 equates to 0.5seconds Idle Timeout default 19 equates to 50mS Cont Timeout Continuation timeout default 0 immediate resumption. Note all time outs are set in multiples of 2.62144mS

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 85 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.6. SELECT STREAM TYPES The Flow Computers that will be connected to the Station Controller System can be set up on this page. Up to 5 flow computers can be configured to be connected up the Station Controller, these can all be the same type e.g. Turbine or can be a mixture of types e.g. Turbine or Ultrasonic. Each connected flow computer is referred to as Stream 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. and the type can be selected from the pull down menu, available types are : None Gas Turbine Gas Ultrasonic Gas Orifice Gas Turbine density Gas Ultrasonic density Liquid Turbine Liquid Ultrasonic Venturi Tube Wet Gas Venturi Tube Orifice Density Liquid Turbine Density In all cases these must be One stream flow computers only. Each connected flow computer must be given a separate Modbus communication id( Modbus IDs) this would normally be 1, 2, 3, 4 etc. Each connected flow computer must also be given a separate Chromat Stream Number for gas data 1 to 12 if required, if no chromat is required then None should be selected. Gas Values Used in Normal conditions can be select ed from :Chromat Data Data from a gas Chromatograph Modbus Data Data from a serial Modbus Port Analogue Data Data From Analogue input sour ces Hourly Average Data used to be current Hourly Gas Average Values Daily Average Data used to be current Daily Gas Average Values Gas Values Used in Error conditions can be selected from :Last Good Value Data used is Last Good (Non Alarm) Value Chromat Data Data from a gas Chromatograph Modbus Data Data from a serial Modbus Port Analogue Data Data From Analogue input sour ces Hourly Average Data used to be current Hourly Gas Average Values Daily Average Data used to be current Daily Gas Average Values Averages received can be selected from :Chromat Data Averages from Chromatograph source Modbus Data Averages from Serial Source Analogue Data Averages from Analogue Source

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 86 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.7. STATION VALUES

The Station scaling factors for the system can be set up on this page. The data entered on this page is only applicable for Multi-stream (more than one) versions of the Model 2000. There are separate Station Scaling Factors for each of the summated station totals, Stn TWF B for line Volume flow, Stn TWF N for normalised Volume flow, Stn TWF E for Energy flow and Stn TWF M for Mass flow. Each of the available streams can be selected from a pull down menu, Station Totals, to be either added into the station totals and flow rates Sum, subtracted from the station totals and flow rates Subtract or to be used to calculate an Average. The selected stream can also be set to not be used in the Station Total by selecting None. If required a comparison between the Hourly flows of the various Streams set up in the Station Controller can be carried out. This function is set on the Station Values Page. Any combination of Hourly Stream Flows for Vb and Vn can be compared against any other combination of Hourly Stream flows for Vb and Vn. e.g. if the Sum of the hourly flows for Stream 1 and Stream 2 is to be compared against the Hourly flow of Stream 3 then the Left hand tick boxes for Stream1 and 2 should be enabled and the right hand tick box for Stream 3 enabled. This will then create a comparison between the Sum of the Hourly flow for Stream 1 and 2 compared to the Hourly flow for stream 3. A deviation limit for the allowable difference between the compared flows is entered for Vb deviation in % and for Vn deviation in %. NOTE For this function to work correctly the Values of the Previous Hour Counters for both Vb and Vn must be set in the MODBUS list to be read by the Station Controller from each of the attached Stream Computers.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 87 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.8. STATION PRESET COUNTERS

The Main Station Totals of the unit can be Preset to any value by using this page. The Station total registers for : Line volume Line volume corrected for linearity Corrected volume Energy Mass Mass corrected for linearity Line volume fr om Monitor input Line volume. (un-haltable) +Vb +Vbc +Vn +Ve +Vm +Vmc +Vbm +Vbu

In normal conditions in both positive and negative directions can have their initial value preset. This enables the line volume counter to be set to the same reading as any mechanical counter that may be used with the Converter. Enter the value for each totals starting value in the box, and enable the Update Unit tick box for each Value to be sent.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 88 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.9. CHROMATOGRAPH

The Gas Chromatograph input for the system can be set up on this page. If required the corrector can be configured to interrogate via one of the connected serial Ports set-up for such a purpose, a connected Gas Chromatograph. The Chromat set up page is divided into 3 tabs, General (Items that apply to all types), Component Split (how the C5+ or C6+ is split up) and Additional Addresses (required for specific chromat types). The Chromat type of Gas Chromatograph is selected from the available types in a pull down menu. Other parameters that need to be set-up are:a) The Chromat ID of the gas chromatograph this is the Modbus communication ID as set in the gas chromatograph and is used for identifying the communication between Model 2000 and the Gas chromatograph. b) The Chromat status pull down menu determines if the gas chromatograph status is to be used to indicate alarms or is to be ignored. c) The Chromat time pull down menu indicates the interval time between reads of the Gas chromatograph this can be set to intervals of Continuous (as often as possible), 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes or 1 hour. d) The C6+ code is the component code applicable to C6+ ( this can vary for the same machine) e) The percentage of the gas components n-hexane, n-heptane, n-octane, n-nonane and n-decane that are contained in the C6+ result is set in the entry % of C6+. Communication parameters for the communication to the Gas Chromatograph are set-up in the Ports setting page. The Instromet Range of Gas chromatograph are supported three different types can be selected:ENCAL 2000 Standard European ENCAL system with CU fitted with standard software versions. ENCAL CU INDIA ENCAL CU fitted with India Software V1.0 ENCAL US ENCAL unit and optional display unit manufactured in the USA. The Siemens Optichrome will require additional scaling information to be set as follows:Each gas component will require:A Modbus function code 3 Address where the gas component data can be read, this address is generally derived as follows:Digit 1 4 Modbus code 03 function Digit 2 0-9 GC Stream Number Digit 3 0-9 GC Component number Digit 4 0 Digit 5 1-2 Analyser number For single Analyser operation the Analyser number should be set to 1 A minimum scaling factor for that gas component in the units of the component e.g. Molar %. A maximum scaling factor for that gas component in the units of the component e.g. Molar %. The Data FS location sets the overall scaling for all data input values. The gas analyser may produce a numeric result of 0 to 9999 or 0 to 4096 or 0 to 65535 depending upon how it is set up the maximum scaling factor should be entered at this location. The Status FS location sets the overall scaling for the status input value, read from location 30001 using a Modbus code 4 function. The gas analyser may produce a numeric result of 0 to 9999 or 0 to 4096 or 0 to 65535 depending upon how it is set up the maximum scaling factor should be entered at this location. Note It is assumed that the status word received is normally scaled 0-999 in which case the follow status apply Received number between 650 and 750 Analyser in Calibrate mode Received number above 750 Normal operation If any gas component value is received as full scale 65535 (FFFFH) this is an alarm state for that component. The keep alive function which automatically sends a Modbus function 05 instruction to Single Coil address FF00H every 10 seconds can be disabled by using the Ch.alive tick box. The Rosemount GCX will require additional scaling information to be set as follows:Each gas component will require:A Modbus function code 3 Address where the gas component data can be read. For single Analyser operation the Analyser number should be set to 1 A minimum scaling factor for that gas component in the units of the component e.g. Molar %. A maximum scaling factor for that gas component in the units of the component e.g. Molar %.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 89 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES The Data FS location sets the overall scaling for all data input values. The gas analyser may produce a numeric result of 0 to 9999 or 0 to 4096 or 0 to 65535 depending upon how it is set up the maximum scaling factor should be entered at this location. If any gas component value is received as full scale 65535 (FFFFH) this is an alarm state for that component. Three types of ABB GC are listed ABB8000/8100 will read gas data from Non latched addresses 7001 to 7016 together with the current stream number from address 3034. ABB8000/8100 4 ST REAM will read Stream 1 data from addresses 7401 to 7416 Stream 2 data from addresses 7601 to 7616 Stream 3 data from addresses 7801 to 7816 Stream 4 data from addresses 8001 to 8016

ABB3100 will read gas data from an early type of ABB 3100 with specific addresses as defined in the Additional addresses tab. This analyser only reads up to C5+ so a split of all components above C5 is required. DANIELS 2551-C7 This is a special version of the Daniels 2551 machine which is capable of measuring a individual component of C6 and a combined component of C7+. The C6 value will be read using component code 108 the C7+ value will not be read , all values C7 to C10 will only be preset. (NOTE this is a special machine and should only be selected if this Chromatograph type is available). 793-7SC This is a special version which allows the M2000 to connect to an Instromet 793-7SC Station Controller Modbus communication port and read the Gas data from it. The 793-7SC Station Controller port must be set up to match the communication port function in the M2000 in terms of baud rate etc. (NOTE this is a special machine and should only be selected if this 793-7SC Station Controller type is available). M2000 This is a special version which allows the M2000 to connect to another Instromet M2000 flow computer Modbus communication port that is emulating a GC and read the Gas data from it. The M2000 communicatio n ports must be set up to match in terms of baud rate etc. The Modbus Set-up in the M2000 must be pre-loaded in the Modbus set up page on the M2000 that is to be used as the GC emulation machine. Ensonic this is a version which allows the M2000 to connect to an Instromet Ensonic meter using a pre determined Modbus selection list. Both the Ensonic and the M2000 are designed to directly interface with each other when this version is selected. The M2000 communication ports must be set up to match in terms of baud rate etc. Two additional parameters must be set these are the Address in the Ensonic that is to be written too in order to initiate a Calibration (Calibration Address) and the address to be written to initiate an Ensonic Reset (Reset Address). OSC-01-E this is to read gas data from a specific Port (See port set-up Page) using the GAS UNIE communication protocol, for additional information on this protocol , See the Gas Unie protocol document OSC-01-E. The Encal 3000 gas chromatograph has a fully configurable modbus table. This allows users the option of adding and removing components as they wish. For this reason the order that the components appear within the Encal 3000 must be entered into the Model 200 using the "Encal Component Codes" tab. Component 1 corresponds to the address 7#00 within the Encal 3000, where # is 0 for Stream 1, 2 for Stream 2, 3 for Stream 3, upto 6 for stream 6. Siemens Maxum II is a gas chromatograph. Gas composition is read from address 40001. See your Siemens Maxum II manual for more information.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 90 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.10. GLOBAL UNITS The Global Units used in the system can be set up on this page. The Units of Energy used within the Model 2000 can be set up on this page, they are divided into two types :Input Energy Units i.e. the units of Energy input to the Model 2000 from any remote input. and Calculation Energy Units i.e. the units of Energy used within the Model 2000 calculations. Both of these can be selected from pull down menus as follows:MJ/m 3 Mega Joules GJ/m3 Giga Joules kWh/m 3 kilo Watt-hours kcal/m3 kilo calories thrm/m3 therms (1000*kcal) btu British thermal unit The Units of Volume used within the Model 2000 can be set up on this page, they are selected from a pull down menu Volume units in, any of the following types can be selected. Metric Imperial m3 ft 3 cubic meters cubic feet

The Units of Mass used within the Model 2000 can be set up on this page, they are selected from a pull down menu Mass units in, any of the following types can be selected. Metric Imperial kg (tonnes) lbs (tons) Kilogram s (kg*1000) pounds (lbs*2240)

These menu items to select between cubic metres or cubic feet and kilograms or pounds, ser ve as IMPERIAL / METRIC switches so that all data entry items that have imperial or metric units will need to be input in the correct units. These items also allow the possibility of Mass units in Metric and Volume units in Imperial measurements. When this option is selected great care should be exercised to make sure that all associated data items are entered in the correct units. NOTE this does not apply to PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE, DENSITY and DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Values which are entered and selected separately on the Units page. All HELP messages are written assuming METRIC Units. Additional Mode tick boxes Latch Non Acc LED Yes or No , if enabled then the Non Accountable Alarm LED will be latched ON when any Non Accountable alarm occurs and must be manually acknowledged and cleared by using the control on the Alarm Display pages. If not enabled then Non Accountable alarms will clear automatically once the source of the alarm is gone. Use Hart Units Yes or No , if enabled then the units read from any enabled Hart transmitter will be read and used and an alarm will be raised if they differ from the units set in the Model 2000. If disabled then the units read from the transmitter will be ignored and the Model 2000 will assume the default units for that input. Use Extended Maintenance Mode Yes or No , if enabled then additional controls over the entry and exit of Maintenance mode are made, an additional Mass Flow Low flow cut off in kg must be entered , which will inhibit the entry into and exit from Maintenance mode , if the current flow exceeds this value. Counter Rollover allows all internal counters used to Rollover either at 100 billion (100,000,000,000) for 64bit double precision numbers. or 1 billion (1,000,000,000) for 32 bit single precision numbers. Micromotion Rollover allows the entry of the rollover point for Micro motion Coriolis meters. Maximum number is 10^15. Use single stream maintenance mode if selected the station maintenence mode switch applies to all streams. Clear alarms when fully secure when selected allows alarms to be cleared when the flow computer security is fully secure

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 91 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES STATION UNITS The Station Units page selects units for Station Pressure and Temperature used in the system. The units of pressure to be used can be selected on this page, the Pressure Units pull down menu offers the choice between bar, kPa, kg/cm2 and psi. The Abs/Gau pull down menu offers the use of absolute or gauge pressure measurement. The units of temperature to be used can be selected on this page, the Temperature Units pull down menu offers the choice between C or F. The number of decimal places used to display the parameters Pressure and Temperature range can also be set on this page, for each item the choice is 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 92 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.11. STATION PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE 1 & 2 The Station Pressure and Temperature Transmitter inputs (two of each ) for the system can be set up on this page. Pressure Max and Pressure Min are the range of the pressure transmitter inputs connected to the Station Controller. If the measured pressure should rise above these values then an accountable pressure alarm would be indicated. Pressure High and Pressure Low alarms operate at the high alarm set value PHi and the low alarm set value PLo pressure measurement outside these values will cause a non accounta ble alarm to be indicated. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that the connected Pressure Sensor can be scaled using a simple equation as follows:Where P1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 P1 Tx

P1Scale = Offset.1 + ( R .1 P1 Tx )
Pressure P1Scale is the value displayed. Pressure P1 Range Scaling Factor. Pressure P1 Offset Scaling Factor. Pressure P1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of pressure. Temperature Max and Temperature Min are the range of the temperature transmitter inputs connected to the Station Controller. If the measured temperature should rise above these values then an accountable temperature alarm would be indicated. Temperature High and Temperature Low alarms operate at the high alarm set value THi and the low alarm set value TLo temperature measurement outside these values will cause a non accountable alarm to be indicated. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that the connected Temperature Sensor can be scaled using a simple equation as follows:Where T1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 T1 Tx

T1Scale = Offset.1 + ( R .1 T1 Tx )
Temperature T1Scale is the value displayed. Temperature T1 Range Scaling Factor. Temperature T1 Offset Scaling Factor. Temperature T1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of temperature.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 93 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.12. TURBINE METER

The Turbine Meter input for the system can be set up on this page. If the corrector type requires a High Frequency Turbine input then the Meter input characteristics are set-upon this page. The meter impulse factors for both hf impw meter and rf (lf) impw monitor inputs together with maximum flow rate figures Q max and High flow Hi q and Low flow Lo q alarm figures can be entered. If a blade ratio Tu BR check is required then the Ratio between Meter and Monitor input should be set, if no check is required or only one input is available then the Blade Ratio Tu BR should be set to Zero (0). Adjacent to the Tu BR input box is a Calc button this will automatically calculate a Tu BR value if pressed from the currently entered values for hf impw meter and rf (lf) impw monitor. A Preset Flow figure can be entered, for flow simulation purposes, this figure can only be entered if the Mode switch Preset Flow rate in maintenance mode is enabled. The Preset Flow figure will only be used when the Maintenance mode is set to be ON. The Meter can be corrected for non-linearity if required The Meter nonlinearity Correction can be selected from None or 20 point. 20 point allows for up to 20 points of meter error to be entered at their corresponding flow rate, a linear interpolation between each point is then carried out to correct the flow rate for all values. It is not necessary to enter values for all 20 points, any points that are not required should be invalidated see following paragraph. It is recommended that the error points are entered from the zero point first in ascending order from the lowest (or most negative) flow rate, and that all unused error points be left at the top most order. When entering the Meter Correction this can either be entered as a % Error as is usually the case for Gas measurement or as a Meter Factor which is generally the case for Liquid measurement, the selection is made using the Meter Correction pull down menu, If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not the refore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by :Highlighting or pointing to the component Right click on the mouse button Selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate" the invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value If read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38 If the Unit type is configured to be a Liquid Meter using an Input 2 Board then the following additional parameters need to be specified. Additional Pulse Limit specifies the number of additional pulses received on either the A or B input within the Additional Pulse Interval before an Alarm is raised. Additional Pulse Interval is the time period over which the number of Additional pulses is specified in seconds. Sensor Failure Limit is the number of pulses received on either the A or B input whilst no pulses are received on the other input before a sensor fail alarm is raised. Change Direction Limit is the number of consecutive seconds during which a Meter Change of Direction is detected before that Change of Direction is indicated. Frequency Deviation is the percentage deviation between the frequency measured on Input A and Input B before a deviation alarm is indicated.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 94 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.13. LIQUID CORRECTION 1 The Liquid Correction details for the system can be set up on this page. This setup page contains all data relating to the CTS and CPS calculations for the meter these factors are calculated in accordance with the following equations:4)

CTS m = (1 + ( t l - t 0 ) l mh 10-6 ) 2 (1 + (t l - t 0 ) l mr 10-6 )


5)

CPS m = (1 + ( p l - p 0 ))
Where CTSm CPSm t0 tl lmh lmr Rm t AT e Em pl p0

2R m ( 2 - e ) ( Em (1 - ( AT 2 )) 2 t ) p Rm
Equation 4) Equation 5) DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY

: :

: : : : : : : : : : :

Correction for meter expansion due to temperature from NORSOK I-105 Correction for meter expansion due to pressure from NORSOK I-105 Reference Temperature of meter in C Line Liquid Temperature in C Linear expansion coefficient of the meter housing/ K Linear expansion coefficient of the meter rotor/ K Meter inner Radius in mm at p0 & t0 ref. pressure and temp. Wall thickness in mm at p0 & t0 ref. pressure and temp. Area of Meter Rotor at p0 & t0 ref. pressure and temp. Poisson ratio Modulus of Elasticity of meter material in Bar Line Liquid pressure in Bar.a Reference pressure in Bar.a

Additional calculations for CTL and CPL are required these include alternative calculations for compressibility factor Beta which is selected by pull down menu as follows:Calculation of Coefficient of Thermal Expansion CTL 6)

aT =

K0 K + 1 + K2 2 (r s ) rs

Temp. Vol. Correction Factor Calculation (Density to Standard Conditions) 7) CTL r = - EXP[a T ( t r - t b ) (1 + 0.8 a T [t r - t b ])] Pres. Vol. Correction Factor Calculation (Density to Standard Conditions) 8)

CPL r =

1 [1 - b (p r - p e )]

Calculation of Compressibility Factor at density measuring point 9) 10)

b = 0.00001 EXP(C )
rs ) 1000

C = (1.38315 + 0.00343804 t r ) - ( 3.02909 + 0.0161654 t r ) In (


9a)
3 0.8709610 6 4.2092 t r 10 + - 1.62080 + 0.00021592 t r + 2 2 rs rs

b = 10- 4 e

Calculation of Base Density Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 95 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 11) Where rtp rs tr pr aT tb pe K0 K1 K2 b CTLr CPLr

rs =

r tp CTL r CPL r

: : : : : : : : : : :

Line Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Base Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Liquid Temperature at density measuring point in C Liquid pressure at density measuring point in Bar.a Coefficient of thermal expansion of liquid Alpha in C-1 Base temperature in C Equilibrium pressure in Bar.a (Use Pb) Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 Compressibility factor in bar-1 Equation 9) or 9a) : Correction Factor to API MPMS 12.2.5.3 : Correction Factor to API MPMS 12.2.5.4

Equation 11) MEASURED MEASURED Equation 6) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY API MPMS 11.2. 1 Equation 7) Equation 8)

Temperature Volume Correction Factor Calculation at metering conditions 12)

CTL m = - EXP[a T ( t l - t b ) (1 + 0.8 a T [t l - t b ])]


Pressure Volume Correction Factor Calculation at metering conditions 13) Calculation of Compressibility Factor at metering conditions 14) 15)

CPL m =

1 [1 - b m p l ]

b m = 0.00001 EXP( C)
rs ) 1000

C = (1.38315 + 0.00343804 t l ) - ( 3.02909 + 0.0161654 t l ) In (


14a)
3 6 - 1.62080 + 0.00021592 t + 0.8709610 + 4.2092 t l 10 l 2 2 rs rs

b m = 10 - 4 e

Calculation of Density at meter conditions 16) r m = r s CTL m CPL m Where rm rs tl pl tb pe bm CTLm CPL m : : : : : : : Line Density of Liquid in kg/m3 at metering conditions Base Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Liquid Temperature at metering point in C Liquid pressure at metering point in Bar.a Base temperature in C Equilibrium pressure in Bar.a (Use Pb) Compressibility factor in bar -1 Equation 16) Equation 11) MEASURED MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY to API MPMS 11.2.1 Equation 14) or 14a) Equation 12) Equation 13)

: Meter Correction Factor to API MPMS12.2.5.3 : Meter Correction Factor to API MPMS 12.2.5.4

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 96 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.14. ULTRASONIC METER

The Ultrasonic Meter input for the system can be set up on this page. If the corrector type requires an Ultrasonic Meter input, then the Meter input characteristics are set-up on this page. The number of acoustic Paths for the meter is set-up using the radio buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Maximum flow rate figures Q max and High Hi q and Low Lo q alarm limits can be entered. It is possible to select different types of flow Equation for the Ultrasonic meter Standard, ISO 6976 , ISO 6976 (No Z/Zb) or C.A.T.S. the calculation methods for each are as shown:Volume, Mass and Energy Flow rate Standard Calculations

p l tb + 273.15 Zb qN = qbc .p / t p b t l + 273.15 Z qM = qN db rairb


qE = qN H v
Where qN qM qE qbc.p/t db rairb t1 tb p1 pb Z Zb Hv : : : : : : : : : : : : : Corrected Volume flow rate in m3/hr Mass flow rate in kg/hr Energy flow rate in MJ/hr Meter Flow corrected for Non linearity, p and t expansion Relative density of gas at base conditions Density of air at base conditions in kg/m3 Line gas Temperature in C Base Temperature in C Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Base Pressure in Bar.a Gas compressibility Base compressibility Heating value of gas in MJ/m3

INPUT DATA DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY (As selected) (As selected) INPUT DATA

Mass, Volume and Energy ISO 6976 or North Sea (STACA) Flow rate Calculations

qM = rl qbc .p / t qM qN = rs qE = H v qN
Mr pl Z R ( t l + 273.15) Mr pb rs = Z b R ( t b + 273.15) rl =
Where qN qM qE qbc.p/t t1 p1 Z tb pb Zb : : : : : : : : : : Corrected Volume flow rate in m3/hr Mass flow rate in kg/hr Energy flow rate in MJ/hr Meter Flow corrected for Non linearity, p and t expansion Line gas Temperature in C Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Gas compressibility Base gas Temperature in C Base gas Pressure in Bar.a Base Gas compressibility

MEASURED MEASURED (As selected) INPUT DATA INPUT DATA Calculated from ISO 6976

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 97 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Hv rl Mr R rs : : : : : Heating value of gas in MJ/m3 Density of gas at line conditions in kg/m3 Gas Molar Mass (molecular weight) Gas Constant 0.083145 10 Bar.a m3/kg-mole Gas density at base conditions in kg/m3 Calculated from ISO 6976 (See Equation) Calculated from ISO 6976 Fixed Constant (See Equation)

Mass, Volume and Energy ISO 6976 (No Z/Zb) Flow rate Calculations In this calculation the Standard flow rate calculations are used as however values for Hs, Hi rd, wobbe and Molar mass are calculated to the ISO6976 standard and Values for Z and Zb are calculated to the selected standard. Mass, Volume and Energy C.A.T.S. Flow rate Calculations

qM = r 1 qbc qM qN = rs

0 (t ) qE = qm H j 1
j= 1 j

M r p1 Z R ( t 1 + 273.15) M r pb rs = Z b R ( tb + 273.15) r1 =
qm j = qM x 'j

x 'j xj =
N

Mj Mj

x 'j

j =1

Mr = xj M j
j= 1

N Zb = 1 - x j b j j = 1 N M j Z air db = x j j= 1 M air Z b
Where qN qM qE qbc db rs r1 R t1 tb (t1) p1 pb Z Zb bj : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

(Not Used)

Corrected Volume flow rate in m3/hr Mass flow rate in kg/hr Energy flow rate in MJ/hr Meter Flow corrected for Non linearity, p and t expansion Relative density of gas at base conditions (Not USED) Gas density at base conditions in kg/m3 Density of gas at line conditions in kg/m3 Gas Constant 8.314510 J/mol/K Line gas Temperature in C Base Temperature in C Combustion Temperature in C Line gas Pressure in kPa.a Base Pressure in kPa.a Gas compressibility Base compressibility Base compressibility summation factors of component j

(ISO 6976) 1995 DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY CALCULATED TO AGA 8 (ISO 6976) 1995 INPUT DATA

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 98 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES


0 ( t ) : Heating value of component j in MJ/kg from Table 4 H j 1

(ISO 6976) 1995 (ISO 6976) 1995 INPUT DATA DATA ENTRY INPUT DATA INPUT DATA

Mr Mj Mair Zair xj xj qmj

: : : : : : :

Gas Molar Mass (molecular weight) Molar Mass of component j Molar Mass of air 28.9626 kg/kmol Base compressibility of air Molar Fraction of component j Mass Fraction of component j Mass flow rate in kg/hr of gas component j

A Preset Flow figure can be entered, for flow simulation purposes, this figure can only be entered if the Mode switch Preset Flow rate in maintenance mode is enabled. The Preset Flow figure will only be used when the Maintenance mode is set to be ON. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by :Highlighting or pointing to the component Right click on the mouse button Selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate" the invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value If read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38 Correction for meter pressure and temperature expansion cor.eqn can be selected from the pull down menu, depending upon the function selected from the menu additional data may need to be entered. The P/T correction equation can be selected from None, Flange or Weld. Flange refers to meters with a flanged spool piece Weld refers to meters with a welded spool piece The selection of Q Sonic Conversion depends upon the type of units to be used for flow calculation and the units of the connected meter. For a Metric Meter and Metric flow units select No Conversion. For an Imperial meter and Imperial flow units select No Conversion For a Metric Meter and Imperial flow units select Metric to Imperial Conversion For a Imperial Meter and Metric Flow Units select Imperial to Metric Conversion Correction for meter nonlinearity cor.lin can be selected from the pull down menu, depending upon the function selected from the menu additional data may need to be entered. The Meter nonlinearity can be selected from None or 20 point. 20 point allows for up to 20 points of meter error to be entered at their corresponding flow rate , a linear interpolation between each point is then carried out to correct the flow rate for all values. It is not necessary to enter values for all 20 points any points that are not required should be invalidated see following paragraph. It is recommended that the error points are entered from the zero point first in ascending order from the lowest (or most negative) flow rate, and that all unused error points be left at the top most order. If the US meter type to be used is a Daniel Senior Sonic then additional data entry parameters required by that type of meter must be entered under the tab Daniels Senior Sonic. For information on the values of these parameters refer to the operating specification for the meter and calibration sheet for the meter. The type of US meter to be used is selected on the Port set-up page of the M2000 Windows operating software. Volume of dry gas is calculated using the following formula: Dry Gas Volume from Vdry = (Vcorrected) x (100 - %H20) Where %H20 is a preset number entered in the H20 percent box. It is also possible to calculate Mass and Energy from Vdry using the Calc Mass and Calc Energy drop down boxes. VOS Deviation: This compares the Meter VOS against the VOS calculated from AGA10.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 99 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.15. ORIFICE PLATE

The Orifice Plate data and settings for the system can be set up on this page. There are a number of parameter that need to be correctly configured for Orifice plate operation these are as follows with the available options in each case:Flow Calculation :ISO 5167 (1997) AGA 3 Standard (1985) AGA 3 Standard (1965) ISO 5167/6976 (1997) ISO 5167/6976 (2003) Preset CoD ISO 5167 (2003) Reader/Harris Gallagher Equation ISO 5167 (1997/2003) Stoltz Equation ISO 5167 (1980) Flange Corner D & D/2 Upstream Downstream ISO 5167 1997 Downstream ISO 5167 2003 Up Stream Pressure measurement Down Stream Pressure Measurement One Single Range Two High range and Low range Calculated Method 1 Calculated Method 2 Preset Off 5 point Linear Calculated Preset

Coefficient of Discharge : Tappings : Temperature Measurement Expansion factor : Transmitters : Dynamic Viscosity : Correction : K(specific heat) :

Associated with all the above selections are a number of parameters which are required to be entered most are associated with the Pipe and orifice installation and the gas medi um being measured. It is not possible to select all combinations of settings so selection boxes will become unavailable depending upon choices made in other selections. If only one single transmitter range is selected then the data for that range should be entered on the MT Dp High Range page only and not on the MT Dp Low Range page. Upstream Temperature and Pressure Calculations 1)

( p 1 - Dw ) t 1 = ( t 2 + 273.15) p1
2)

K4

- 273.15

Dw = Dw =

1 - b 4 - (C b 2 ) 1 - b 4 + (C b 2 )
4 2

3) 4) 5)

( ) h 1 - b (1 - C ) + (C b )
1 - b 4 1 - C 2 - (C b 2 )
2

p1 = p 2 + Dw

1 K4 = -1 k

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 100 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Equation for actual dynamic viscosity (Calculated Method 1)

6)

m ( p ,t ) = m 0

1 + 164 ( ( t 1 + 273.15) t 0 + 273.15) ( 0.99625 + 0.00375 p l ) (t 0 + 273.15 ) 1 + 164 ( t l + 273.15 )

Equation for actual dynamic viscosity (Calculated Method 2) 7)

m (p ,t ) = 1000 (Mu v + (K 11 t 1 ) + (K 12 r l ) + (K 13 p 1 100))

Equation for Specific Heat 8) Where t1 t2 p1 p2 Dw Dw K4 C b k h m0 t0 m(p,t) K Mu v K K11 K12 K13 K18 K19 K20 rl

K = K v + (K 18 r l ) + (K 19 r l ) + (K 20 p 1 100)
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Upstream gas Temperature in C Downstream Line gas Temperature in C Upstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Downstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Pressure Loss in Bar ISO 5167-1:1997 Pressure Loss in Bar ISO 5167-2:2003 Coefficient Coefficient of discharge Beta ratio Isentropic exponent of the gas Differential Pressure in bar Dynamic viscosity at standard conditions t0 default = 10.34 Reference Temperature in C Dynamic viscosity at flowing conditions, in Pa.s 106 Ratio of Specific Heats Reference viscosity PaS Reference Specific Heats ratio Correlation constants Correlation constants Correlation constants Correlation constants Correlation constants Correlation constants Line Density in kg/m 3 (See Equation 1) MEASURED MEASURED CALCULATED (See Equation 2) (See Equation 3) (See Equation 5) CALCULATED to ISO 5167 CALCULATED to ISO 5167 DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 6 or 7) Equation 8) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 101 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.16. VENTURI TUBE The Venturi tube data and settings for the system can be set up on this page. This input page is used when the Model 2000 is intended to be used for the calculation of the flow of steam through a Classical Venturi as defined in International Standard EN ISO5167-1 1997. There are a number of parameters that need to be correctly configured for Venturi tube operation these are as follows with the available options in each case:Tube type : As Cast Machined Rough Weld 100mm<D<800mm 0.3<b<0.75 C=0.984 50mm<D<250mm 0.4<b<0.75 C=0.995 200mm<D<1200mm 0.4<b<0.7 C=0.985

Expansion factor Transmitters Correction

: : :

Preset CoD Up Stream Pressure measurement Down Stream Pressure Measurement One Single Range Two High range and Low range Off 5 point Linear

Associated with all the above selections are a number of parameters which are required to be entered most are associated with the Pipe and Venturi installation and the gas medium being measured. It is not possible to select all combinations of settings so selection boxes will become unavailable depending upon choices made in other selections. If only one single transmitter range is selected then the data for that range should be entered on the MT Dp High Range page only and not on the MT Dp Low Range page. It is possible that the relative density data can be set in the Model 2000 in a number of different ways as follows; For rd Values (normal) operation the data used can be selected from :Use Modbus Use data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Use data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from rd Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from rd Averages menu. For rd Values (alarm) operation i.e. in the event of a failure that causes an Accountable Alarm the data used can be selected from :Use Keypad As entered on this page. Use Last Good Value As received as an input. Use Modbus Use data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Use data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from rd Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from rd Averages menu. For rd Averages the value used to calculate the Hourly or Daily Averages is selected from the following options:Use Modbus Received Use data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Received Use data from a 4-20mA transducer input. It is possible to set Preset, High, Low and Max and Min alarm levels for relative density. The Max and Min levels will generate an Accountable alarm when exceeded and the Hi and Lo will generate a Non accountable alarm. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 102 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.17. WET GAS VENTURI TUBE 1 The Wet Gas Venturi tube 1 data and settings for the system can be set up on this page. This input page is used when the Model 2000 is intended to be used for the calculation of the flow of wet gas through a Classical Venturi as defined in International Standard EN ISO5167-1 1997. There are a number of parameters that need to be correctly configured for Venturi tube operation these are as follows with the available options in each case:Tube type : As Cast Machined Rough Weld 100mm<D<800mm 0.3<b<0.75 C=0.984 50mm<D<250mm 0.4<b<0.75 C=0.995 200mm<D<1200mm 0.4<b<0.7 C=0.985

Expansion factor Transmitters Pressure Loss

: : :

Density Calculation : WGC Equation :

Preset CoD Up Stream Pressure measurement Down Stream Pressure Measurement One Single Range Two High range and Low range Preset Calculated Use Tables Use Coefficients Dickinson Jamieson Steven Chisholm Homogeneous De Leeuw

Details of the different Calculations used in the above selections are as follows;Associated with all the above selections are a number of parameters which are required to be entered most are associated with the Pipe and Venturi installation and the gas medium being measured. It is not possible to select all combinations of settings so selection boxes will become unavailable depending upon choices made in other selections. If only one single transmitter range is selected then the data for that range should be entered on the MT Dp High Range page only and not on the MT Dp Low Range page. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 103 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES WET GAS EQUATIONS USED IN M2000 FLOW COMPUTER Mass and Volume Flow Rate Calculations 1)

2) 3) 4)

d 2 10 - 6 qM g ( UNCOR ) = 3600 C dg e tl 1 - b4 qM g (UNCOR ) qM g ( COR ) = WGC


qM l ( COR ) =
qN g ( Line ) =

p 2 h 10 5 r gl 4

1 - X mg qM g(COR) X mg qM g ( COR )
r gl

5)

qN g ( Base ) =
qN l ( Line ) = qN l ( Base ) =

qM g ( COR ) r gs
qM l ( COR ) r ll ( Flash ) qM l ( COR )

6) 7) 8) 9)

r ls ( Flash ) qM w = qM l ( COR ) WMF


qM c = qM l ( COR ) CMF
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : The two phase flow, as indicated Mass flow rate in kg/hr Gas (Corrected for Liquid content) Mass flow rate in kg/hr Liquid Mass flow rate in kg/hr Gas Volume flow at Base conditions in m3/hr Gas Volume flow at Line conditions in m3/hr Liquid Volume flow at Base conditions in m3/hr Liquid Volume flow at Line conditions in m3/hr Mass of Water flow rate in kg/hr Mass of Condensate flow rate in kg/hr Coefficient of discharge Upstream Expansion factor Gas Line Density in kg/m3 Gas Base Density in kg/m3 Gas Line Density in kg/m3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Line Base Density in kg/m3 Water Mass Fraction Condensate Mass Fraction Venturi Diameter in mm at Line gas temperature tl Beta ratio Differential Pressure in bar pi Constant Wet Gas Correction Factor Equation 1) Equation 2) Equation 3) Equation 4) Equation 5) Equation 6) Equation 7) Equation 8) Equation 9) DATA ENTRY Equation 14) From P and T look up t able ISO 6976 Equation 35 AGA 8 Equation 34 DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 10) MEASURED 3.14159265358979 Equation 19), 20), 25), 27) or 28)

Where : qMg(UNCOR) qMg(COR) qMl(COR) qNg(Base) qNg(Line) qNl(Base) qNl(Line) qMw qMc Cdg e1 rg (table)1 rgs rgl r1l(Flash) rls(Flash) WMF CMF dtl b h p WGC

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 104 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Equations for correction of thermal expansion of pipe and venturi 10) 11) 12) Where : b Dtl dtl Dt0 dt0 t0D t0d tl lD ld

b=

d tl = d t 0 1 + l d 10 (t l - t 0d )
-6

D tl = Dt 0 1 + l D 10-6 (t l - t 0 D )

d tl D tl

)
Equation 10) Equation 11) Equation 12) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

: : : : : : : : : :

Beta ratio Pipe Diameter in mm at Line gas temperature t l Venturi Diameter in mm at Line gas temperature tl Pipe Diameter in mm at reference temperature t 0D Venturi Diameter in mm at reference temperature t0d Reference Temperature of pipe in C Reference Temperature of Venturi in C Line gas Temperature in C Linear expansion coefficient of the pipe/ deg.K default = 12.6 K-1 Linear expansion coefficient of the Venturi/ deg.K default = 12.6 K-1

Equation for Reynolds number

13)

R eD =

4 qM g ( UNCOR ) 10 6 3600 p D tl 10 - 3 m ( p ,t )

Where : ReD qMg(UNCOR) Dt0 m(p,t) p

: : : : :

Reynolds Number Mass flow rate in kg/hr Pipe Diameter in mm at reference temperature t 0D Dynamic viscosity of gas at flowing conditions, in Pa.s 106 pi Constant

Equation 13) Equation 1) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY 3.14159265358979

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 105 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Expansion factor Up stream Pressure tappings equation
( k - 1) 2 k kt k 1 - b4 1- t e1 = k - 1 1 - (b4 t 2 k ) 1-t

14)

15) 16) 17) 18) Where : e1 b h p1 p2 k t x Dw A B C

hx p 2 = p1 - 100 p t= 2 p1 Dw p 2 = p1 - 3 10 Dw = A b 2 - (B b ) + C h

((

: : : : : : : : : :

Upstream Expansion factor Beta ratio Differential Pressure in Bar Upstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Downstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Isentropic exponent of the gas Pressure Ratio Relative Pressure Loss in percent Intermediate calculation For 7 Cone = 0.38 For 15 Cone = 0.59 DATA ENTRY : For 7 Cone = 0.42 For 15 Cone = 0.86 DATA ENTRY : For 7 Cone = 0.218 For 15 Cone = 0.436 DATA ENTRY

Equation 14) Equation 10) MEASURED MEASURED Equation 15) or 17) DATA ENTRY Equation 16) DATA ENTRY Equation 18)

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 106 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Alternative Calculations for Wet Gas Correlation rg (table)1 : Gas Line Density in kg/m3 rl(table)1 : Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Xmg : Gas Mass Fraction at t 1 and p1 conditions From P and T look up t able From P and T look up t able From P and T look up t able

Values for the above can either be derived from Look Up Tables of Variable size up to 25 Pressure Steps by 10 Temperature Steps. Or From Co-efficient Equations 38) to 41) DICKINSON JAMIESON CORRELATION:

WGC
19) Where : WGCDJ M rg (table)1 rl(table)1 Xmg Cdg Cdl e1 : : : : : : : :

DJ

= 1+ M

1 - X mg X mg

Cd g e 1 Cd l

r g ( table ) l r l ( table ) l
Equation 19) DATA ENTRY From P and T look up t able From P and T look up t able From P and T look up t able DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 14)

Wet Gas Calculation to Dickinson Jamieson Murdock's calibration factor default M=1.26 Gas Line Density in kg/m3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Gas Mass Fraction at t1 and p1 conditions Discharge gas coefficient Discharge liquid coefficient default 0.995 Upstream Expansion factor

STEVEN CORRELATION:

20)

1 + AX + BFr g WGC S = 1 + CX + DFrg


2 r g ( table) l A = 2.085 + 0.0060 r l ( table) l 2 r g ( table ) l B = -0.08 + 0.0001 r ( table ) l l 2 r g ( table) l C = 0.548 + 0.0042 r ( table) l l 2 r g ( table ) l D = -0.079 + 0.00009 r (table ) l l

21)

22)

23)

24)

Where : WGCS A B C D rg (table)1 rl(table)1 X Frg

: : : : : : : : :

Wet Gas Calculation to Steven Intermediate Calculation Intermediate Calculation Intermediate Calculation Intermediate Calculation Gas Line Density in kg/m 3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Lockhart Martinelli parameter Froude Number

Equation 20) Equation 21) Equation 22) Equation 23) Equation 24) From P and T look up table From P and T look up t able Equation 30) Equation 31)

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 107 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES CHISHOLM CORRELATION: 25)

WGC C = 1 + CX + X 2
r l ( table) l C= r ( table) l g
: : : : :

26)

0.25

r g ( table) l + r ( table) l l

0.25

Where : WGCC C rg (table)1 rl(table)1 X

Wet Gas Calculation to Chisholm Intermediate Calculation Gas Line Density in kg/m 3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Lockhart Martinelli parameter

Equation 25) Equation 26) From P and T look up t able From P and T look up t able Equation 30)

HOMOGENOUS CORRELATION (Measured Line Density) :

27) Where : WGCH Xmg mx rg (table)1

WGCH =

1 C mg

r g ( table ) l rmx
Equation 27) From P and T look up t able MEASURED From P and T look up t able

: : : :

Wet Gas Calculation to Homogenous Gas Mass Fraction at t1 and p1 conditions Mixture Density Gas Line Density in kg/m 3

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 108 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES DE LEEUW CORRELATION (Chisholm variant): 28)

WGC DL = 1 + CX + X 2

29)

r ( table )l rg ( table)l + C= l rg ( table )l rl ( table)l


n = 0.41

Where : and WGCDL C rg (table)1 rl(table)1 X Frg

n = 0.606 1 - e
: : : : : :

- 0.746 Frg

for Frg < 1.5 for Frg 1.5 Equation 28) Equation 29) From P and T look up t able From P and T look up table Equation 30) Equation 31)

Wet Gas Calculation to De Leeuw Intermediate Calculation Gas Line Density in kg/m 3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Lockhart Martinelli parameter Froude Number

LOCKHART-MARTINELLI PARAMETER:

30)

1 - C mg X= C mg
: : : : : : :

Cd g r ( table)l e1 g C rl ( table)l dl
Equation 30) From P and T look up t able From P and T look up t able From P and T look up t able DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 14)

Where : X rg (table)1 rl(table)1 Xmg Cdg Cdl e1

Lockhart Martinelli parameter Gas Line Density in kg/m 3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Gas Mass Fraction at t1 and p1 conditions Discharge gas coefficient Discharge liquid coefficient default 0.995 Upstream Expansion factor

FROUDE NUMBER:

31)

Frg =

U sg g Dt 0

rg ( table)l rl ( table )l - rg ( table)l

32) Where : Frg qMg(COR) Dt0 Usg dt0 g rg (table)1 rl(table)1

U sg =

qM g ( COR )
2 3600 rg ( table)l p d t0 4

: : : : : : : :

Froude Number Corrected gas mass flow rate in kg/hr (Start with Equation 1) Pipe Diameter in mm at reference temperature t0D Superficial gas velocity Venturi Diameter in mm at reference temperature t 0d gravitational constant 9.81m/s2 Gas Line Density in kg/m3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3

Equation 31) Equation 2) DATA ENTRY Equation 32) DATA ENTRY CONSTANT From P and T look up t able From P and T look up t able

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 109 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Gas Density Calculations 34) 35) 36) 37) Where : rgs rgl R tl tb pl pb Z Zb bj Mr Mj xj

M r p 1 0 .1 Z R ( t 1 + 273.15) M r p b 0. 1 rgs = Z b R ( t b + 273.15) rg 1 =


Mr = xj M j
j= 1 N

N Zb = 1 - x j b j j =1
: : : : : : : : : : : : :

Gas density at base conditions in kg/m3 Density of gas at line conditions in kg/m3 Gas Constant 0.008314510 Mpa m3/kmol.K Upstream Line gas Temperature in C Base Temperature in C Upstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Base Pressure in Bar.a Gas compressibility Base compr essibility Base compr essibility summation factors of component j Gas Molar Mass (molecular weight) Molar Mass of componen t j Molar Fraction of component j

Equation 35) Equation 34) DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY Calculated to AGA 8 / ISO 12213 Equation 37 (ISO 6976) INPUT DATA Equation 36 (ISO 6976) INPUT DATA INPUT DATA

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 110 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Look up table alternative calculations

38)

r l ( table ) l = a 00

1 + a 01 p l

1 a 02 ( ) + ( a t + 273 . 15 ) + 10 l p l

39)

( t l + 273.15) 2 + a 11 + a 20 ( t l + 273.15) p l 1 1 b 02 ( ) r g (table ) l = b 00 + b + ( b t + 273 . 15 ) + 10 l 01 p p l l ( t l + 273.15) + + b 20 (t l + 273.15) 2 b11 pl

40)

1 x = c 00 + c 01 p l

1 c 02 ( ) + ( c t + 273 . 15 ) + 10 l p l

( t l + 273.15) + c 20 ( t l + 273.15) 2 + c11 pl

41)

X mg = 0.5 -0.5 COS ( x ) X mg = 0


X mg = 1
for x > 0 for 0 x p for x < 0

Where : rg(table)1 rl(table)1 Xmg x tl pl a00 to a20 b00 to b20 c00 to c20

: : : : : : : : :

Gas Line Density in kg/m 3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Gas Mass Fraction at t1 and p1 conditions Intermediate calculation Upstream Line gas Temperature in C Upstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Liquid density co-efficient Gas density co-efficient Gas Mass Fraction co-efficient

Equation 39) Equation 38) Equation 41) Equation 40) MEASURED MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 111 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.18. WET GAS VENTURI TUBE 2

The Wet Gas Venturi tube 2 data and settings for the system can be set up on this page. This input page is used when the Model 2000 is intended to be used for the calculation of the flow of wet gas through a Classical Venturi as defined in International Standard EN ISO5167-1 1997/2003. There are a number of parameters that need to be correctly configured for Venturi tube operation these are as follows with the available options in each case:Cod Sel Expansion factor Transmitters Pressure Loss : : : : Interpolate Table of Cod against Reynolds number (up to 10 data items) Preset CoD Up Stream Pressure measurement Down Stream Pressure Measurement One Single Range Two High range and Low range Preset Calculated

Details of the different Calculations used in the above selections are as follows;Associated with all the above selections are a number of parameters which are required to be entered most are associated with the Pipe and Venturi installation and the gas medium being measured. It is not possible to select all combinations of settings so selection boxes will become unavailable depending upon choices made in other selections. If only one single transmitter range is selected then the data for that range should be entered on the MT Dp High Range page only and not on the MT Dp Low Range page. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 112 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES WET GAS EQUATIONS USED IN M2000 FLOW COMPUTER Calculation sequence is as follows:-

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13)

Select Starting Value for ReD Derive Cdg from look up table. Calculate Usg Superficial gas velocity Equation 29) Calculate Frg Froude Number Equation 28) Calculate n Calculate C Equation 26) Calculation Fchm-DL Wet Gas Factor to De Leeuw Equation 25) Calculate The two phase mass flow rate qMg(uncor) Equation 1) Calculate Water Saturated (Wet) Gas Mass Flow Rate qmg-saturated Equation 2) Calculate Reynolds Number ReD Equation 16) Derive adjacent points of Cdg from look up table Perform linear interpolation between points of Cdg from table to derive new Cdg . Return to point 3) iterate until convergence for ReD is achieved.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 113 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Gas Mass Flow Rate Calculations 1)

Water Saturated (Wet) Gas Mass Flow Rate (kg/hr) calculated using De-Leeuw 2) q mg _ saturated = qM g ( UNCOR ) Fchm _ DL Dry Gas Mass Flow Rate 3) q mg _ dry = q mg_saturat ed 1 - y W _ gas

d 2 10- 6 p 2 h 105 r qM g ( UNCO R ) = 3600 Cdg e tl g 1 - b4 4

Liquid Mass Flow Rate 4)

1-c q ml = q mg _ saturated c

Corrected two Phase Mass Flow Rate (including Water) 5) q m _ tp _ corr = q mg _ saturated + q ml Liquid Mass Flow Rates 6) q mC = z C Q m _ tp _ corr 7) 8)

q mW = z W Q m _ tp _ corr q mM = z M Q m _ tp _ corr

Total Hydrocarbon Mass Flow Rate 9) q m _ hc = q mg _ dry + q mC Where : qMg(UNCOR) qmg-saturated qmg-dry qml qm-tp-corr qmC qmW qmM qm-hc Cdg e1 rgl WMF CMF dtl b h p Fchm-DL yW-gas c zC zW zM : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : The two phase flow, as indicated Mass flow rate in kg/hr Water Sat. (Wet) De-Leeuw Mass flow rate in kg/hr Dry Gas Mass flow rate in kg/hr Liquid Mass flow rate in kg/hr Corrected two Phase Mass Flow Rate (including Water) in kg/hr Condensate Mass flow rate in kg/hr Water Mass flow rate in kg/hr Methanol Mass flow rate in kg/hr Total Hydrocarbon Mass flow rate in kg/hr Coefficient of discharge Upstream Expansion factor Gas Line Density in kg/m 3 to AGA 8 Water Mass Fraction Condensate Mass Fraction Venturi Diameter in mm at Line gas temperature t l Beta ratio Differential Pressure in bar pi 3.14159265358979 Wet Gas Correction Factor Mass Fraction of Water (Gas phase) Gas Mass Fraction Condensate Mass Fraction Water Mass Fraction Methanol Mass Fraction Equation 1) Equation 2) Equation 3) Equation 4) Equation 5) Equation 6) Equation 7) Equation 8) Equation 9) LOOK UP TABLE or DATA ENTRY Equation 17) Equation 30) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 13) MEASURED CONSTANT Equation 25) DATA ENTRY Equation 44) Equation 45) Equation 46) Equation 47)

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 114 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Component Standard Volume flow rates 10) 11) 12) Where : qstd-g qstd-cond qstd-water qmg-dry qmC qmW rgs rW-std rC-std

q std _ g =

q mg _ dry rgs
q mC rC _ std

q std _ cond =

qstd _ water =
: : : : : : : : :

qmW r W _ std
Equation 10) Equation 11) Equation 12) Equation 3) Equation 6) Equation 7) Equation 31) Equation 40) DATA ENTRY

Dry gas Volume flow rate in m3/hr Condensate Volume flow rate in m3/hr Water Volume flow rate in m3/hr Dry Gas Mass flow rate in kg/hr Condensate Mass flow rate in kg/hr Water Mass flow rate in kg/hr Gas Base Density in kg/m3 to ISO 6976 Base Density of Water in kg/m3 Line Density of Condensate in kg/m3

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 115 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Equations for correction of thermal expansion of pipe and venturi 13) 14)

b=

D tl = Dt 0 1 + l D 10-6 (t l - t 0 D )

d tl D tl

15) d tl = d t 0 1 + l d 10 t l - t 0d Where : b : Beta ratio Dtl : Pipe Diameter in mm at Line gas temperature tl dtl : Venturi Diameter in mm at Line gas temperature t l Dt0 : Pipe Diameter in mm at reference temperature t0D dt0 : Venturi Diameter in mm at reference temperature t 0d t0D : Reference Temperature of pipe in C t0d : Reference Temperature of Venturi in C tl : Upstream Line gas/liquid Temperature in C lD : Linear expansion coefficient of the pipe/ deg.K default = 12.6 K-1 ld : Linear expansion coefficient of the Venturi/ deg.K default = 12.6 K-1 Equation for Reynolds number

-6

))

)
Equation 13) Equation 14) Equation 15) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 23) or MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

16)

R eD =

4 q mg _ saturated 106 3600 p D tl 10- 3 m ( p ,t )


Equation 16) Equation 2) Equation 14) DATA ENTRY CONSTANT

Where : ReD qmg-saturated Dtl m(p,t) p

: : : : :

Reynolds Number Mass flow rate in kg/hr Pipe Diameter in mm at Line gas temperature tl Dynamic viscosity of gas at flowing conditions, in Pa.s 106 pi 3.14159265358979

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 116 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Expansion factor Up stream Pressure tappings equation
( k - 1) 2 k kt k 1 - b4 1- t e1 = k - 1 1 - (b4 t 2 k ) 1-t

17)

18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) Where : e1 b h p1 p2 p3 k t x t1 t2 Dw K4 A B C

p 2 = p1 - h p t= 2 p1 hx p 3 = p1 - 100 Dw p 3 = p1 - 3 10 Dw = A b 2 - (B b ) + C h

((

p3 t 1 = ( t 2 + 273.15) p 1 1 K4 = -1 k
: : : : : : : : : : : : : :

K4

- 273.15

Upstream Expansion factor Beta ratio Differential Pressure in Bar Upstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Downstream Line gas Pr essure in Bar.a Fully recovered Downstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Isentropic exponent of the gas Pressure Ratio Relative Pressure Loss in percent Upstream Line gas/liquid Temperature in C Downstream Line gas/liquid Temperature in C Intermediate calculation Pressure Loss Intermediate calculation For 7 Cone = 0.38 For 15 Cone = 0.59 DATA ENTRY : For 7 Cone = 0.42 For 15 Cone = 0.86 DATA ENTRY : For 7 Cone = 0.218 For 15 Cone = 0.436 DATA ENTRY

Equation 17) Equation 13) MEASURED MEASURED Equation 18) Equation 20) or 21) DATA ENTRY Equation 19) DATA ENTRY Equation 23) or MEASURED MEASURED Equation 22) Equation 24)

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 117 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES DE LEEUW CORRELATION (Chisholm variant) LOCKHART-MARTINELLI PARAMETER: 25)

Fchm - DL =

1 C 1 1+ + 2 Y Y
n n

26)

27)

r rg C= l + r r g l c rl Y= 1-c rg
n = 0.41

Where : and Fchm-DL C rg rl Y Frg c

n = 0.606 1 - e
: : : : : : :

- 0.746 Frg

for Frg < 1.5 for Frg 1.5 Equation 25) Equation 26) Equation 30) Equation 42) Equation 27) Equation 28) Equation 42)

Wet Gas Calculation to De Leeuw Intermediate Calculation Gas Line Density in kg/m 3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Lockhart Martinelli parameter Froude Number Gas Mass Fraction

FROUDE NUMBER:

28)

Frg =

U sg g Dtl 10- 3

rg rl - rg

29) Where : Frg Dtl Usg g rg rl ReD m(p,t)

U sg =

R eD m ( p , t ) rg D tl 10 3
Equation 28) Equation 14) Equation 29) CONSTANT Equation 30) Equation 42) Equation 16) DATA ENTRY

: : : : : : : :

Froude Number Pipe Diameter in mm at Line gas temperature tl Superficial gas velocity gravitational constant 9.806650m/s2 Gas Line Density in kg/m 3 Liquid Line Density in kg/m3 Reynolds Number Dynamic viscosity of gas at flowing conditions, in Pa.s 106

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 118 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES GAS COEFFICIENT OF DISCHARGE: DATA ENTRY Selection from the following alternative: AS CAST

100mm D 800mm 0.3 b 0.75 2 105 R eD 2 106 Cdg = 0.984

MACHINED

50mm D 250mm 0.4 b 0.75 2 105 R eD 1 106 Cdg = 0.995

ROUGH WELDED

200mm D 1200mm 2 105 R eD 2 106

0.4 b 0.7 Cdg = 0.985


LOOK UP TABLE Up to 10 user entered values of Cdg corresponding to 10 user entered values of ReD DATA ENTRY Single point user entered value of Cdg

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 119 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Gas Density Calculations 30) 31) 32) 33) Where : rgs rg R tl tb pl pb Z Zb bj Mr Mj xj

M r p1 0.1 Z R ( t 1 + 273.15) M r p b 0. 1 rgs = Z b R ( t b + 273.15) rg =


Mr = xj M j
j= 1 N

N Zb = 1 - x j b j j =1
: : : : : : : : : : : : :

Gas density at base conditions in kg/m3 Density of gas at line conditions in kg/m3 Gas Constant 0.008314510 Mpa m3/kmol.K Upstream Line gas/liquid Temperature in C Base Temperature in C Upstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Base Pressure in Bar.a Gas compressibility to AGA 8 / ISO 12213 Base compr essibility to ISO 6976 Base compr essibility summation factors of component j Gas Molar Mass (molecular weight) to ISO 6976 Molar Mass of componen t j Molar Fraction of component j

Equation 31) Equation 30) DATA ENTRY Equation 23) or MEASURED DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY CALCULATED Equation 33) INPUT DATA Equation 32) INPUT DATA INPUT DATA

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 120 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Calculation of Coefficient of Thermal Expansion CTL 34)

aT =

K0 ( rstd _ C )
2

K1 + K2 rstd _ C

Temperature Correction Factor Calculation 35)

CTL M = - EXP[a T ( t l - t b ) (1 + 0.8 a T [ t l - t b ])]

Pressure Correction Factor Calculation 36)

CPL M =

1 [1 - b L (p l - p e )]

Calculation of Compressibility Factors for densities of 638-1047 Kg/m3


0.87096 10 6 4.2092 t l 10 3 + - 1.62080 + 0.00021592 t l + ( r std _ C ) 2 ( r std _ C ) 2

37)

b L = 10- 4 e

Calculation of Condensate Density 38) Where aT K0 K1 K2 rstd-C CTLM tl tb CPL M pl pe bL rC

rC = rstd _ C CTL M CPL M


: : : : : : : : : : : : : Coefficient of thermal expansion of liquid Alpha in C-1 Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 Base Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Correction Factor Upstream Line gas/liquid Temperature in C Base temperature in C Correction Factor Upstream Liquid pressure in Bar.a Equilibrium pressure in Bar.a Compressibility factor of Liquid in bar -1 Line Density of Condensate in kg/m3 Equation 34) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 35) Equation 23) or MEASURED DATA ENTRY Equation 36) MEASURED DATA ENTRY Equation 37) Equation 38)

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 121 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Calculation of Water and Methanol Density 39) 40) 41)

r W = D l t l2 + E t l + F
2 r W _ std = D l t b + E tb + F

r M = G t l2 + H t l + J l

Liquid Mixture Density 42)

rl =

yC + rC

yl y W _ liquid rW

yM rM

43)

y l = y C + y W _ liquid + y M

Gas and Liquid Mass Fractions 44) 45) 46) 47) 48) Where rW rW-std rM rC rl rg Dl E F G H Jl tl tb yl yC yW-liquid yM c zC zW zM

1 1 + yl yC zC = 1 + yl y z W = W _ liquid 1 + yl yM zM = 1 + yl z C + z W + z M + c = 1.0000 c=
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

Check Calculation Equation 39) Equation 40) Equation 41) Equation 38) Equation 42) Equation 30) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 23) or MEASURED DATA ENTRY Equation 43) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 44) Equation 45) Equation 46) Equation 47)

Line Density of Water in kg/m3 Base Density of Water in kg/m3 Line Density of Methanol in kg/m3 Line Density of Condensate in kg/m3 Line Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Line Density of Gas in kg/m3 Constant Constant Constant Constant Constant Constant Upstream Line gas/liquid Temperature in C Base Temperature in C Liquid to Gas Mass Ratio Condensate to Gas Mass Ratio Water (Liquid phase) to Gas Mass Ratio Methanol to Gas Mass Ratio Gas Mass Fraction Condensate Mass Fraction Water Mass Fraction Methanol Mass Fraction

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 122 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.19. CORIOLIS The Coriolis meter data and settings for the system can be set up on this page. This input page is used when the Model 2000 is intended to be used with a Coriolis flow transmitter PP-FT-1352 (Micro motion model RFT 9739). This device can use either a pulse input connection to the FC2000, a serial communication (Modbus) connection to the FC2000 or both. The Page is divided into four tabs Coriolis Data The FC 2000 will always communicate to the meter using Modbus Serial communication Modbus ID sets the modbus communication address used. Use Coriolis Pulse determines if the Pulse input is to be used or No pulse input if not. If Pulse input is selected then the following data item s must also be entered:Input Frequency Scaler Input Frequency min Pulse Output Frequency Pulse Output Value Deviation and Deviation Time which sets the allowable difference between the Pulse input Mass Flow and that read via serial communication and how often that comparison is made. The following pull down menus determine the operation and data to be read from the meter:Use Coriolis Reset Yes or No Use Coriolis Alarm Yes or No Use Coriolis Density Yes or No Use Coriolis Pressure Yes or No Use Coriolis Temperature Yes or No Counter Selection Selects if Pulses or Modbus values are used to determine the Mass flow. Qm Max 100% Mass flow Hi q % High flow alarm level Lo q % Low flow alarm level are also entered on this page. Coriolis Alarm Mask This tab contains the setup for individual status data bits that can be read from the meter, each item can be enabled using a tick box. The operator should refer to the meter operating manual for details relating to each item. This tab contains preset data relating to Density Inputs and Density Used the following data is entered. Water line density Water base density Condensate line density Density keypad Value Density min Value Density max Value All values are entered in kg/m3 API Constants tab contains preset data relating to the Liquid flow calculations the following data is entered. API Constant K0 API Constant K1 API Constant K2 Preset Equilibrium Pressure PE in bara Beta calculation method API 11.2.1(1984) or Alternative If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. The flow computer calculates the liquid totals and flow rates (gross volume, standard volume and mass) for total liquid, condensate and water. These calculations are based on the measured mass flow and density from the Coriolis flow transmitter.

Density Data

API Constants

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 123 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Volume flow rate equations 1) 2) Where qML qGL qNL rLM rLS : : : : :

qG L =
qN L =

qM L
qM L

r LM
r LS
Measured Equation 1) Equation 2) Measured Equation 9)

Mass flow rate in kg/hr Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/hr Volume flow rate at base conditions in m3/hr Line Density of Liquid at metering conditions in kg/m3 Base Density of Liquid in kg/m3

Calculation of Coefficient of Thermal Expansion CTL 3)

aT =

K0 K + 1 + K2 2 (r LS ) r LS

Temperature Volume Correction Factor Calculation at metering conditions 4) CTL m = EXP - [a T ( t l - t b ) (1 + 0.8 a T [t l - t b ])] Pressure Volume Correction Factor Calculation at metering conditions 5)

CPL m =

1 [1 - b m (p l - p e )]

Calculation of Compressibility Factor at metering conditions 6) b m = 0.00001 EXP(C) 7)

C = (1.38315 + 0.00343804 t l ) - ( 3.02909 + 0.0161654 t l ) In (


-4 6 3 -1.62080+ 0.00021592t + 0.8709610 + 4.2092t l 10 l 2 2 r LS rLS

rLS ) 1000

8) b m = 10 e Calculation of Liquid Density at base conditions 9) Where aT CTLm CPL m rLM rLS tl pl tb pe K0 K1 K2 bm C

rLS =
: : : : : : : : : : : : : :

rLM CTL m CPL m


Equation 3) Equation 4) Equation 5) Measured Equation 9) Measured/Data Entry Measured/Data Entry Data Entry Data Entry Data Entry Data Entry Data Entry Equation 6) or 8) Equation 7)

Coefficient of thermal expansion of liquid Alpha in C-1 Meter Correction Factor to API MPMS 12.2.5.3 1 st Edition Oct 1995 Meter Correction Factor to API MPMS 12.2.5.4 1 st Edition Oct 1995 Line Density of Liquid at metering conditions in kg/m3 Base Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Line Liquid Temperature in C Line Liquid pressure in Bar.a Base temperature in C Equilibrium pressure in Bar.a Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 Compressibility factor in bar -1 API MPMS 11.2.1 Intermediate Calculation

Condensate and Wat er Mass and Volume flow rate equations 10) VC + VW = 1 11) 12) 13)

rLS = (V W r WS ) + (V C rCS ) r CM = r CS CTL M CPL M qM C = qM L V C

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 124 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) Where qML qMC qNC qGC qMW qNW qGW rCM rWM rLS rCS rWS zC zW CTLm CPL m : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

qN C =
qG C =

qM C
qM C

rCS

r CM qM W = qM L V W qM W qN W = r WS qM W qG W = r WM
Mass flow rate Liquid in kg/hr Mass flow rate Condensate in kg/hr Volume flow rate Condensate at base conditions in m3/hr Volume flow rate Condensate at line conditions in m3/hr Mass flow rate Water in kg/hr Volume flow rate Water at base conditions in m3/hr Volume flow rate Water at line conditions in m3/hr Line Density of Condensate at metering conditions in kg/m3 Line Density of Water at metering conditions in kg/m3 Base Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Base Density of Condensate in kg/m3 Base Density of Water in kg/m3 Condensate Mass Fraction Water Mass Fraction Meter Correction Factor to API MPMS 12.2.5.3 1 st Edition Oct 1995 Meter Correction Factor to API MPMS 12.2.5.4 1 st Edition Oct 1995 Measured Equation 13) Equation 14) Equation 15) Equation 16) Equation 17) Equation 18) Equation 12) Data Entry Equation 9) Data Entry Data Entry Derived from Equations 10 & 11 Derived from Equations 10 & 11 Equation 4) Equation 5)

Water Mass and Volume percent flow rate equations 19) 20) 21) Where qML qGL qNL qMW qNW qGW %qMW %qNW %qGW : : : : : : : : :

qM W 100 qM L qN W %qN W = 100 qN L qG W %qG W = 100 qG L %qM W =


Mass flow rate Liquid in kg/hr Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/hr Volume flow rate at base conditions in m3/hr Mass flow rate Water in kg/hr Volume flow rate Water at base conditions in m3/hr Volume flow rate Water at line conditions in m3/hr Mass flow rate Water in % of Total Normal Volume flow rate Water in % of Total Gross Volume flow rate Water in % of Total Measured Equation 1) Equation 2) Equation 16) Equation 17) Equation 18) Equation 19) Equation 20) Equation 21)

A component can be made invalid by :Highlighting or pointing to the component Right click on the mouse button Selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate" the invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value If read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 125 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.20. GAS LINE DENSITY TABLE The values for Gas Line Density look up table can be set up on this page. This input page is used whe n the Model 2000 is intended to be used in the calculation of Wet gases through a Venturi Tube. Values of Gas Line Density at various Temperatures and Pressures are entered in a look up table. The number of Temperature readings and the number of Pressure Readings can be selected from the appropriate pull down menu, a Minimum of 3 to a maximum of 10 for Temperature and a Minimum of 3 to a maximum of 25 for Pressure. The size of the look up table will then be adjusted from a minimum of 3 by 3 to a maximum of 10 by 25. Values of Temperature, Pressure and Gas Line Density must then be entered in the table. The Model 2000 will then look up the nearest four Gas Line Density values to its measured Temperature and Pressure and linearly interpolate a value in between to arrive at a value of Gas Line Density at the measured Temperature and Pressure. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 126 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.21. LIQUID LINE DENSITY TABLE The values for Liquid Line Density look up t able can be set up on this page. This input page is used whe n the Model 2000 is intended to be used in the calculation of Wet gases through a Venturi Tube. Values of Liquid Line Density at various Temperatures and Pressures are entered in a look up table. The number of Temperature readings and the number of Pressure Readings can be selected from the appropriate pull down menu, a Minimum of 3 to a maximum of 10 for Temperature and a Minimum of 3 to a maximum of 25 for Pressure. The size of the look up table will then be adjusted from a minimum of 3 by 3 to a maximum of 10 by 25. Values of Temperature, Pressure and Liquid Line Density must then be entered in the table. The Model 2000 will then look up the nearest four Liquid Line Density values to its measured Temperature and Pressure and linearly interpolate a value in between to arrive at a value of Liquid Line Density at the measured Temperature and Pressure. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 127 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.22. GAS MASS FRACTION TABLE The values for Gas Mass Fraction look up table can be set up on this page. This input page is used whe n the Model 2000 is intended to be used in the calculation of Wet gases through a Venturi Tube. Values of Gas Mass Fraction at various Temperatures and Pressures are entered in a look up table. The number of Temperature readings and the number of Pressure Readings can be selected from the appropriate pull down menu, a Minimum of 3 to a maximum of 10 for Temperature and a Minimum of 3 to a maximum of 25 for Pressure. The size of the look up table will then be adjusted from a minimum of 3 by 3 to a maximum of 10 by 25. Values of Temperature, Pressure and Gas Mass Fraction must then be entered in the table. The Model 2000 will then look up t he nearest four Gas Mass Fraction values to its measured Temperature and Pressure and linearly interpolate a value in between to arrive at a value of Gas Mass Fraction at the measured Temperature and Pressure. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 128 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.23. STEAM DENSITY The values for Steam Density look up t able can be set up on this page. This input page is used when the Model 2000 is intended to be used for the calculation of the flow of steam through a Classical Venturi as defined in International Standard EN ISO5167-1 1997. Values of Steam Density at various Pressures and Temperatures are entered in a look up table. The number of Temperature readings and the number of Pressure Readings can be selected from the appropriate pull down menu, a Minimum of 3 to a maximum of 10. The size of the look up table will then be adjusted from a minimum of 3 by 3 to a maximum of 10 by 10. Values of Temperature, Pressure and Steam Density must then be entered in the table. The Model 2000 will then look up the nearest four Density values to its measured Pressure and Temperature and linearly interpolate a value in between to arrive at a value of Steam Density at the measured Pressure and Temperature. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 129 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.24. LIQUIDS (CTL ONLY) The set up Liquid correction are input on this page. The M2000 can apply a Liquid Correction factor CTL to the Flow, a single table of corrections at set temperatures can be entered, these Temperatures are in degrees F and the corrections entered should correspond to those value. If the M2000 is set to operate in other temperature units then it will convert internally. The M2000 employs an interpretation technique to derive a correction at a specific temperature. It is possible that gas data can be set in the Model 2000 in a number of different ways as follows; For Liquid Values (normal) operation the Liquid data used can be selected from :Use Chromat Use data read serially from a chromatograph. Use Modbus Use data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Use data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from Liquid Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from Liquid Averages menu. For Liquid Values (alarm) operation i.e. in the event of a chromatograph failure or communication failure that causes an Accountable Alarm the data used can be selected from :Use Keypad As entered on this page. Use Last Good Value As received as an input. Use Chromat Use data read serially from a chromatograph. Use Modbus Use data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Use data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from Liquid Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from Liquid Averages menu. For Liquid Averages the value used to calculate the Hourly or Daily Averages is selected from the following options:Use Chromat Received Use data read serially from a chromatograph. Use Modbus Received Use data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Received Use data from a 4-20mA transducer input. If a Relative Density transducer is enabled (See Relative Density Meter Page) then the M2000 will assume that the value received from the Relative density transducer is to be used and under these circumstances any value received from the Chromatograph, serially or from an analogue transducer will be ignored. For Specific Gravity data value it is possible to set Preset, High, Low and Max and Min alarm levels. The Max and Min levels will generate an Accountable alarm when exceeded and the Hi and Lo will generate a Non accountable alarm. Keypad, preset or initialise values for all required data values can be entered, together with the chromatograph stream Chromat Stream No. to be used on t his flow computer stream if a chromatograph is being used. If no chromatograph is to be used in this setup then the Chromat stream No should be set to None. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 130 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.25. LIQUIDS The set up Liquid correction are input on this page. The M2000 can apply a number of corrections for measurement of the flow of Liquids CTS Correction for Temperature of Steel (Meter). This can be selected to Use CTS when it is calculated or not to Use CTS when the correction is set to 1. The correction for CTS is Calculated from the following equation:1) Where Cts t0 tl lm

C ts = 1 + ( t l - t 0 ) l m 10 -6
Correction for meter expansion due to temperature : Reference Temperature of meter in C : Line gas Temperature in C : Linear expansion coefficient of the meter/ K
:

Equation 1) DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY

CPS Correction for Pressure on Steel (Meter) This can be selected to Use CPS when it is calculated or not to Use CPS when the correction is set to 1. The correction for CPS is Calculated from the following equation:2) Where Cps Dm t Em pl p0

Cps = 1 +
: : : : :

(p l - p 0 ) Dm Em t
Equation 2) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED

Correction for meter expansion due to pressure Meter inner Dia. in mm at p0 & t0 ref. pressure and temp. Wall thickness in mm at p0 & t0 ref. pressure and temp. Modulus of Elasticity of meter material in Bar Line gas pressure in Bar.a Reference pressure in Bar.a DATA ENTRY

The Calculation for Base Density from Line Density requires the Value of CTL and CPL and Alpha and Beta to be Calculated and used in the following Equations:Calculation of CTL based upon Table 54A 3) 4)

CTL1 = e
aT =

[- aT (t l - t b ) (1 + 0.8 aT [t l - tb ])]
2

K0 ( rs )

K1 + K2 rs

Calculation of CTL based upon ASTM D1250; IP200 5) 6) 7)


CTL 2 = 1 + Q 1 ( t l - t b ) + Q 2 ( t l - t b ) 2

P1 Q1 = P2 - -3 r s 10
P3 Q 2 = P4 - -3 rs 10

Calculation of CPL 8)
CPL = 1 [1 - b (p l - p e )]

Calculation of Base Density 9)


rs = ra CTL CPL

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 131 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Where ra rs tl pl aT tb pe K0 K1 K2 b CTL1 CTL2 CPL Q1 Q2 P1 P2 P3 P4 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Line Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Base Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Line Liquid Temperature in C Line Liquid pressure in Bar.a Coefficient of thermal expansion of liquid Alpha in C-1 Base temperature in C Equilibrium pressure in Bar.a (Use Pb) Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 (See Table 1) Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 (See Table 1) Temp. independent API constant ASTM-D-1250 (See Table 1) Compressibility factor in bar -1 Meter Correction Factor Meter Correction Factor Meter Correction Factor Factor equation Factor equation API constant ASTM-D-1250 (See Table 2) API constant ASTM-D-1250 (See Table 2) API constant ASTM-D-1250 (See Table 2) API constant ASTM-D-1250 (See Table 2) K0 186.9696 594.5418 2680.320 346.4228 P1 106 3576.4 3343.1 3012.3 2448.9 2225.1 1936.6 1817.7 1756.4 1806.8 2226.8 1949.2 1734.8 1515.9 1291.7 1108.1 919.1 708.2 984.2 890.0 P2 106 4256.1 3845.6 3280.0 2340.9 1980.0 1529.1 1348.9 1258.7 1330.8 1889.8 1529.1 1258.7 988.4 718.1 502.0 1 285.9 51.8 328.0 242.3 K1 0.4862 0 0 0.4388 P3 106 1.493 1.492 1.492 1.589 1.588 1.588 1.588 1.588 1.588 1.588 1.588 1.588 1.588 1.587 1.587 1.586 1.587 -7.481 -7.830 P4 106 1.786 1.786 1.785 1.947 1.946 1.946 1.945 1.945 1.945 1.946 1.946 1.945 1.945 1.945 1.945 1.944 1.944 -7.129 -7.453 MEASURED Equation 9) MEASURED MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY Equation 10) Equation 3) Equation 5) Equation 8) Equation 6) Equation 7) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY K2 0 0 -0.003363 0

TABLE 1 Density Range 839-1075 Kg/m3 788-839.5 Kg/m3 770.5-787.5 Kg/m3 653-770 Kg/m3 TABLE 2 Interval 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 Range of d60 0.560 0.570 0.570 0.585 0.585 0.600 0.600 0.620 0.620 0.640 0.640 0.660 0.660 0.680 0.680 0.700 0.700 0.750 0.750 0.770 0.770 0.790 0.790 0.810 0.810 0.830 0.830 0.850 0.850 0.875 0.875 0.900 0.900 1.000 1.000 1.100 1.100 1.200

Beta can be derived from four possible sources as selected by the pull down menu Beta Source the options are:Low Range densities of 350-637 Kg/m3 100 10) b= A + (B 100 ( p l - p b ) ) 11)
G = r s 10-3

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 132 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES


d= - 0.03689636 + (1.24446244 G ) - (0.63291568 G 2 ) + (0.73861488 G 3 ) - (0.32478413 G 4 ) 0.999012

12)
d = INT(d 1000 + 0.5) 0.001

13) Tc = 0.96( 621.418 - 822.686d + 1737.86d 2 ) 14) Tr = 491.79 + (1.8 t l ) If Tr is greater than Tc then Calculation for A and B should not be done and an ALARM raised
A = 6.894757 (( -2.1465891E - 6) Tr2 ) + ((1.577439E - 5) Tr2 d 2 ) - ((1.0502139E - 5) Tr2 d 4 )

+ (( 2.8324481E - 7 ) Tr3 d 6 ) - 0.95495939 + (( 7.2900662E - 8) Tr3 d 2 )

15)

- (( 2.7769343E - 7) Tr3 d 4 ) + (0.03645838 Tr d 2 ) - (0.05110158 Tr d ) + (0.00795529 Tr ) + (9.1311491 d ) A = INT ( A 100000.0 + 0.5)


2 2 B = (( -6.0357667E - 10) T 2 r ) + (( 2.2112678E - 6 ) Tr d ) + ( 0 .00088384 d ) - ( 0.00204016 d )

16)
B = INT( B 100000000.0 + 0.5) 0.001

Where b A B pl pb rs d G Tc Tr tl

: : : : : : : : : : :

Compressibility factor in bar-1 Factor A Factor B Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Base pressure in Bar.a Base Density of gas in kg/m3 Relative Density at 15C rs Base Density of gas divided by 1000 Critical Temperature in R Line Temperature in R Line gas Temperature in C

Equation 10) Equation 15) Equation 16) MEASURED DATA ENTRY Equation 9) Equation 12) Equation 11) Equation 13) Equation 14) MEASURED

High range densities of 638-1047 Kg/m3


3 6 - 1.62080 + 0.00021592 t + 0.8709610 + 4.2092 t l 10 l 2 2 rs rs

17) Where rs tl b

b = 10- 4 e

: Base Density of gas in kg/m3 : Line gas Temperature in C : Compressibility factor in bar -1

Equation 9) MEASURED Equation 17)

Table Where the Density can be directly entered into a Table of Density against Temperature of from 3*3 up to 10*10 points. See Liquid Density Set-up Page. Preset Where the Density rhos can be entered as a preset value. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 133 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.26. LIQUID BASE DENSITY TABLE The values for Liquid Base Density look up table can be set up on this page. This input page is used whe n the Model 2000 is intended to be used for the calculation of the flow of Liquids through a Turbine Meter and the Base Density is derived from a Table of entered values. Values of Liquid Base Density at various Temperatures and Line Densities are entered in a look up table. The number of Temperature readings and the number of Density Readings can be selected from the appropriate pull down menu, a Minimum of 3 to a maximum of 10. The size of the look up table will then be adjusted from a minimum of 3 by 3 to a maximum of 10 by 10. Values of Temperature, Line Density and Base Density must then be entered in the table. The Model 2000 will then look up the nearest four Base Density values to its measured Line Density and Temperature and linearly interpolate a value in between to arrive at a value of Base Density at the measured Line Density and Temperature. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 134 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.27. MT PRESSURE The Multiple Pressure Transmitter inputs for the system can be set up on this page. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used pressure value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation), 2 Sensors or 3 Sensors for multiple transmitter operation or No Sensors in which case the value used will be either the Keypad or Serial check value in this case no alarm will be raised. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that each of the connected Pressure Sensors can be scaled using a simple equation as follows:Where

P1 Scale = Offset .1 + ( R .1 P1 Tx )
P1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 P1 Tx Pressure P1Scale is the value passed to the multiple transmitter selection process. Pressure P1 Range Scaling Factor. Pressure P1 Offset Scaling Factor. Pressure P1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of pressure. Deviation Limit sets the allowable difference between all pressure transmitter values, before an accountable pressure deviation alarm is raised. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time before a Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated in seconds, if this parameter is set a Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. The Average Deviation compares the Pressure used value against the Calculated Average value and raises an alarm if the difference is greater than the Average Deviation value. The Keypad Value is the manually entered value of pressure that would be used if all normal values are in Alarm or if selected to be used. Pressure Max and Pressure Min are the range of the pressure transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured pressure should rise above these values then an accountable pressure alarm would be indicated. Pressure High and Pressure Low alarms operate at the high alarm set value PHi and the low alarm set value PLo pressure measurement outside these values will cause a non accountabl e alarm to be indicated. The Selection List offers the selection of the available pressure values that can be used and the order in which those values would be used in the event of alarm or non availability of any parameters. The pull down menus 1st Choice through to 6th Choice determine the order in which parameters are used. For each choice the following parameters are available and can be selected. None, Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Sensor 3, Average of Valid Sensors, Serial Check Value and Keypad Value. The 6th choice is normally fixed as Keypad Value and cannot be altered , this is to ensure that the Model 2000 always has a default value of Pressure to use if all other values are not available. The units that the values should be entered in are shown adjacent to each parameter, where applicable. For Calibration purposes it is possible to force the M2000 to use the Serial Check Value as the in-use value even though the Sensor values may not be in alarm. The Serial Check Value must be entered as the 5th Selection in the list, the Calibrate function is then switched On or Off by writing to the Modbus Input parameter P/T Calibrate. The Max/Min Hysteresis sets the threshold that an Alarm value must move before the Alarm (Max/Min ) condition can be reset. e.g. if the Pmax value is 10bar and the Max/Min Hysteresis value is 1bar. If the measured pressure exceeds the Pmax value a Pmax alarm will be indicated. The measured pressure must then go below 9 bar (Pmax-Max/Min hysteresis) before the Alarm condition is reset. The Hi/Lo Hysteresis sets the threshold that an Alarm value must move before the Alarm (Hi/Lo) condition can be reset. e.g. if the P Hi value is 10bar and the Hi/Lo Hysteresis value is 1bar. If the measured pressure exceeds the P Hi value a P Hi alarm will be indicated. The measured pressure must then go below 9 bar (P Hi-Hi/Lo hysteresis) before the Alarm condition is reset.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 135 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.28. MT TEMPERATURE The Multiple Temperature Transmitter inputs for the system can be set up on this page. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used temperature value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation), 2 Sensors or 3 Sensors for multiple transmitter operation or No Sensors in which case the value used will be either the Keypad or Serial check value in this case no alarm will be raised. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that each of the connected Temperature Sensors can be scaled using a simple equation as follows:Where

T1 Scale = Offset .1 + ( R .1 T1 Tx )
T1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 T1 Tx Temperature T1Scale is the value passed to the multiple transmitter selection process. Temperature T1 Range Scaling Factor. Temperature T1 Offset Scaling Factor. Temperature T1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of temperature. Deviation Limit sets the allowable difference between all temperature transmitter values, before an accountable temperature deviation alarm is raised. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time before a Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated in seconds, if this parameter is set a Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. The Average Deviation compares the Temperature used value against the Calculated Average value and raises an alarm if the difference is greater than the Average Deviation value. The Keypad Value is the manually entered value of temperature that would be used if all normal values are in Alarm or if selected to be used. Temperature Max and Temperature Min are the range of the temperature transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured temperature should rise above these values then an accountable temperature alarm would be indicated. Temperature High and Temperature Low alarms operate at the high alarm set value THi and the low alarm set value TLo temperature measurement outside these values will cause a non accountable alarm to be indicated. The Selection List offers the selection of the available temperature values that can be used and the order in which those values would be used in the event of alarm or non availability of any parameters. The pull down menus 1st Choice through to 6th Choice determine the order in which parameters are used. For each choice the following parameters are available and can be selected. None, Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Sensor 3, Average of Valid Sensors, Serial Check Value and Keypad Value. The 6th choice is normally fixed as Keypad Value and cannot be altered , this is to ensure that the Model 2000 always has a default value of Temperature to use if all other values are not available. The units that the values should be entered in are shown adjacent to each parameter, where applicable. For Calibration purposes it is possible to force the M2000 to use the Serial Check Value as the in-use value even though the Sensor values may not be in alarm. The Serial Check Value must be entered as the 5th Selection in the list, the Calibrate function is then switched On or Off by writing to the Modbus Input parameter P/T Calibrate. The Max/Min Hysteresis sets the threshold that an Alarm value must move before the Alarm (Max/Min ) condition can be reset. e.g. if the Tmax value is 100C and the Max/Min Hysteresis value is 10C. If the measured temperature exceeds the Tmax value a Tmax alarm will be indicated. The measured temperature must then go below 90C (Tmax-Max/Min hysteresis) before the Alarm condition is reset. The Hi/Lo Hysteresis sets the threshold that an Alarm value must move before the Alarm (Hi/Lo) condition can be reset. e.g. if the T Hi value is 100C and the Hi/Lo Hysteresis value is 10C. If the measured temperature exceeds the T Hi value a T Hi alarm will be indicated. The measured temperature must then go below 90C (T Hi-Hi/Lo hysteresis) before the Alarm condition is reset.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 136 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.29. MT Dp High Range The Multiple Differential Pressure (high range) Transmitter inputs for the system can be set up on this page. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used dp high value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation), 2 Sensors or 3 Sensors for multiple transmitter operation or No Sensors in which case the value used will be either the Keypad or Serial check value in this case no alarm will be raised. Deviation Limit sets the allowable difference between all dp high transmitter values, before an accountable dp high deviation alarm is raised. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time before a Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated in seconds, if this parameter is set a Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. The Average Deviation compares the DP used value against the Calculated Average value and raises an alarm if the difference is greater than the Average Deviation value. The Keypad Value is the manually entered value of dp high that would be used if all normal values are in Alarm or if selected to be used. dp High Max determines the range of the dp high transmitter inputs connected t o the Corrector. If the measured dp high should rise above this value then an accountable dp high range alarm would be indicated. dp High Min determines the minimum value of the dp high transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured dp high should go below this value then an accountable dp high range alarm would be indicated. dp High (High) and dp High (Low) alarms operate at the high alarm set value dp High Hi and the low alarm set value dp High Lo, dp measurement outside these values will cause a non accountabl e alarm to be indicated. The Selection List offers the selection of the available dp high values that can be used and the order in which those values would be used in the event of alarm or non availability of any parameters. The pull down menus 1st Choice through to 6th Choice determine the order in which parameters are used. For each choice the following parameters are available and can be selected. None, Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Sensor 3, Average of Valid Sensors, Serial Check Value and Keypad Value. The 6th choice is normally fixed as Keypad Value and cannot be altered , this is to ensure that the Model 2000 always has a default value of dp high to use if all other values are not available. The units that the values should be entered in are shown adjacent to each parameter, where applicable.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 137 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.30. MT Dp Low Range The Multiple Differential Pressure (low range) Transmitter inputs for the system can be set up on this page. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used dp low value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation), 2 Sensors or 3 Sensors for multiple transmitter operation or No Sensors in which case the value used will be either the Keypad or Serial check value in this case no alarm will be raised. Deviation Limit sets the allowable difference between all dp low transmitter values, before an accountable dp low deviation alarm is raised. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time before a Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated in seconds, if this parameter is set a Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. The Average Deviation compares the DP used value against the Calculated Average value and raises an alarm if the difference is greater than the Average Deviation value. The Keypad Value is the manually entered value of dp low that would be used if all normal values are in Alarm or if selected to be used. dp Low Max determines the range of the dp low transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured dp low should rise above these values then an accountable dp low range alarm would be indicated. dp Low Min determines the minimum value of the dp low transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured dp low should go below these values then an accountable dp low range alarm would be indicated. dp Low (High) and dp Low (Low) alarms operate at the high alarm set value dp Low Hi and the low alarm set value dp Low Lo, dp measurement outside these values will cause a non accountabl e alarm to be indicated. The Selection List offers the selection of the available dp low values that can be used and the order in which those values would be used in the event of alarm or non availability of any parameters. The pull down menus 1st Choice through to 6th Choice determine the order in which parameters are used. For each choice the following parameters are available and can be selected. None, Sensor 1, Sensor 2, Sensor 3, Average of Valid Sensors, Serial Check Value and Keypad Value. The units that the values should be entered in are shown adjacent to each parameter, where applicable. If The system is set up such that a there are High Range Dp cells and Low Range Dp cells. The point at which the change over occurs is set from Hi to low and from Low to High in two data entry boxes, in both cases the value is entered as a percentage of the Dp Low Range Maximum value.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 138 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.31. ISO 6976 DATA The Data to calculate values to the International Standard ISO 6976 are input on this page. This page will only appear if in the Ultrasonic set-up the ISO 6976 or ISO 6976 (No Z/Zb) options are selected or in the Orifice set-up the ISO5167/6976 equation option is selected. If this option is selected then the following parameters will be calculated in accordance with the ISO 6976 standard Relative density (d) of the gas Wobbe index of the gas Base compressibility (Zb) of the gas (Only in the ISO 6976 option) Molecular weight (Mr) of the gas Superior heating value (Hs) of the gas in MJ/m3 (Volume) Inferior heating value (Hi) of the gas in MJ/m3 (Volume) Wobbe index of the gas (Volume) or Superior heating value (Hs) of the gas in MJ/Kg (Mass) Inferior heating value (Hi) of the gas in MJ/Kg (Mass) Wobbe index of the gas (Mass) The Calculation Base pull down menu determines if the Heating Values are calculated on a Volume basis or a Mass basis. These values are calculated in accordance with the standard using the Molar percent for each gas component as received from serial communication, the superior heating value Hs (in KJ/mol) as entered on this page for each component, the inferior heating value Hi (in KJ/mol) as entered on this page for each component and the b Sqrt Beta value for each component as entered on this page. Additionally a value of Z Air at the used base conditions must be entered. The values entered must apply to the base temperature and combustion temperatures being used. Values for the Calorific values of components at combustion reference temperatures from tables in ISO 6976 :1995 can be preset into the table by use of the Hs & Hi Preset buttons for 0 C, 15 C, 20 C & 25 C. Similarly values for the compression factor values of components at combustion reference temperatures from tables in ISO 6976 :1995 can be preset into the table by use of the b Sqrt Beta Preset buttons for 0 C, 15 C & 20 C. Other values such as the Universal gas constant and the Molecular weight of each component are preset in the Model 2000 and do not need to be entered.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 139 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.32. C.A.T.S. DATA The Data to calculate values to the C.A.T.S. Standard are input on this page. This page will only appear if in the Ultrasonic set-up the C.A.T.S option is selected. If this option is selected then the following parameters will be calculated in accordance with the ISO 6976 standard Relative density (d) of the gas (not used.) Base compressibility (Zb) of the gas Molecular weight (Mr) of the gas Molar fraction of each gas component. The Mass fraction values for each component must be entered on this page these are the preset or default values, any values of Mass fraction received via the serial communication link will be used once t hey are received. The superior heating value Hs (in KJ/mol) as entered on this page for each component, the inferior heating value Hi (in KJ/mol) as entered on this page for each component and the b Sqrt Beta value for each component as entered on this page These values are normally in accordance with Tables 2 and 4 from the ISO 6976 standard. The values entered must apply to the base temperature and combustion temperatures being used. Other values such as the Universal gas constant and the Molecular weight of each component are preset in the Model 2000 and do not need to be entered. NOTE that values entered on the compressibility page for Molar percent of each gas component have no function when the C.A.T.S. option is selected, the values used in the compressibility calculation are derived from the received Mass fraction values.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 140 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.33. SCALING FACTORS The Scaling Factors for all display totals to be used are input on this page. All totals displayed on the M2000 will require a scaling or multiplying factor, these factors are divided into 4 types. twfb twfn twfe twfm for uncorrected volume flows for corrected volume flows for Energy flows for mass flows

The values used will generally be multiples of 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000. The value entered represents the value of one digit of the total displayed. i.e. if 100 is entered for twfn then the display will increment in units of 100 m3

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 141 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.34. UNITS & FORMATTING The Units page selects units for Pressure, Temperature, Density and Dp used in the system. Under the Units tab. The units of pressure to be used can be selected on this page, the Pressure Units pull down menu offers the choice between bar, kPa, MPa, kg/cm2 and psi. The Abs/Gau pull down menu offers the use of absolute or gauge pressure measurement, if gauge is selected then a value for mean atmospheric pressure p.atmos will need to be entered, in the units selected. The units of temperature to be used can be selected on this page, the Temperature Units pull down menu offers the choice between C, K or F. The units of density to be used can be selected on this page, the Density Units pull down menu offers the choice between kg/m3 or lbs/ft3. The units of Differential pressure to be used can be selected on this page, the DP Units pull down menu offers the choice between barg, m bar, psig, mm w.g (water gauge) and inches w.g.(water gauge). Under the Formatting tab. The number of decimal places used to display the parameters Pressure, Temperature, Dp High range and Dp Low range can also be set on this page, for each item the choice is 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places. The number of significant figures used for values of relative density can be selected using the pull down menu rd sig fig this is selectable from 2 to 8. The number of significant figures used for values of heating value and wobbe can be selected using the pull down menu Hs sig fig this is selectable from 2 to 8. The number of significant figures used for values of gas data can be selected using the pull down menu gasdata sig fig this is selectable from 2 to 8.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 142 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.35. DENSITY SET-UP The Multiple Density Transmitter inputs for the system can be set up on this page. Number of Sensors selects from a pull down menu the number of sensors or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used Line Density value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation) or 2 Sensors for multiple transmitter operation. Deviation Limit sets the allowable difference between the Line Density transmitter values, before an accountable deviation alarm is raised. The Keypad Value is the manually entered value of Line Density that would be used if all normal values are in Alarm or if selected to be used. The Selection List offers the selection of the available Line Density values that can be used and the order in which those values would be used in the event of alarm or non availability of any parameters. The pull down menus 1st Choice through to 6th Choice determine the order in which parameters are used. For each choice the following parameters are available and can be selected. None, Sensor 1, Sensor 2, AGA 8 Calculation and Keypad Value. The 6th choice is normally fixed as Keypad Value and cannot be altered, this is to ensure that the Model 2000 always has a default value of Line Density to use if all other values are not available. The units that the values should be entered in are shown adjacent to each parameter, where applicable. AGA 8 Calculation means that the value for Line Density is calculated in accordance with the AGA 8 Standard ,using input values for Pressure, Temperature and gas component values. For both Sensor 1 and Sensor 2 various selections need to be set: Density High and Density Low alarms operate at the high alarm set value Density Hi and the low alarm set value Density Lo density measurement outside these values will cause a non accoun table alarm to be indicated. Values of Dens. High Alarm and Dens.Low Alarm can be entered on this page these are the values where a non accountable High or Low Alarm would be indicated. A value for Dens. Keypad can also be entered this value would be used in the case of an accountable density alarm, such an alarm would be indicated if the input frequency fell below 500Hz or rose above 5000Hz. Freq. Offset allows a small Frequency offset in Hz to be entered which is added to the measured Frequency from the Density Transmitter, this allows for small adjustments of calibration as may be needed, or if no input is connected allows for an input to be simulated. Equation determine which type of Density Sensor is to be used either Solartron or Sarasota. See the Density Input Pages for details. The Hi/Lo Hysteresis sets the threshold that an Alarm value must move before the Alarm (Hi/Lo) condition can be reset. e.g. if the Density Hi value is 100kg/m3 and the Hi/Lo Hysteresis value is 10kg/m3. If the measured density exceeds the Density Hi value a Density Hi alarm will be indicated. The measured density must then go below 90kg/m3 (Density Hi-Hi/Lo hysteresis) before the Alarm condition is reset. The Temperature value used to compensate the Density cells against changes in ambient temperature is selected from a pull down menu Source this can be either Keypad , Upstream Line value, Downstream Line Value or from the Density Sensor temperature sensor. Values for the Keypad value and Max and Min scaling for the Density sensor can also be entered in this section. NOTE If the Internal Density Sensor is selected then the Analogue Input for that Sensor needs to be configured on the Analogue Inputs set up page. The Variable Dens.1 tsensor.1 needs to be set up as an Analogue or PRT input (Analogue Input page for details).

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 143 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.36. COMPRESSIBILITY EQUATION (Z FACTOR) The Gas Compressibility Equation to be used and associated gas data are input on this page. To select the method used to calculate the gas compressibility use the Equation pull down menu. The menu lists the gas parameters used to calculate the compressibility in accordance with various standards. The standards supported are :AGA8 American Gas Association Standard full analysis ISO 12213 -2 ISO 12213-3 :SGERG(rd, Hs, CO2) Using Superior Heating Value, CO2 and relative density. SGERG(rd, Hs, N2) Using Superior Heating Value, N2 and relative density. SGERG(rd, Hs, CO2, H2) Using Superior Heating Value, CO2, H2 and relative density. SGERG(rd, Hs, N2, H2) Using Superior Heating Value, N2, H2 and relative density. SGERG(rd,CO2, N2) Using CO2, N2 and relative density. NX19 AGA 3 NX19 Using N2, CO2 and relative density. NX19 GOST AGA 3 NX19 (Modified to GOST Standard) Using N2, CO2 and relative density. FIXED Z Factor Z and Zn Preset are entered. TABLE Z FACTOR Depending upon the equation selected from the above lists the page will prompt for the gas parameters which can be used for calculation. When any of the ISO 12213 SGERG Equations, that use Heating Value are selected it is possible to adjust the Calorific conversion temperature and base temperatures to suit the country standard that is going to be used. The available options are selected from a pull down menu which is only available when SGERG is selected. Hs combustion 25C & Hs base 0C Hs combustion 0C & Hs base 0 C Hs combustion 15C & Hs base 15C Hs combustion 25C & Hs base 20C Hs combustion 25C & Hs base 15C Keypad, preset or initialise values for all required gas components can be entered, together with the gas chromatograph stream Chromat Stream No. to be used on this flow computer stream if a chromatograph is being used. If no gas chromatograph is to be used in this set-up then the Chromat stream No should be set to None. For Gas Values (normal) operation the Gas data used can be selected from :Use Chromat Use gas data read serially from a gas chromatograph. Use Modbus Use gas data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Use gas data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. For Gas Values (alarm) operation i.e. in the event of a gas chromatograph failure or communication failure that causes an Accountable Alarm the Gas data used can be selected from :Use Keypad As entered on this page. Use Last Good Value as received as an input. Use Chromat Use gas data read serially from a gas chromatograph. Use Modbus Use gas data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Use gas data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 144 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES If a Relative Density transducer is enabled (See Relative Density Meter Page) then the M2000 will assume that the value received from the Relative density transducer is to be used and under these circumstances any value received from the gas Chromatograph, serially or from an analogue transducer will be ignored. For Gas Averages the value used to calculate the Hourly or Daily Averages is selected from the following options:Use Chromat Received Use Modbus Received Use Analogue Received Use gas data read serially from a gas chromatograph. Use gas data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use gas data from a 4-20mA transducer input.

Accountable alarms settings for the value of Zn can be entered at the locations Zn.hi 1 and Zn lo.1. If Compressibility is selected as FIXED then values for Z preset and Zn preset can be entered. If Compressibility is selected as TABLE Z FACTOR then the values for Z are entered in a table on a separate page (See Table Z Factor 1) and the value used for Zn is entered as Zn preset . The Normalisation pull down menu selects the method of Normalisation used for all the gas componen t values. None assumes that the values received will all total 100% or are not required to total 100% and no normalisation will occur. 100% means that all values will be normalised to 100% irrespective of the value that they actually total to. 100%-non measureds , means that the gas components will be normalised to all received values not including any non measured components Which are H2, H2O, H2S, CO, O2, He and Ar. For some installations it may be required to input the value of Normal density rn rather than relative density. For those applications where the input is rn the tick box Use Rn should be enabled. This assumes that the input value will be normal density in kg/m3 and this will then be converted to relative density using the formula as follows: 1) Where rn db rairb

rn = d b rairb
: Normal density of Gas in kg/m3 : Relative density of gas at base conditions : Density of air at base conditions in kg/m3 INPUT VALUE CALCULATED DATA ENTRY

TABLE Z FACTOR If this is selected, a value for r1 (with the option of rair) is calculated when the rho air sel menu is set to "Use m air" as follows: Equation for calculation of density of gas at line conditions: 43) Where: r1 rairb db t1 tb p1 pb Z Zb

r1 = rairb d b

pl tb + 273.15 Z b pb t1 + 273.15 Z
Equation 43) DATA ENTRY INPUT DATA DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

: : : : : : : : :

Upstream density of gas at line conditions in kg/m 3 Density of air at base conditions in kg/m 3 Relative density of gas at base conditions Upstream line gas temperature in C Base temperature in C Upstream line gas pressure in bar.a Base pressure in bar.a Gas Compressability Base Compressability

Equation for Density of air at base conditions Preset Values: Pressure (bar.a) Temp (C) Density (kg/m3) 1.01325 0 1.292923 1.01325 15 1.225410 1.01325 20 1.204449 Calculated density of air at 1.01325 bar.a and tb

Z 0.99941 0.99958 0.99963

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 145 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 44)
2 rairb = 1.292923 - 4.73236666 10 -6 tb + 1.543333 10 -5 tb

Calculated at all values of pb and t b 45) Where: rairb tb R pb Mair Zair

rairb =

M air pb 0.1 Z air R (tb + 273.15)


Equation 44) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY INPUT DATA

: : : : : :

Density of air at base conditions in kg/m 3 Base temperature in C Gas Constant 0.008314510 Mpa m 3/kmol.K Base pressure in Bar.a Molar mass of air 28.9626 kg/kmol Base compr essability of air at pb and tb

Calculate VOS using AGA10: Selecting this requires an AGA8 calculation, so a full gas composition is needed.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 146 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.37. TABLE Z FACTOR

The values for Z Factor look up table can be set up on this page. This input page is used when the Model 2000 is intended to be used where the line compressibility Z Factor is derived from a Table of entered values. Values of Line Compressibility Z Factor at various Temperatures and Pressures are entered in a look up table. The number of Temperature readings and the number of Pressure Readings can be selected from the appropriate pull down menu, a Minimum of 3 to a maximum of 10. The size of the look up table will then be adjusted from a minimum of 3 by 3 to a maximum of 10 by 10. Values of Temperature, Pressure and Line Compressibility must then be entered in the table. The Model 2000 will then look up the nearest four Line Compressibility values to its measured Temperature and Pressure and linearly interpolate a value in between to arrive at a value of Line Compressibility at the measured Temperature and Pressure. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 147 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.38. COMPRESSIBILITY EQUATION ORIFICE DENSITY VERSION The Gas Compressibility Equation to be used and associated gas data are input on this page. In this version of the M2000 flow computer the compressibility calculation is used as a backup measurement should the transducer value of Line Density fail a fixed method of calculation is used. The Equation pull down menu is now fixed in posi tion and cannot be altered from the selection American Gas Association Standard AGA8 full analysis Keypad, preset or initialise values for all required gas components can be entered, together with the gas chromatograph stream Chromat Stream No. to be used on this flow computer stream if a chromatograph is being used. If no gas chromatograph is to be used in this set-up then the Chromat stream No should be set to None. For Gas Values (normal) operation the Gas data used can be selected from :Use Chromat Use gas data read serially from a gas chromatograph. Use Modbus Use gas data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Use gas data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. For Gas Values (alarm) operation i.e. in the event of a gas chromatograph failure or communication failure that causes an Accountable Alarm the Gas data used can be selected from :Use Keypad As entered on this page. Use Last Good Value as received as an input. Use Chromat Use gas data read serially from a gas chromatograph. Use Modbus Use gas data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Use gas data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. For Gas Averages the value used to calculate the Hourly or Daily Averages is selected from the following options:Use Chromat Received Use gas data read serially from a gas chromatograph. Use Modbus Received Use gas data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Received Use gas data from a 4-20mA transducer input. A value of Relative density Deviation can be entered which determines the allowable limits between the connected Relative Density transducer and the calculation to based upon the ISO 6976 equations. If a Relative Density transducer is enabled (See Relative Density Meter Page) then the M2000 will assume that the value received from the Relative density transducer is to be used and under these circumstances any value received from the gas Chromatograph, serially or from an analogue transducer will be ignored unless the Relative density Meter is in an Accountable Alarm condition in which case the select box Back up rd source is used. This can be selected from :ISO 6976 The Value is calculated from the ISO 6976 Standard Gas Data Selection The value is sourced from the selection for Gas Values (normal) as defined above. Similarly the Value Used for Heating Value Hs and Hi can be selected using the select box Heating Value Source from either:ISO 6976 The Value is calculated from the ISO 6976 Standard Gas Data Selection The value is sourced from the selection for Gas Values (normal) as defined above.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 148 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES The Normalisation pull down menu selects the method of Normalisation used f or all the gas componen t values. None assumes that the values received will all total 100% or are not required to total 100% and no normalisation will occur. 100% means that all values will be normalised to 100% irrespective of the value that they actually total to. 100%-non measureds , means that the gas components will be normalised to all received values not including any non measured components Which are H2, H2O, H2S, CO, O2, He and Ar. For some installations it may be required to input the value of Normal density rn rather than relative density. For those applications where the input is rn the tick box Use Rn should be enabled. This assumes that the input value will be normal density in kg/m3 and this will then be converted to relative density using the formula as follows: 1) Where rn db rairb

rn = d b rairb
: Normal density of Gas in kg/m3 : Relative density of gas at base conditions : Density of air at base conditions in kg/m3 INPUT VALUE CALCULATED DATA ENTRY

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 149 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.39. SOLARTRON MODEL 7835 LIQUID DENSITY METER The Density page sets the parameters associated with a measured Density input from a Solartron 7835 frequency output type device. The value Line density is calculated from the measured frequency(Period) of oscillation of the density transducer using the following equation. Measured Line Density 25) Where r K0 K1 K2 T

r = K 0 + ( K 1 10 -3 T ) + ( K 2 10 -3 T 2 )
: : : : : Line Density of liquid in kg/m3 Constant from 7835 data sheet Constant from 7835 data sheet Constant from 7835 data sheet Density Transducer period in m Seconds Equation 25) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED

The value of line density is corrected for effects of ambient temperature by the following equation. Density corrected for Temperature 26) Where rt K18 K19 tr to

r t = r 1 + K 18 10 -4 t r - t 0 + K 19 10 -4 (t r - t 0 )
: : : : : Line Density of liquid corrected for temperature in kg/m3 Constant from 7835 data sheet Constant from 7835 data sheet Temperature of liquid at density measurement point in C Reference temperature in C Equation 26) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY

)]

The value of line density corrected for both Temperature and Pressure is calculated from the following equations. Density corrected for Temperature and Pressure 27) 28) 29) Where rtp K20 K21 K20A K20B K21A K21B pr po

r tp = r t 1 + K 20 p r - p 0 + K 21 (p r - p 0 )

)]

K 20 = K 20 A + K 20 B (p r - p 0 )
K 21 = K 21 A + K 21B (p r - p 0 )
: : : : : : : : : Line Density of liquid corrected for temperature and pressure in kg/m3 Constant from 7835 data sheet Constant from 7835 data sheet Constant from 7835 data sheet Constant from 7835 data sheet Constant from 7835 data sheet Constant from 7835 data sheet Pressure of liquid at density measurement point in bara Reference pressure in bara a Equation 27) Equation 28) Equation 29) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY

All Kxxx constants listed above as DATA ENTRY items are items usually supplied as values listed on the calibration certificate for the density transducer to be used, these values will change either with the type of sensor used or with each transducer.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 150 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.40. SARASOTA DENSITY METER The Sarasota Density page sets the parameters associated with a measured Density input from a Sarasota frequency output type device. The value Line density is calculated from the measured frequency (Period) of oscillation of the density transducer using the following equation. Measured Line Density

1)

ra = d '0

( t - t '0 ) ( t - t '0 ) 2 + K t' t '0 0


Equation 1) Equation 3) MEASURED Equation 2) DATA ENTRY

Where rm d0 t t 0 K

: : : : :

Line Density of gas in kg/m3 VOS corrected cal constant of spool in Kg/m3 Period of Densitometer in mS Corrected Calibration constant of Spool in mS Calibration constant of Spool in Kg/m3/ C

The value of line density is corrected for effects of temperature and pressure by the following equation. Density corrected for Temperature and Pressure 2) Where T0 Tempco Presco t1 pl Tcal Pcal

t '0 = T0 + Tempco ( t 1 - Tcal ) + Pr esco (p 1 - Pcal )


: : : : : : : Calibration constant of Spool mS Temperature coefficient of spool in mS/C Pressure coefficient of spool in mS/BAR Line gas Temperature in C Line gas pressure in Bar.a Calibration Temperature of Densitometer 15C Calibration Pressure of Densitometer 1.01325 Bara DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

VOS Correction Calculation


2 VIBDEM R d '0 = D 0 1 - at

3)

4)

If pl = 0 or d0 < 0.8 D0 then d0 = D0 Where ra d0 a D0 t T0 VIBDEM k pl L R : : : : : : : : : : : Line Density of Gas in kg/m3 VOS corrected cal constant of spool in Kg/m3 Calculation intermediate Calibration constant of spool in Kg/m3 Period of Densitometer in mS Calibration constant of Spool mS Characteristics of vibrating element in mm Isentropic exponent of Gas Line Gas pressure in Bar.a Speed of Sound factor 100000pa/Bar VOS correction to density 1000 Equation 1) Equation 3) Equation 4) DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

k pl L a= ra

1/ 2

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 151 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.41. DENSITY METER (ORIFICE) SOLARTRON The Density page sets the parameters associated with a measured Density input from a Solartron frequency output type device. The value Line density is calculated from the measured frequency(Period) of oscillation of the density transducer using the following equation. Measured Line Density 1) r = K 0 + ( K 1 10 T ) + (K 2 10 Where r : Line Density of gas in kg/m3 K0 : Constant K1 : Constant K2 : Constant T : Density Transducer period in m Seconds
-3 -3

T2 )
Equation 1) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED

The value of line density can be selected to be corrected for effects of ambient temperature by selecting the item Density corrected for temperature and choosing either None or Calculated, if none is selected then no correction is applied if calculated is selected then the following equation is used. Density corrected for Temperature 2) rt Where rt K18 K19 t1 to

= r 1 + K 18 10 -4 (t 1 - t 0 ) + K 19 10-4 (t 1 - t 0 )
: : : : : Line Density of gas corrected for temperature in kg/m3 Constant Constant Line gas Temperature in C Reference temperature in C Equation 2) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY

The value of line density can be selected to be corrected for effects of Velocity of Sound by alternative methods. By selecting the item Density corrected for Vos and temperature and choosing either None or VOS Calculate or User Gas Data, if None is selected then no correction is applied if VOS Calculate is selected then equations 3) , 4) and 5) are used and if User Gas Data is selected then equations 6) and 7) are used. Density corrected for Velocity of Sound and Temperature VOS Calculate

3)

K VOS 10 4 1 + TC c ra = rt K VOS 10 4 1 + TC g

2 2

Where ra Kvos Cc Cg

: : : :

Line Density of gas corrected for VOS and temp. in kg/m3 Constant Velocity of Sound in Calibration gas Velocity of Sound in Flowing gas

Equation 3) DATA ENTRY (See Equation 5) (See Equation 4)

The value of Velocity of sound for flowing gas used in the above equation can be selected to be preset or calculated by selecting the item Vos in flowing gas if preset is selected then a fixed value is entered, if calculated is selected then the following equation is used. Velocity of Sound in Flowing gas 4) Where Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 152 of 265

Cg =

g 0 P 105 + ( K 5 10- 6 rt2 ) + ( K 6 10- 6 rt3 ) rt

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Cg pl K5 K6 : : : : : Velocity of Sound in Flowing gas Low Pressure Ratio of Specific Heats Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Constant Constant Equation 4) DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

g0

The value of Velocity of sound for calibration gas used in the above equation can be selected to be preset or calculated by selecting the item Vos in calibration gas if preset is selected then a fixed value is entered, if calculated is selected then the following equation is used. Velocity of Sound in Calibration Gas 5) Cc Where Cc K1Cc K2Cc K3Cc K4Cc
-6 = K 1Cc + ( K 2 Cc r t ) + ( K 3 Cc 10 -3 r 2 r t3 ) t ) + ( K 4Cc 10

: Velocity of Sound in Calibration gas : Constant : Constant : Constant : Constant

Equation 5) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

User Gas Data 6)

K3 r a = r t 1 + r + K 4 t

G A - t + 273 .15 2

7) Where ra G K3 K4 g0 A t2 db

G=
: : : : : : : :

db g0
Line Density of gas corrected for VOS and temp. in kg/m3 Intermediate Equation Constant Constant Low Pressure Ratio of Specific Heats Calibration Gas Constant (default 0.00281) Downstream Line gas T emperature in C Relative density of gas at base conditions Equation 6) Equation 7) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED MEASURED

All Kxxx constants listed above as DATA ENTRY items are items usually supplied as values listed on the calibration certificate for the density transducer to be used, these values will change either with the type of sensor used or with each transducer. If required when used with an orifice plate installation only, the density can be measured downstream and corrected to an upstream measurement this is done by selecting the menu item Correct to Upstream density Yes or No. If Yes is selected the correction is carried out in accordance with equation 8. If No then it is assumed that the measurement is carried out upstream and no correction is applied. Density measured Downstream and corrected to upstream 8) Where p1 k r1 r2 h : : : : :
(1 / k )

p r1 = r 2 1 p1 - h

Upstream Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Isentropic exponent of the gas Density of gas upstream at line conditions in kg/m3 Density of gas downstream at line conditions in kg/m3 Differential Pressure in bar

MEASURED DATA ENTRY Equation 8) MEASURED MEASURED

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 153 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.42. SOLARTRON DENSITY METER The Density page sets the parameters associated with a measured Density input from a Solartron frequency output type device. The value Line density is calculated from the measured frequency(Period) of oscillation of the density transducer using the following equation. Measured Line Density 1) Where r K0 K1 K2 T

r = K 0 + ( K 1 10-3 T ) + ( K 2 10-3 T 2 )
: : : : : Line Density of gas in kg/m3 Constant Constant Constant Density Transducer period in m Seconds Equation 1) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED

The value of line density can be selected to be corrected for effects of ambient temperature by selecting the item Density corrected for temperature and choosing either None or Calculated, if none is selected then no correction is applied if Calculated is selected then the following equation is used. Density corrected for Temperature 2) Where rt K18 K19 t1 to

rt = r 1 + K 18 10-4 (t 1 - t 0 ) + K 19 10 -4 ( t 1 - t 0 )
: : : : : Line Density of gas corrected for temperature in kg/m3 Constant Constant Line gas Temperature in C Reference temperature in C Equation 2) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY

The value of line density can be selected to be corrected for effects of Velocity of Sound by alternative methods. By selecting the item Density corrected for Vos and temperature and choosing either None or VOS Calculate or User Gas Data, if None is selected then no correction is applied if VOS Calculate is selected then equations 3) , 4) and 5) are used and if User Gas Data is selected then equations 6) and 7) are used. Density corrected for Velocity of Sound and Temperature VOS Calculate

3)

K VOS 10 4 1 + TC c ra = rt K VOS 10 4 1 + TC g

2 2

Where ra Kvos Cc Cg

: : : :

Line Density of gas corrected for VOS and temp. in kg/m3 Constant Velocity of Sound in Calibration gas Velocity of Sound in Flowing gas

Equation 3) DATA ENTRY (See Equation 5) (See Equation 4)

The value of Velocity of sound for flowing gas used in the above equation can be selected to be preset or calculated by selecting the item Vos in flowing gas if preset is selected then a fixed value is entered, if calculated is selected then the following equation is used. Velocity of Sound in Flowing gas 4)

Cg =

g 0 P 105 + ( K 5 10- 6 rt2 ) + ( K 6 10- 6 rt3 ) rt

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 154 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Where Cg pl K5 K6 : : : : : Velocity of Sound in Flowing gas Low Pressure Ratio of Specific Heats Line gas Pressure in Bar.a Constant Constant Equation 4) DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

g0

The value of Velocity of sound for calibration gas used in the above equation can be selected to be preset or calculated by selecting the item Vos in calibration gas if preset is selected then a fixed value is entered, if calculated is selected then the following equation is used. Velocity of Sound in Calibration Gas 5) Where Cc K1Cc K2Cc K3Cc K4Cc
-6 C c = K 1Cc + ( K 2 Cc r t ) + ( K 3 Cc 10 -3 r 2 r t3 ) t ) + ( K 4Cc 10

: Velocity of Sound in Calibration gas : Constant : Constant : Constant : Constant

Equation 5) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

User Gas Data 6)

K3 r a = r t 1 + r + K 4 t

G t + 273 .15 A - 2

7) Where ra G K3 K4 g0 A t2 db

G=
: : : : : : : :

db g0
Line Density of gas corrected for VOS and temp. in kg/m3 Intermediate Equation Constant Constant Low Pressure Ratio of Specific Heats Calibration Gas Constant (default 0.00281) Downstream Line gas T emperature in C Relative density of gas at base conditions Equation 6) Equation 7) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED MEASURED

All Kxxx constants listed above as DATA ENTRY items are items usually supplied as values listed on the calibration certificate for the density transducer to be used, these values will change either with the type of sensor used or with each transducer. As an option the value of specific heat used in Equations 4) and 6) can be calculated using the following Equation. Equation for Specific Heat 7) g 0 = K v + K 18 r l + K 19 r l + K 20 p 1 100 Where g0 : Low Pressure Ratio of Specific Heats DATA ENTRY K : Reference Specific Heats ratio DATA ENTRY K18 : Correlation constants DATA ENTRY K19 : Correlation constants DATA ENTRY K20 : Correlation constants DATA ENTRY rl : Line Density in kg/m3 MEASURED

) (

) (

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 155 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.43. GAS DATA ALARMS The Gas Data Alarms to be used are input on this page. It is possible that gas component data can be set in the Model 2000 in three different ways as follows; As serial data written into the M2000 via a Modbus communication port. As serial data received from a gas chromatograph. As an Analogue 4-20mA current input. For each gas component value it is possible to set High, Low and Max and Min alarm levels. The Max and Min levels will generate an Accountable alarm when exceeded and the Hi and Lo will generate a Non accountable alarm. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 156 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.44. GAS DATA ALARMS (DENSITY VERSION) The Gas Data Alarms to be used are input on this page. It is possible that gas data can be set in the Model 2000 in a number of different ways as follows; For Gas Values (normal) operation the Gas data used can be selected from :Use Chromat Use gas data read serially from a gas chromatograph. Use Modbus Use gas data serially written in via a Modbus po rt. Use Analogue Use gas data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. For Gas Values (alarm) operation i.e. in the event of a gas chromatograph failure or communication failure that causes an Accountable Alarm the Gas data used can be selected from :Use Keypad As entered on this page. Use Last Good Value As received as an input. Use Chromat Use gas data read serially from a gas chromatograph. Use Modbus Use gas data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Use gas data from a 4-20mA transducer input. Use Hourly Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. Use Daily Average If available calculated from Gas Averages menu. For Gas Averages the value used to calculate the Hourly or Daily Averages is selected from the following options:Use Chromat Received Use gas data read serially from a gas chromatograph. Use Modbus Received Use gas data serially written in via a Modbus port. Use Analogue Received Use gas data from a 4-20mA transducer input. If a Relative Density transducer is enabled (See Relative Density Meter Page) then the M2000 will assume that the value received from the Relative density transducer is to be used and under these circumstances any value received from the gas Chromatograph, serially or from an analogue transducer will be ignored. For each gas data value it is possible to set Preset, High, Low and Max and Min alarm levels. The Max and Min levels will generate an Accountable alarm when exceeded and the Hi and Lo will generate a Non accountable alarm. Keypad, preset or initialise values for all required gas data values can be entered, together with the gas chromatograph stream Chromat Stream No. to be used on this flow computer stream if a chromatograph is being used. If no gas chromatograph is to be used in this set-up then the Chromat stream No should be set to None. If any parameter is shown surrounded by a heavy raised border, this indicates that it is a component value that can be made invalid and does not therefore have to be entered. A component can be made invalid by highlighting or pointing to the component, right click on the mouse butt on, selecting the small box that appears "Invalidate". The invalidated component will then contain a hatched background. This component now has no assigned value, if read via Modbus an invalid number will return a value of 1E+38.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 157 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.45. RELATIVE DENSITY METER The Relative Density Meter Density page sets the parameters associated with the measurement of Relative Density using a Solartron frequency output type device. The value of relative density used in the calculations of the Model 2000 flow computer can as an alternative be calculated from the measured frequency(Period) of oscillation of a relative density transducer. This function can be enabled by selecting the tick box use relative density meter when enabled the value of relative density will be derived from the following equation, when not selected the value of relative density will be either be preset or written serially into the Model 2000. If the K Values K0 and K2 are to be Preset then equation 1) is used. 1) Where db K0 K2 T

d b = K 0 + ( K 2 10 -6 T 2 )
: : : : Relative density of gas at base conditions Constant Constant Relative Density Transducer period in m Seconds Equation 1) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED

If the K Values K0 and K2 are to be Calculated from Calibration gas dat a then equations 2), 3) and 4) are used. 2)

d b = K 0 + (K 2 T 2 )

3)

K2 =

Gx - Gy Tx2 - Ty2

4) Where db K0 K2 T Gx Gy Tx Ty

K 0 = G y - ( K 2 Ty2 )
: : : : : : : : Relative density of gas at base conditions Transducer Constant Transducer Constant Relative Density Transducer period in m Seconds Relative density of Calibration Gas x Relative density of Calibration Gas y Periodic Time of Calibration Gas x in m Seconds Periodic Time of Calibration Gas y in m Seconds Equation 2) (See Equation 4) (See Equation 3) MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

All Kxxx constants listed above as DATA ENTRY items are items usually supplied as values listed on the calibration certificate for the relative density transducer to be used, these values will change either with the type of sensor used or with each transducer.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 158 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.46. PRESET COUNTERS The Main Totals of the unit can be Preset to any value by using this page. The total registers for : Line volume Line volume corrected for linearity Corrected volume Energy Mass Mass corrected for linearity Line volume f rom Monitor input Line volume (un-haltable) +Vb +Vbc +Vn +Ve +Vm +Vmc +Vbm +Vbu

In normal conditions, in Alarm conditions and in both positive and negative directions can have their initial value preset. This enables the line volume counter to be set to the same reading as any mechanical counter that may be used with the Converter. Enter the value for each totals starting value in the box, and enable the Update Unit tick box for each Value to be sent.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 159 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.47. BASE CONDITIONS The Base Conditions to be used are input on this page. The Corrector calculates the corrected volume using the base pressure and base temperature entered for pn and tn. Values for base density of air dens air and temperature alarm te alm are also entered on this page. The function of te alm is that an alarm will be indicated if the gas temperature is below the te alm.1 level and the uncorrected flow has been above the Lo q setting for more than the programmable interval time te alarm delay in seconds. Value of acceleration due to Gravity 9.80665 m/s is entered on this page. Adjacent to the dens air input is a Calc button which will calculate a value for the Base density of air using the following Equation and using the current values of Pb, Tb and Zair as input to the calculation. Calculated at all values of pb and t b 1) Where rairb tb R pb Mair Zair

rairb =

M air pb 0.1 Z air R ( tb + 273.15)


Equation 1) DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY

: : : : : :

Density of air at base conditions in kg/m3 Base Temperature in C Gas Constant 0.008314510 Mpa m3/kmol.K Base Pressure in Bar.a Molar Mass of air 28.9626 kg/kmol Base compr essibility of air at pb and tb

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 160 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.48. MODE SWITCHES The M 2000 has a number of Mode functions which are set on this page as follows:For all of the following the items the described function is enabled if the tick box is ticked. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) Increment Vb Error/Alarm counters when in Accountable Alarm condition. On the M2000 display this function is called Alm Vb.en.1. Increment Vb Normal counters when in Accountable Alarm condition. On the M2000 display this function is called Vb.en.1. Increment Vn Error/Alarm counters when in Accountable Alarm condition. On the M2000 display this function is called Alm Vn.en.1. Increment Vn Normal counters when in Accountable Alarm condition. On the M2000 display this function is called Vn.en.1. Inhibit Totals when in a Low flow condition. On the M2000 display this function is called Tot Loq.1. Set flow rates to zero when in a low flow condition. On the M2000 display this function is called Flw Loq.1. Use Hi (Inferior Heating value) for calculation of Energy Totals and Flow rates, if ticked. If not ticked then Hs (Superior Heating value ) will be used. On the M2000 display this function is called E. calc . The unit can be set to Display Accountable Alarms on a Low Flow condition or not as selected. The unit can be set to Display Non-Accountable Alarms on a Low Flow condition or not as selected. (this includes the separate Temperature Alarm). The unit can be set to Use the Non-Accountable LED on a Low Flow condition or not as selected. The unit can be set to Stop the alarm output on Low flow condition or not, any digital output that is set to indicate any t ype of alarm can be set to be reset whilst the unit is in a low flow condition. The unit can be set to Preset the Flow rate when in maintenance mode, as an option the flow rate used can be entered as a preset number instead using the measured/calculated value. This can only occur when the Maintenance mode is ON. The unit can be set to Calculate the Emission Factor for CO2 Yes or No using the following equations:

EF = M % M c CO 2% + (C 6 + % C 6 s 6) (C 6 + % C 7 s 7 )
1) 2)

Pb M 2 co R (273.15 + Tb ) 106 TotalCO 2 = TotalGasVolume ( Nm 3 ) EF 0.995 (C 6 + % C 8s 8)


CO2 Emission Factor in t CO2/m3 Equation 1) : Total of Co2 in metric tonnes Equation 2) Gas Constant 0.008314510 Mpa m3/kmol.K DATA ENTRY Base Temperature in C DATA ENTRY Molar Mass of CO2 44.01 DATA ENTRY Base Pressure in Bar.a DATA ENTRY Molar percent of CO2 Gas Data Selection Percentage of C6+ used. DATA ENTRY or From GC C6 split percentage DATA ENTRY C7 split percentage DATA ENTRY C8 split percentage DATA ENTRY

Where EF : TotalCO2 R : tb : Mco2 : pb : CO2% : C6+% : C6s : C7s : C8s : 14)

15) 16)

If the Model 2000 receives gas component data from any external source, particularly a Gas Chromatograph, and one of the components is in an Accountable alarm condition, the Unit can be set to set all gas component values received at the same time into Alarm, and hence the alternative (LGV or Keypad) values will be used. This done by selecting the Mode switch entry Reject all components on Error input. In the Orifice version the unit can be set to Use Dp High Max/Min Alarms or Ignore them. In the Orifice version the unit can be set to Use Dp Low Max/Min Alarms or Ignore them.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 161 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.49. PID CONTROLLER The M 2000 has an option where by up to 3 of the Analogue Outputs can function as PID control outputs which are set on this page as follows:Each of the three PID Outputs contain separate set up boxes. Each output must be enable by use of the appropriate tick box, forward or reverse action is selected. The variable to be used for the PID output is selected from the Variables tree and dragging across to the output box that is going to be used f or that item. For each output the following parameters must be set up Time Delay in seconds, SP Preset (Set point) value, Integral Time , Proportional Band, Derivative Time , Minimum value and Maximum value. Note Minimum and Maximum values should be equal to the Minimum and Maximum values set for the Analogue output that is used for PID control, and should correspond to the limit values required. Calculations linking these parameters are as follows:-

Pgain =

100 Pband

Epsilon, if SP Control is As PV Control

e P = SP - PV e I = SP - PV

De D = e P ,n -1 - e P,n
Epsilon, if SP Control is Only I -action:

e I = SP - PV e P = SPinitial - PV DeD = PVn -1 - PVn


When the PID controller is used in reverse mode:

e P = -e P

e I = -e I De D = - De D
PID actions:

Paction = e P Pgain Dt Ti

( I action,calc )n = ( I action )n-1 + eI Pgain Daction = Pgain Td Out calc = Paction


Where PV PV,n PV,n-1 SP SPinitial eP eI DeD eP,n eP,n-1 Pgain Pband

De D Dt + I action + Daction
Process value Current Value of PV Previous Value of PV Set point Initial set point ( = PV at start-up) Epsilon for Proportional action Epsilon for Integral action Epsilon for Derivative action Current Value of eP Previous Value of eP Proportional gain Proportional band

= = = = = = = = = = = =

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 162 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Paction Iaction,calc Iaction Daction Ti Td Dt Out calc = = = = = = = = Proportional action Calculated Integral action Finally used Integral action Derivative action Integration time Derivation time Last program cycle time Calculated Output value

When setting up PID Control Outputs the Analogue Outputs (See Analogue Outputs page) will need to be selected from the Analogue Outputs variable tree and dragged across to the appropriate output as described on the analogue outputs page.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 163 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.50. GRAB SAMPLER The M 2000 has an opt ion where by up to 2 of the Digital Outputs can function as Liquid Grab Sampler control outputs which are set on this page as follows:Each of the two Grab Sampler Outputs contain separate set up pages Sampler 1 or Sampler 2. Each of the Sampler systems has Cylinder level indication inputs either as a digital switch input or analogue percentage level input. See Digital Input and Analogue Input pages for details. Both grab sampler systems can be started or stopped individual or at the same time. On start-up of the FC2000 flow computer the sampling system will be stopped on both samplers, and must be started manually by the operator. The sample system will take a sample of a certain size in order to fill the sample Cylinder within a pre determined production period. The Production period or Duration Mode can be selected to be Stop Date in which case a Start Date and Stop Date must be entered or Period in which case a Period in days is entered. The Sample Units are selected between cc or ml. The Select Flowrate to sample is selected from a pull down menu of most available flow rates. Stream selects the Stream Number from those available and Direction the flowing direction Positive or Negative. Unit Size can be selected to be Large (1000 e.g. tonnes) or Small (1 e.g. kgs.) Sampling will be disabled automatically when the flow rate is below an operator entered limit Low Flow Cut-off resumption of sampling can be set to be automatic when the flow rate rises above the cut off level or manually by the operator , by selecting Low Flow Resume to be Automatically or Manually. The following fixed values shall be entered by the operator. Cylinder size (ml or cc) Cylinder Full alarm (%) Cylinder Alarm (%) Grab Size (ml or cc) Grab output Pulse Duration (seconds) Deviation between calculated and measured cylinder level (%) Max sampler speed (grabs/kg) or Large Max sampler speed (grabs/tonnes) Expected Production quantity in (kg) or Large Expected Production quantity in (tonnes) If Can Update is set to After Reset the operator can only modify the cylinder size, grab size and output pulse duration samples if no sampling is in progress and the volume in the cylinder has been reset. If Can Update is set to Any Time the operator can modify the cylinder size, grab size and output pulse duration samples at any time if no sampling is in progress. The operator can modify the expected production to allow for changes in flow during the production period at any time. Grab Sampler Reset Whenever a sample cylinder is physically emptied, the operator must manually reset the displayed volume to zero. The operator can only reset the cylinder volume if no sampling is in progress. When the cylinder volume is reset the grab count is also reset to zero. Grab Sampler Cylinder Full Detection The Flow computer monitors the fill level of each sample cylinder with an analogue level indicator (4-20 mA) or with a digital switch input. When flow rates have changed during the specified period and the total exceeds the operator entered expected total, the sampling will be stopped as soon as the cylinder level exceeds the Cylinder full alarm (default 95%). A warning alarm will be raised when the cylinder level exceeds the Cylinder Alarm level (default 80%).

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 164 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Grab Sampler Calculations The sampling is flow proportional, but will stop at the end of the specified period. To organize this flow proportional sampling, the expected liquid total for that period, the cylinder and grab size must be entered by an operator. The following equations will then calculate when a sample needs to be taken.

Cylinder Size Fill Limit 0.01 Grab Size Remaining Samples = Number of Samples - Taken Samples Expected Liquid Total Mass flow between Samples = Number of Samples Taken Samples Grab Size Estimated Volume = 100 Cylinder Size Remaining Volume = Fill Limit - Actual Volume Grab Size Sample Rate = Expected Liquid Total Number of Samples =
Where: Number of Samples : Cylinder Size : Grab Size : Fill Limit : Remaining Samples : Taken Samples : Mass flow between Samples : Expected Liquid Total : Estimated Volume : Remaining Volume : Actual Volume : Sample Rate :

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Number of samples to fill the sample cylinder to 80% Size of cylinder in ml or cc Size of the sample plunger in ml or cc Limit of cylinder used for filling Number of grabs to fill the sample cylinder Counter of the samples taken by the FC Mass flow counted between two samples Expected period total Current calculated volume in the sample cylinder Remaining volume required to fill the sample cylinder Current volume in the sample cylinder Number of grabs taken per mass unit

Equation 1 Data Entry Data Entry Data Entry Equation 2 Measured Equation 3 Data Entry Equation 4 Equation 5 Measured Equation 6

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 165 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.51. LUBRICATION MODULE There are 3 modes of operation for lubrication: Off Time Based Flow Based Time Based: When this is selected, the Model 2000 will lubricate the meter for the duration selected starting at the specified start time. Flow Based: Select a counter increment. The lubrication will be activated af ter a programmed number of pulses (pulse limit). Lubricate when: If this is set to always, the meter will always be lubricated, otherwise, it will only be lubricated when the flowrate is above a specified minimum. Cycle: Strokes specifies the number of strokes to perform. Duration specifies how long each stroke should take. Pause specifies if there should be a pause between each stroke. Alarms: Pressure Input: If the lubrication system uses a pressure regulator to control (and limit) the pressure used for the lubrication piston, then the pressure alarm can be asserted if the pressure input is used. Delay can be setup to change when this alarm is asserted. Oil Input: This is used to control if the oil level is too low. Piston Input: This is to verify the function of the lubrication system when a lubrication is initiated. For each stroke of lubrication, one pulse should be detected from the lubrication piston position to identify that the piston truly moved. Piston Dev can be setup to change when this alarm is asserted.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 166 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.52. ANALOGUE OUTPUTS The Analogue Outputs for the system can be set up on this page. Analogue outputs 1, 2, 3 and 4 are current normally 4-20mA outputs, which can be altered to 0-20 mA or 0-24 mA by adjusting links on the Output circuit card. Each Output card contains four outputs which can individually be set up to be proportional to any selected parameter of any range. The output are set-up by a) Selecting the appropriate Output board from the pull down menu this will show the output boards available and their position in the corrector. b) Selecting the required output parameter from the Variables tree and dragging across to the output box that is going to be used for that item. c) Entering the required Maximum (20mA) value and required minimum value (4mA) for each current output. For Example if an output is required to be set to be proportional to Line Temperature over the range 0 C to 50 C and that 0 C was to be represented by 0mA and t hat 50 C was to be represented by 20mA. Then the minimum value should be entered as 0 and the maximum f igure entered as 50. For items such as flow rates that can be both positive and negative it is possible to set each output up to use the absolute value of the parameter by enabling the tick box Use Absolute on the appropriate output, this will give a current output irrespective of the sign of the variable. Each of the four Output selection boxes has a Calibration set-up area which allows the Output to be set to Min mA (i.e. 0mA or 4mA) or Max mA (i.e. 20mA or 24mA) when the M2000 is put into the P/T Calibrate mode, this only occurs if the P/T Calibrate Register is written to under a Modbus write command. Under all other circumstances the outputs will not be altered by the setting of the radio buttons.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 167 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.53. DIGITAL OUTPUTS The Digital Outputs for the system can be set up on this page. The Model 2000 has twelve pulse outputs, available on each outpu t card these can be se lected to be either Alarm outputs or Pulse outputs or Flow Dir output or reproduce the Digital Switch Inputs as a pulse output or operate as Valve control On or Off Outputs or Fixed output for self test purposes. Pulse outputs. a) Selecting the appropriate Output board from the pull down menu this will show the output boards available and their position in the corrector. b) Select the required output to be Pulse c) Selecting the required output parameter from the Variables tree and dragging across to the output box that is going to be used for that item. d) Entering the required Divider, scaling factor or twf for each output this would normally be 1, 10, 100 or 1000 and is selected so that the pulse output does not overrun and create an alarm. e) Entering the Pulse length for the pulse output can be selected from 500, 333, 250, 200, 167, 142, 125, 111, 100, 50, 33 and 25 mS. f) Entering the required Duty Cycle for the pulse output this would normally be 50% but can be selected from Minimum pulse (>1mS), 25%, 50% & 75%. Alarm outputs. a) Selecting the appropriate Output board from the pull down menu this will show the output boards available and their position in the corrector. b) Select the required output to be Alarm c) In the lower left hand selection box Status Bits select the required alarm items or group of alarms that are required to provide an alarm output, and drag them across to the output box that is going to be used for that item. d) If the alarm output is required to be Inverted and to be Latched on when an Alarm occurs then select the appropriate tick box. NOTE it is possible to set up a number of different Accountable and Non-accountable Alarm outputs all with different alarms set in each. Flow Dir outputs. a) Selecting the appropriate Output board from the pull down menu this will show the output boards available and their position in the corrector. b) Select the required output to be Flow Direction. c) Selecting a flow rate parameter from the Variables tree and dragging across to the output box that is going to be used for the flow direction indication. d) If the flow direction output is required to be Inverted then select the appropriate tick box. e) The selected output will indicate the flow direction as determined by the sign of the flow rate parameter and the Invert function e.g.(On) for + direction or (Off) for direction. Fixed outputs. a) Selecting the appropriate Output board from the pull down menu this will show the output boards available and their position in the corrector. b) Select the required output to be Fixed c) Select the appropriate output to be Logic 1 (On) or Logic 0 (Off) Digital Switch Inputs reproduced as outputs. a) Selecting the appropriate Output board from the pull down menu this will show the output boards available and their position in the corrector. b) Select the required output to be Swt Inp c) Selecting a digital switch input 1, 2 or 3 parameter from the Status Bits tree and dragging across to the output box that is going to be used for the output indication. d) If the output is required to be Inverted then select the appropriate tick box. e) The selected output will indicate the status of the digital switch input.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 168 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Valve control outputs. a) Selecting the appropriate Output board from the pull down menu this will show the output boards available and their position in the corrector. b) Select the required output to be Valve c) Selecting a Valve Control item Valve1 Open, Valve1 Closed, Valve2 Open or Valve2 Closed parameter from the Variables tree and dragging across to the output box that is going to be used for the Valve control output. d) If the output is required to be Inverted then select the appropriate tick box. e) The selected output will give an output signal for a Duration of XX seconds as set by the duration programmable box. Range is programmable from 1 to 65535 seconds. The output pulse will occur when a Modbus Control register for the appropriate Valve Control item is written to.
oL1 Local Values o L0 Stream 1 o L0 Stream 2 o L0 Stream 3 oL0 Time oL0 General oL1 Valve Switching ML Valve 1 Open ML Valve 1 Closed ML Valve 2 Open ML Valve 2 Closed Local Values Folder Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 General Folder Valve Switching Folder Valve 1 Open Command Output Valve 1 Closed Command Output Valve 2 Open Command Output Valve 2 Closed Command Output

If the Value 255 is written then the Output is set ON permanently. If the Value 254 is written then the Output is set OFF permanently. Lubricate control outputs. a) Selecting the appropriate Output board from the pull down menu this will show the output boards available and their position in the corrector. b) Select the required output to be Lubricate c) The Setup Lubrication Parameters button will enable a new setup window which allows the various Lubrication modes to be enabled as follows:1) Lubrication Mode menu selects t he basic parameter that determines the interval between lubrication operations (outputs) it can be selected between:Time Based a set time interval Frequency of Lubrication between 1 day to 40 weeks. Vbu Based an interval based upon the Vbu flow between 0 and 2,000,000 m3 Vb Based an interval based upon the Vbu flow between 0 and 2,000,000 m3 Vn Based an interval based upon the Vbu flow between 0 and 2,000,000 m3 2) Lubricate When can be set to All the time or Only if Flow is above the Loq value. 3) Number of Strokes per pump cycle set from 1 to 65535. 4) Stroke Duration 1 to 255 seconds. 5) Pause between Strokes 1 to 255 seconds. 6) Stream Number selects the stream 1,2 or 3. d) If the output is required to be Inverted then select the appropriate tick box. e) The selected output will indicate the set status of the Lubrication Output. Grab Sample outputs. a) Selecting the appropriate Output board from the pull down menu this will show the output boards available and their position in the corrector. b) Select the required output to be used for Grab Sample. c) Select Grab Now 1 or Grab Now 2 from the Variables tree and dragging across to the output box that is going to be used for the Grab Sampler output. d) If the Grab Sampler output is required to be Inverted then select the appropriate tick box. e) The selected output will operate as a Grab Sampler as set up on the Grab Sampler page.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 169 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.54. LOGGING The Logging set-up page allows the operator to set-up all of the data logging facilities within the Model 2000. There are five elements setting up the Logging Page 1) Logs This defines the Log definition number , it is possible to set up 16 different logging systems. Use the pull down menu to select the required number. 2) Log Entries This defines the number of logs to be made i.e. 100 , when the system has made 100 logs it will then overwrite the earliest data The log entries can be any number between 1 and 9999. 3) Use of Memory This item is an information box detailing how much memory is available and how much is being used. Warnings are issued if the total available is exceeded in any logging set-up. 4) Log Interval This sets the logging interval periods. Available periods can be selected from the pull down menus Period and Day. Period allows the logging period to be selected from the following:1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, and 30 mins. 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12 hours or daily Weekly or Monthly If Weekly is selected then the day of the week to log on must be selected from the Day pull down menu. If Monthly is selected then the day of the month to log on must be selected from the Day pull down menu. In all cases of Daily, Weekly and Monthly logging the log will occur on the contract hour on the selected day. 5) Log Variables The items to be logged at the logging interval are selected from the variable tree on the left hand side and are dragged across to the log variables window. 6) Log on Event As well as logging on a Time Interval as defined above it is also possible to create a log when either a specific event or all recorded events occur. The tick box Log On event enables this function if a log on specific events are required then select the required event from the list of Status Codes. If a log on all events is required then enable the tick box Any Event.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 170 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.55. MODBUS The Modbus set-up page allows the operator to set-up MODBUS COMMUNICATION data lists that can then be accessed via any of the communication ports of the Model 2000 that are set-up to send or receive MODBUS data. The Set up page is divided into two separate sections one for standard variables and presets etc. and one for all logged data. When a set-up is created it can contain both standard variables and logged data. The modbus page is divided into 3 different sections: Setup Allows the user to do the following functions: Create a new setup Rename an existing setup Delete an existing setup Variables, Log Data & Stat us Bits This contains all the possible data that can be accessed via a MODBUS communication port. Any required data item or data file can be dragged across to the MODBUS set-up window to be included in the active set-up. Switching between Log Data & Variables, or Log Data & Status Bits allows the user to switch between logged data setup and standard data setup Modbus Setup The modbus setup window assigned the necessary MODBUS communication setup to each data item or block of data items that are dragged into the window from the data tree. The items that need to be configured, and the options for each data item are as follows:Address any address in the range 0H to FFFFH or 0D to 65535D Number type can be selected from :Integer Char Float Unsigned Int Unsigned Char Double Unsigned Short Short Boolean Time or EG Time Default No Change Byte Order can be selected from 1234 4321 2143 3412 No Change Register size can be selected from 1 byte 2 bytes 4 bytes 8 bytes No Change Latch can be selected from No latch Latch on Read Latch on Write Latch on Read or Write No Change Each of the above parameters can be set by selecting the variable name to be formatted and double clicking on it. A selection box for each of the above items will appear and the format can be set. If it is required to set a complete column of items to have the same format then t his can be achieved by instead of selecting an individual item, selecting the header for that column, a small menu will appear detailing the options for that column and the required item can then be selected. Modbus Logging Setup At the top of each logging MODBUS set up window will be a line of symbols similar to as follows;Log : 1 AM : Address AI : Auto LE : 100 These symbols refer to the access methods for this MODBUS Logging set-up.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 171 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES There are 2 basic access methods which can be altered by selecting the top line and clicking on the edit function. the methods are as follows;Address Based Address Based means that each logged item will have a separate address, this method can be sub-divided into two further types Push Up and Push Do wn. Push Up means that all addresses increment from a given starting address. Push Down means that all addresses decrement from a given starting address. The definition line for an Address Based set-up would be as follows;Log : 1 AM : Address AI : Auto LE : 100 Log means Log set-up number 1 to 16 AM means Access method can be Address Based or Register Based AI means Address increment this can be automatic or entered LE means the number of log entries Register Based Register Based means that the address of the logged record to be read is defined in a separate register, this method can be subdivided into two further types Push Up and Push Down. Push Up means that all addresses increment from a given starting address. Push Down means that all addresses decrement from a given starting address. This method is only intended to be used where the amount of logged data that is available in the Model 2000 far exceeds the available MODBUS addresses. The method used would then be to have Data stored for any particular log time stored at a range of defined addresses. Then the particular record to be accessed would always be read from the same range of addresses. The definition line for an Register Based set-up would be as follows;Log : 1 AM : Register EA : Fixed Log means Log set-up number 1 to 16 AM means Access method can be Address Based or Register Based. EA means Entry Address i.e. the Address of the register to be written to define the actual log required, for example if 1000 log entries exist and it is required to read 123 then 123 would be written in the Entry Address register and the logged data for record 123 out of 1000 could be read from the addresses set up in the Modbus window. Validate The Validate button function checks to determine if the set-up that is currently in the MODBUS set-up window is valid and can be used. This function should be checked whenever a new set-up is created. Modbus Timeout The Modbus Timeout value allows a time in seconds to be set, if the Modbus comms register is not accessed within that time either by a valid Modbus read or write then a Modbus Communication Timeout alarm will be set.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 172 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.56. ACTIVE DATA The Active Data set-up page allows the operator to set-up the active data variables to be included in the Active Data Report. Items of Data to be included in the Active Data printer report are selected from the data tree in the left hand window and dragged across and dropped in the Variables window on the right hand side. Up to a maximum of 50 Active Data items can be included in this Report. This Active Data report can then be Read out from the Model 2000 using the supplied windows software.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 173 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.57. DATA TO PRINT The Data to Print set-up page allows the operator to set-up a number of different Printer Reports. Up to 10 separate Printer Reports can be created, each should be given a different Printout Name and can then be referred to when the various Print Jobs are set-up. The data to print page is split in to four different sections: Print Setups New Setup Create a new printout Rename Rename an existing setup Delete Delete an existing setup Resize Change the page size of the setup Variables & Log Data Normally the Data Tree contains all variable items and these can be selected and dragged across to the Printer set-up page. To select Logged items the Logged Data button should be operated and any available logged data will be shown instead. Page Selection << < > >> New Page Delete Page Get Clipboard Zoom (75%) goto first page goto previous page goto next page goto last page create a new page delete the current page get information from the clipboard zoom in or out of the page

Page Setup A group of Text can be selected by operating the right mouse key this will show the selected text surrounded by a Green line any new or duplicate position will be shown by a blue shade d box options then exist to:Cut Copy Clear Clipboard Delete A variable item can be selected by the right mouse key. The options then exist to:Format Hide Units Removes Units Field Hide Name Removes Name Field No padding Removes all spaces etc. from fields Change Formatting Shortcut to Format Menu. Cut Copy Clear Clipboard Delete A log or group of log records can be selected by the right mouse key. The options then exist to:Format Hide Units Removes Units Field Hide Name Removes Name Field No padding Removes all spaces etc. from fields Change Formatting Shortcut to Format Menu. Log order Most recent first Oldest First Create Log Statistic allows a group of log records to be selected and a statistic to be created this can then be selected from the options: Sum Sum of all items in log record Average Average of all items in log record Min Minimum value in the list Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 174 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Max Cut Copy Clear Clipboard Delete Maximum value in the list

If Time and Date are to be included in any report then the format can be set to include any of the following items Yes or No by enabling the appropriate tick box Hours Minutes Seconds Weekday Day Month Year Swap dd/mm for USA style In addition the Order of Time / Date / Day can be selected from the pull down menu.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 175 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.58. PRINT JOBS The Print Jobs set-up page allows the operator to set-up all of the printer jobs that the M2000 is required to action. Up to a maximum of 10 Printer Jobs can be created these can be set to occur under any or all of the following circumstances. On an time Interval On an Event such as an alarm occurring When the M2000 front panel print button is operated menu. When a Alarm print occurs In addition to selecting the point at which a printer job will occur the operator can also select the particular printer report (Printout) that will occur and also the Printer port on which it will occur. To set the Printer job on timed Interval the right hand boxes are set up, to set up a printer job on Event the left hand boxes are set up. If it is required to add the particular print job to the M2000 f ront panel print button menu (i.e. an operator manual print request) the tick box show on Print button menu should be enabled. Any or all of these functions can be set to produce a print out, so for example a particular print job could be set to occur on time, on an event and on an operator request. If the Enable alarm print box is enabled then one or more of the alarm boxes Warning, Non Accountable, Accountable or Fault can be selected. If this is done then when one of the selected types of alarm occurs the Alarm message as it appears on the Alarm display pages will be printed when the alarm is set or reset. Note in the case of an automatic Alarm print it is not necessary to select any printout to occur, if this is done then only the alarm message and time and date will be printed. It is also possible to create a Print of All Alarms by selecting the Print All Alarms tick box. Printout and the required Printer are selected from the pull down menus at the top of the page. Each different Printer Jobs set up must be given a different name. To set up a required printer Interval this must be selected from the available printer intervals. Available printer intervals can be selected from the pull down menus Period and Day. Period allows the printing interval to be selected from the following:1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, and 30 mins. 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12 hours or daily Weekly or Monthly If Daily is selected then the hour of printing is selected from the pull down menu. If Weekly is selected then the day of the week to print on must be selected from the Day pull down menu. If Monthly is selected then the day of the month to print on must be selected from the Day pull down menu. In all cases of Weekly and Monthly printing the print will occur on the contract hour (i.e. start of Day) on the selected day. When printing Log records it is possible to select the records to be printed in a number of different ways. This section determines which records and from which time periods will be included in any report, however the time of actual printing is still determined by the Interval setting. If the log records consist of for example 100 records then specific records can be se lected from that list to form part of a report. If Print records from offset is selected then records from the specified Offset (an offset of 0 is the top of the list) to the beginning of the list will be printed. So if Offset is set to 10 the first ten records will be selected for inclusion in the report. If Print current day is selected then records from the specified Hour to the current time in the current day will be printed. If Print current day 1 or 2 etc. is selected then records from the specified Hour to the specified Hour (i.e. a 24 Hour report) on the appropriate day will be printed. This assumes that the data is available for that time period.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 176 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.59. PORTS (MODBUS ASCII/RTU) The Modbus (ASCII /RTU) Serial Communication ports used in the system can be set up on this page. The Modbus Serial Communication ports available on this corrector are set-up and given functions on this set-up page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Modbus ASCII or Modbus RTU should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Modbus ASCII or Modbus RTU other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows:Set-up Name Select the Modbus set-up to be used on this port. ID Modbus id address 1 to 255 are allowed Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 No bits Number of Data bits 7 or 8 RS232 or RS485 Communication type Enable Handshaking Enable or disable Hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking Delay 0, 50, 100, 150 or 200 mS delay between Rx string and Tx Address Offset Enables Modbus Address Offsets Coil default offset 1 Input default offset 10001 Input Reg default offset 30001 Holding Reg default offset 40001 This should be used where systems require these address offsets to be used (See Modbus technical documentation for details).

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 177 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.60. PORTS (PASSWORD MODBUS ASCII/RTU) The Password Modbus (ASCII /RTU) Serial Communication ports used in the system can be set up on this page. The Password Modbus Serial Communication ports available on this corrector are set-up and given functions on this set-up page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Password Modbus ASCII or Password Modbus RTU should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Password Modbus ASCII or Password Modbus RTU other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows:Set-up Name Select the Modbus set-up to be used on this port. ID Modbus id address 1 to 255 are allowed Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 No bits Number of Data bits 7 or 8 RS232 or RS485 Communication type Enable Handshaking Enable or disable Hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking Delay 0, 50, 100, 150 or 200 mS delay between Rx string and Tx Address Offset Enables Modbus Address Offsets Coil default offset 1 Input default offset 10001 Input Reg default offset 30001 Holding Reg default offset 40001 This should be used where systems require these address offsets to be used (See Modbus technical documentation for details). The operating function of Password Modbus is identical to that of normal or Standard Modbus except that access to the available data to read or write is controlled by three passwords. (See page Modbus Passwords). There are three Modbus Passwords each allowing a differ ent level of security:LEVEL 1 Highest security level this allows:Read access t o all registers Write access to allowable registers Change(edit) access to Level 2 and 3 passwords LEVEL 2 Medium security level this allows:Read access t o all registers Change(edit) access to Level 3 passwords LEVEL 3 Lowest security level this allows:Read access t o all registers Modbus Security setting item will return the current Modbus security setting when it is read, the possible replies are:0 No access (default setting) in this case this register is the only item that can be read , and the password registers are the only items that can be written. Attempts to read or write other registers will return a Modbus exception. 1 Current Security Level is Level 1 2 Current Security Level is Level 2 3 Current Security Level is Level 3 Writing to a password with an address < 1000 will set the security level to that password, assuming that the password written is correct. If an incorrect password is written then the security level will be set to 0(No access). Writing to a password with an address > 1000 will change the password to that value, this assumes that this action is allowable within the current security level. If the action is not allowable then a Modbus exception will be returned. Setting of security levels and editing of passwords should only be performed one register at a time.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 178 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.61. PORTS (CHROMAT ASCII/RTU) The Chromatograph Modbus (ASCII /RTU) Serial Communication ports used in the system can be set up on this page. The Gas Chromatograph Modbus Serial Communication ports available on this corrector are set-up and given functions on this setup page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Chromat ASCII or Chromat RTU should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Chromat ASCII or Chromat RTU other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows:Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 No bits Number of Data bits 7 or 8 RS232 or RS485 Communication type Enable Handshaking Enable or disable Hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 179 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.62. PORTS (OSC-01-E) The Serial Communication port set up when gas data is read using the OSC-01-E protocol can be set up on this page. The OSC-01-E Serial Communication ports available on this corrector are set-up and given functions on this set-up page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means M icroprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector Function menus are as follows:Baud Rate Parity Stop bits No bits RS232 or RS485 Enable Handshaking Packet Timeout Communication rate between 1200 and 115K None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Number of stop bits 1 or 2 Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Communication type Enable or disable Hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking Communication received data timeout in seconds.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 180 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.63. PORTS (PRINTER) The Printer Serial Communication ports used in the system can be set up on this page. The Printer Serial Communication ports available on this corrector are set-up and given functions on this set -up page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Microprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case serial Printer should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of serial Printer other menu boxes appr opriate to that function will appear as follows:Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 No bits Number of Data bits 7 or 8 RS232 or RS485 Communication type Enable Handshaking Enable or disable Hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking Invert CTS Inverts the polarity of the CTS handshaking signal Pending Timeout Handshaking Timeout in seconds Page Width in number of characters per line default 80 Page Height in number of lines default 60

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 181 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.64. PORTS (INSTROMET ULTRASONIC 1) The Instromet Ultrasonic meter Serial Communication port used in the system can be set up on this page. When the M odel 2000 is used with a single Instromet Ultrasonic meter using the UNIFORM Serial Communication protocol the serial communication port used on this corrector is set-up and given functions on this set-up page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Instromet Ultrasonic 1 meter should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Instromet Ultrasonic 1 meter other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows: Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 Number of Data bits 8 only RS232 or RS485 Communication type Enable Handshaking Enable or disable Hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking Packet Timeouts Alarm default 20 Zero Flow default 7 seconds before flow set to 0 if no communication from meter. For more detailed information relating to the setting up and configuration of the Instromet Ultrasonic meter see the operating instruction manuals for that device.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 182 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.65. PORTS (INSTROMET THRU PORT 1) The Uniform software associated with the Instromet Ultrasonic meter Serial Communication port used in the system can be set up on this page. The Uniform software Serial Communication port available on this corrector is set-up and given functions on this set-up page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Instromet Thru-port 1 should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Instromet Thru-port 1 other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows: Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 No bits Number of Data bits 8 only RS232 or RS485 Communication type Enable Handshaking Enable or disable Hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking For more detailed information relating to the setting up and configuration of the Instromet Ultrasonic meter see the operating instruction manuals for that device.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 183 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.66. PORTS (INSTROMET ULTRASONIC MODBUS RTU) The Instromet Ultrasonic meter can be set to function in a Multi-drop Serial Communication manner, the port used in the system can be set up on this page. When the Instromet Ultrasonic meter is configured to be used in a M ulti-drop manner it uses the Modbus RTU Serial Communication protocol and the port used must be set accordingly. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Instromet Ultrasonic Modbus RTU meter should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Instromet Ultrasonic Modbus RTU meter, other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows: Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 Number of Data bits 8 only Communication type RS485 Only Enable Handshaking Not available in this function Packet Timeouts Alarm default 20 Modbus id Each connected Meter should be set to a different id. 0 in not allowed, it is suggested that id 1 = Stream 1 id 2 = Stream 2 id 3 = Stream 3 NOTE : When used in this configuration Communication using the Instromet Thru port function is not possible. For more detailed information relating to the setting up and configuration of the Instromet Ultrasonic meter see the operating instruction manuals for that device. The Model 2000 will read the following Modbus Parameters from the Ultrasonic Meter:
Address n000 n001 n002 n003 n004 n005n009 n010n019 n020n029 n030n034 n035 n036 n037 n038 n039 n400 n401 n402 n403 n404 n405 n406n410 n411n415 n416 n417 n418 n419 n420 Measured value Instrument Type Num Paths Sequence Num LO Sequence Num HI Sample Rate Valid Samples: L1 L5 Agc Level: Trd 1A 5B Agc Limit: Trd 1A5B Diag. Bits: L1 L5 Status 1 (V-status) Status 2 (C/R-status) Checksum 1 Checksum 2 Mode of Operation Speed of Sound Gas Velocity Pressure Temperature QLine QBase Cpp: L1 L5 Vpp: L1 L5 Forward Volume 7 Reverse Volume 7 Forward Error Volume 7 Reverse Error Volume 7 Tspare Units m/s m/s kPa K m3/h m3/h m/s m/s m3 m3 m3 m3 Meaning Flow meter type code as used by the UNIFORM software Number of acoustic paths Measurement interval sequence number: 'Low-order' bytes Measurement interval sequence number: 'High-order' bytes Number of acquired samples (elementary measurements) Number of valid samples of path 1 5 AGC level of transducer 1A,1B,2A,2B 5B AGC limit of transducer 1A,1B,2A,2B 5B Reserved for diagnostic information of path 1 5 Operating status of the V-Module Operating status of the optional C-Module (or, if applicable) the Remote Unit Program (=firmware ROM) checksum Parameter set-up checksum Actual mode of operation Speed of sound (N-path average) Flow velocity (N-path average) Absolute pressure Absolute temperature Volume flow at line conditions (= actual volume flow) Volume flow at base/reference conditions (= corrected volume flow) Speed of sound per acoustic path (L1 L5) Flow velocity per acoustic path (L1 L5) Accumulated actual volume forward; 7-digit counter Accumulated actual volume reverse; 7-digit counter Accumulated actual error volume forward; 7-digit counter Accumulated actual error volume reverse; 7-digit counter Reserved for future TwinSonic applications

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 184 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.67. PORTS (PANAMETRICS GM868 ULTRASONIC) The Panametrics GM868 Ultrasonic meter communication port can be set up on this page. When the Model 2000 is configured to be used with a Panametrics GM868 Ultrasonic meter it uses the Modbus ASCII Serial Communication protocol and the port used must be set accordingly. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Panametrics GM868 meter should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Panametrics GM868 meter, other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows: Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 No bits Number of Data bits 8 only RS232 or RS485 Communication type RS485 Only Enable Handshaking Not available in this function Packet Timeouts Alarm default 20 Modbus id Each connected Me ter should be set to a different id. 0 in not allowed, it is suggested that id 1 = Stream 1 The Model 2000 will read the following Modbus Parameters from the Ultrasonic Meter:
Address 5&6 7&8 9 & 10 11 & 12 23 24 & 25 28 & 29 30 & 31 32 & 33 34 & 35 Measured value Act Volumetric Std Volumetric Fwd Totals Rev Totals Error Code Speed of Sound Signal Strength Upstream Signal Strength Downstrm Temperature Pressure Units m3/hr m3/hr m3 m3 m/s Meaning Actual Volume flow rate as 32 bit IEEE float Standard Volume Flow rate as 32 bit IEEE float Forward Direction Totals 4 (2 16 bit int) Reverse Direction Totals 4 (2 16 bit int) 0 = OK Any other value = meter alarm 2 byte Integer Speed of Sound 4 (2 16 bit int) Signal strength Upstream 4 (2 16 bit int) Signal strength Downstream 4 (2 16 bit int) Temperature 4 (2 16 bit int) Pressure 4 (2 16 bit int)

C bara

For more detailed information relating to the setting up and configuration of the Panametrics GM868 Ultrasonic meter see the operating instruction manuals for that device.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 185 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.68. PORTS (PANAMETRICS IGM 878 ULTRASONIC) The Panametrics GM868 Ultrasonic meter communication port can be set up on this page. When the Model 2000 is configured to be used with a Panametrics GM868 Ultrasonic meter it uses the Modbus RTU Serial Communication protocol and the port used must be set accordingly. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Panametrics GM868 meter should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Panametrics GM868 meter, other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows: Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 No bits Number of Data bits 8 only RS232 or RS485 Communication type RS485 Only Enable Handshaking Not available in this function Packet Timeouts Alarm default 20 Modbus id Each connected Me ter should be set to a different id. 0 in not allowed, it is suggested that id 1 = Stream 1

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 186 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES The Model 2000 will read the following Modbus Parameters from the Ultrasonic Meter:
Address 1&2 3&4 5 6&7 8&9 10-13 14-17 18-21 22-25 26 & 27 28 & 29 30 & 31 32 & 23 34 & 25 36 & 37 38 & 39 40 & 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 Measured value Actual Volume Flow Speed of Sound Measurement Status Area Average Velocity Normal Volumetric Flow Actual Volume Forward Total Actual Volume Reverse Total Normal Volume Forward Total Normal Volume Reverse Total Mass Flow Forward Mass Total Reverse Mass Total Energy Flow Forward Energy Total Reverse Energy Total Pressure Temperature Super Compressability Density Kinematic Velocity Heating Value Path A Velocity Path A SoS Path A % Error Path A Last Error Path B Velocity Path B SoS Path B % Error Path B Last Error Path C Velocity Path C SoS Path C % Error Path C Last Error Path D Velocity Path D SoS Path D % Error Path D Last Error Path E Velocity Path E SoS Path E % Error Path E Last Error Path F Velocity Path F SoS Path F % Error Path F Last Error Update Rate SoS Low Limit SoS High Limit Velocity High Limit Velocity Low Limit Signal Strength High Signal Strength Low Amplitude High Amplitude Low Num in Avg Software Version Checksum Paths Modbus Units am3/hr m/s m/2 sm3/hr am3 am3 sm3 sm3 kg/hr kg kg J/hr J J Pa C x1000 kg/m3 x1000 m2/s x108 kJ/m3 m/s x1000 m/s x10 m/s x1000 m/s x10 m/s x1000 m/s x10 m/s x1000 m/s x10 m/s x1000 m/s x10 m/s x1000 m/s x10 Hz m/s m/s m/s m/s dB dB Type 32 bit IEEE float 32 bit IEEE float 2 byte integer 32 bit IEEE float 32 bit IEEE float 64 bit IEEE double 64 bit IEEE double 64 bit IEEE double 64 bit IEEE double 32 bit IEEE float 32 bit IEEE float 32 bit IEEE float 32 bit IEEE float 32 bit IEEE float 32 bit IEEE float 32 bit IEEE float 32 bit IEEE float 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer 2 byte integer

For more detailed information relating to the setting up and configuration of the Panametrics IGM878 Ultrasonic meter see the operating instruction manuals for that device.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 187 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.69. PORTS (DANIEL SENIOR SONIC ULTRASONIC) The Daniel Senior Sonic Ultrasonic meter communication port can be set up on this page. When the Model 2000 is configured to be used with a Daniel Senior Sonic Ultrasonic meter it uses the Modbus ASCII Serial Communication protocol and the port used must be set accordingly. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Daniels Senior Sonic meter should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Daniels Senior Sonic meter, other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows: Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 No bits Number of Data bits 8 only RS232 or RS485 Communication type RS485 Only Enable Handshaking Not available in this function Packet Timeouts Alarm default 20 Modbus id Each connected Me ter should be set to a different id. 0 in not allowed, it is suggested that id 1 = Stream 1 The Model 2000 will read the following Modbus Parameters from the Ultrasonic Meter:
Address 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 352 Measured value Status A Status B Status C Status D System Status FailCntA1 FailCntB1 FailCntC1 FailCnD1 FailCntA2 FailCntB2 FailCntC2 FailCntD2 FlowVel A Units Meaning System Status for Chord A INT System Status for Chord B INT System Status for Chord C INT System Status for Chord D INT General Status Information INT No of failures per batch in upstream direction for chord A INT No of failures per batch in upstream direction for chord B INT No of failures per batch in upstream direction for chord C INT No of failures per batch in upstream direction for chord D INT No of failures per batch in downstream direction for chord A INT No of failures per batch in downstream direction for chord B INT No of failures per batch in downstream direction for chord C INT No of failures per batch in downstream direction for chord D INT flow velocity for chord A FP

m/s

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 188 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES


354 356 358 360 362 364 366 368 370 1500 1502 1504 1506 1508 1510 1512 1514 1516 1518 1520 1522 1524 1526 1528 1530 1532 1534 1536 1538 1540 FlowVel B FlowVel C FlowVel D AvgFlow SndVelA SndVelB SndVelC SndVelD AvgSndVel UnCorrVol NUncorrVol ColdStart DataQlty VolOflow NVolOFlow TimeLapse TimeOFlow Time MaxSEA1 MaxSEA2 MaxSEB1 MaxSEB2 MaxSEC1 MaxSEC2 MaxSED1 MaxSED2 UnCorrVol UnCorrVolFrac NUnCorrVol NUnCorrVol-Frac flow velocity for chord B FP flow velocity for chord C FP flow velocity for chord D FP corrected velocity after linearization FP sound velocity for chord A FP sound velocity for chord B FP sound velocity for chord C FP sound velocity for chord D FP average sound velocity FP Uncorrected positive volume LINT Uncorrected negative volume LINT System Flag LINT flow data quality indicator LINT count positive volume overflow count LINT count negative volume overflow count LINT pulses Number of pulses LINT count time overflow count LINT sec. Number of seconds LINT Maximum Chord A upstream signal energy LINT Maximum Chord A downstream signal energy LINT Maximum Chord B upstream signal energy LINT Maximum Chord B downstream signal energy LINT Maximum Chord C upstream signal energy LINT Maximum Chord C downstream signal energy LINT Maximum Chord D downstream signal energy LINT Maximum Chord D downstream signal energy LINT m3 Uncorrected positive volume LINT 10-3 m3 Fractional part of positive uncorrected volume LINT m3 Uncorrected negative volume LINT 10-3 m3 Fractional part of negative uncorrected volume LINT m/s m/s m/s m/s m/s m/s m/s m/s m/s m3 m3

For more detailed information relating to the setting up and configuration of the Daniels Senior Sonic Ultrasonic meter see the operating instruction manuals for that device.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 189 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.70. PORTS (FLOWSIC 600) The FlowSIC 600 meter Serial Communication port used in the system can be set up on this page. When the Model 2000 is used with a single FlowSIC 600 meter using Modbus Serial Communication protocol the serial communication port used on this corrector is set-up and given functions on this set-up page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case FlowSIC 600 meter should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of FlowSIC 600 other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows: Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 No bits Number of Data bits 7 or 8 RS232 or RS485 Communication type RS232 or RS485 Enable Handshaking Not available in this function Retries Number of Communication retries default 3 Modbus id Meter communication Modbus id number default 1. 0 in not allowed. The Model 2000 will read the following Modbus Parameters from the FlowSIC 600:
Address 3001 3002 3003 30043007 30083011 30123019 5010 5011 5012 5013 7001 7002 7003 7004 70057008 70097012 70137020 Units Digit m3/hr m3/hr m/s m/s m/s m/s dB Meaning Device identification (flow meter type) System Control Register System Status Status register for each path 1 4 Number of valid samples of path 1 4(related to block size and measurement rate) AGC level of receiver 1A, 1B , 4A, 4B Forward Volume Forward Volume in Error Reverse Volume Reverse Volume in Error Volume flow rate at line conditions (=actual volume flow) Volume flow rate at base conditions Velocity of sound (N-path average value) Gas velocity (N-path average value) Velocity of Sound per path 1 4 (averaged values) Velocity of gas per paths 1 4 (averaged values) SNR receiver 1A, 1B ., 4A, 4B (averaged values)

For more detailed information relating to the setting up and configuration of the FlowSIC 600 meter see the operating instruction manuals for that device.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 190 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.71. PORTS (STATION CONTROLLER) The Station Controller Serial Communication port used in the system can be set up on this page. The Station Controller Serial Communication port available on this corrector are set-up and given functions on this set-up page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Station Controller should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Station Controller other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows:Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K The baud rate must be set to be the same as that used by the connected flow computers. All other boxes on this page will be grey.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 191 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.72. PORTS (SMART INDEX) The Instromet SMART Index for Turbine meters Serial Communication port used in the system can be set up on this page. When the Model 2000 is used with a single Instromet SMART Index meter using the NAMUR Serial Communication protocol the serial communication port used on this corrector is set-up and given functions on this set-up page. The Left hand pull down menu Port defines the port to be set-up and the right hand pull down menu Function defines the required function for that port. The Port menu will refer to:SKT 1.1 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 upper connector SKT 1.2 MPU this means Micr oprocessor board in slot 1 lower connector SKT 2.1 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 upper connector SKT 2.2 COMMS this means Communication board in slot 2 lower connector The Function menu will define the available functions in this case Smart Index should be selected. Once a port has been assigned a function of Smart Index other menu boxes appropriate to that function will appear as follows: Baud Rate Communication rate between 1200 and 115K default of 2400 Parity None, Odd, Even, Mark or Space default of Even Stop bits Number of stop bits 1 or 2 default of 1 No bits Number of Data bits 7 or 8 default of 7 RS232 or RS485 Communication type Enable Handshaking Enable or disable Hardware (RTS/CTS) handshaking Timeout Communication re-try timeout Use Status Use the received Status from the SMART Index The Model 2000 will read and display the following Parameters from the SMART Index
a<US> zzzzzzzzzzzzzz<US> ww<US> eee<US> s<FS> Meaning start character a , data frame identifier meter-readout meter readout max. 14 digits in ASCII Decimal, no suppression of leading zeros indication of the dec. pt. of meter-readout max. 2 digits optional + or and power of 10 in ASCII-Decimal Note 0, +0, -0 are equivalent and are all valid. physical unit of meter readout, max. 3 characters as text e.g. m3 Device Status 1 byte 0x30 to 0x3F where 0x30 means no fault

b<US> HHH<US> TTTTTT<US> SSSSSSSSS<US> JJJJ<US> VVVV<FS>

start character b, data frame identifier identification manufacturer code must be 3 capital letters e.g. INS device type or meter class max. 6 characters as text e.g. G1600 serial number of the meter max. 9 characters as text e.g. 123456789 year of manufacture of meter must be 4 digits in ASCII Decimal e.g. 2003 software version number of Smart Index , max 4 characters as text

<US> <FS>

Unit separator File separator

For more detailed information relating to the setting up and configuration of the Instromet SMART Index see t he operating instruction manuals for that device.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 192 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.73. MODBUS PASSWORDS The Modbus Passwords used in the system can be set up on this page. If a communication port is set operate as a Password Modbus Serial Communication port (See page Password Modbus Port) then three passwords must be entered. These passwords correspond the three security levels that operate in this mode:Password 1 for security level 1 Password 2 for security level 2 Password 3 for security level 3 The Password has a range of allowable values between 0 and 65535 which corresponds to a U Short when written via the Modbus communication ports.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 193 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.74. INFORMATION PAGE To set the Information pages of the M2000. The Model 2000 can display up to 6 variable length information pages, it is intended that these pages can contain user entered text, data and bit maps relating to sensor, approval or other relevant information. The screen shows a copy (with the same resolution) of the Model 2000 display and the entered data and bit maps will be shown as they will appear on the Model 2000 display. To Enter a bitmap on the Information Page follow the procedure:Select the required Info Page from the pull down menu. Place the arrow cursor on the Yellow screen area in the top left hand corner position where you wish to enter the bitmap. A Red rectangle outline will appear. Press the Define Bitmap button. The Red rectangle outline will convert to shaded blue. Use the keyboard arrow keys to define the area of the Bitmap. Press the Load Bitmap button. Select the .bmp file that you wish to display and load it. To Enter text on the Information page follow the procedure:Select the required Info Page from the pull down menu. Place the arrow cursor on the Yellow screen area where you wish to enter the text. A Red rectangle outline will appear (this is your cursor). Begin typing the required text. If it is required to invert the text i.e. show as a negative image then tick the Invert tick box before typing. Any text typed after this operation will be inverted. There is a Clear Page button function which erases all text and bit maps on the current page. The lower Box Memory Stats gives information as to the amount of Memory used for the current page the maximum memory available (10,000 bytes) for information pages, the amount of memory used by any bitmap and the dimensions of the bitmap in display pixels.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 194 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.75. DISPLAY PAGES To set the Display pages of the M2000. NOTE THIS IS AN ADVANCED FEATURE IN THE M2000 SET-UP SOFTWARE AND SHOULD ONLY BE ALTERED BY OPERATORS WITH EXPERIENCE OF SETTING UP THE DISPLAY PAGES. In its default condition the M2000 display will show all available items for each Main Menu Item and each Sub Menu Item. Using the functions available on this page it is possible to customise each of the Main Menu Items or Sub Menu Items to only display the user or operator required items. The Display Page Set-up is divided into three function areas: a) The left hand side is the Variables tree which lists all possible display items and Page Titles. Any items in this tree can be dragged across individually or as folders to the right hand side display window. b) The centre window is the List of the actual display items currently on each page. The current display page is determined by the pull down menus Main Menu Item and Sub Menu Item. c) The right hand side window houses the following functions:Restore All Restores all default settings for all display pages Restore Menu Restores all default settings for this menu item Restore Sub Menu Restores all default settings for this sub menu item Clear All Clears all display pages Clear Menu Clears all display pages for this menu item Clear Sub Menu Clears all display pages for this sub menu item Create from Station Controller Creates a stream display page set up from a Station Controller Copy from Stream 1 Creates a Copy of the Stream 1 display pages for stream 2 and 3

If the functions of the Model 2000 are altered on some of the previous pages, for example Compressibility is set to NX19 then only certain items of Gas Data are now required and a large number of items do not need to be displayed. Once all the function changes have been set, if the operator then selects the display page set-up, information will be presented regarding the possible display changes that could be effected in order to Restore the default settings for the new functions. In this example it would be to remove the unwanted gas data items. It is therefore recommended to operate the Restore function after all functional changes have been effected and before any display customisation occurs.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 195 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.76. UNIT SECURITY The Unit Security page is only available to Level 3 Users i.e. operators with full access to all areas of the set-up programme. The page has three basic functions:1) Assign EDIT and CALIBRATE Mode USER Names and allowed Passwords in the Model 2000 for the 3 possible operators Operator 1, Operator 2 and Operator 3. 2) Assign which Set-up pages are accessible to users when the M2000 is set to operate in its partially secure mode.(One M2000 Security Mode switch ON the other OFF) 3) Enable / Disable the Sending of the Serial Number to the FC2000

To set up the EDIT and CALIBRATE Mode User Names and Passwords the left hand boxes are filled in. The Operator Name serves to identify the User and can contain Alpha numeric characters up to a maximum of six. The Password must be capable of being entered on the M2000 and is therefore limited to numeric characters up to 4 digits. To enable the same Password to allow access to the CALIBRATE section of the M2000 the Calibrate page tick box must be enabled. To set up the partially secure mode of the M2000, each page is selected from the menu tree on the left hand side of the window using the alternative mouse key to allow the selected page or part of a page to be Editable i.e. Data or selected data on that page may be changed by this User or Read Only i.e. Data or selected data on that page may be viewed but not altered by this User or Hidden i.e. The Page or icon will not appear in the menu tree for this User.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 196 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.77. ETHERNET 2 BOARD If an Ethernet 2 Board has been configured as part of the M2000 system, this page is used to configure the access to the network and the variable items that will be made available over it. The Page contains 2 set up tabs Network IP address The network addresses can be enabled to be set automatically the address of the item on the network using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) by selecting the Use DHCP menu item. The network address can also be manually configured by selecting the Use Manual Setup menu item. If this is enabled then the following data will be required. IP Address 0.0.0.0 Net Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway 0.0.0.0 Name Server 0.0.0.0 The items Gateway and Name Server are optional. Tag Name: This allows you to name the flow computer (this name will be displayed on the web-page interface). TCP Port Setup It is possible to set up three different Modbus configurations using 3 separate Modbus over TCP I/P ports. Each of the Modbus Ports No, 1, 2 and 3 can be assigned a different Modbus configuration from the available list on the pull down menu. Each separate Modbus configuration must first be set up on the Modbus configuration page. Each of the Modbus TCP I/P Ports is assigned a port address as follows:Modbus Port 1 502 Modbus Port 2 503 Modbus Port 3 504 These addresses are the default values and can be altered although it is recommended that the defaults are used unless this causes an address conflict elsewhere. It is possible to enable two TCP I/P Pass Through Ports. One to enable remote communication through the Model 2000 to a connected Instromet Ultrasonic meter using the Uniform software package. The other to enable remote communication through the Model 2000 to any connected Hart transmitters using available third party software packages. In both cases guidance should be sort from the operating instructions for these software packages about correct operation and configuration. Master It is possible to setup a chromatograph port using the Ethernet Master tab. Specify the IP address and port of the chromatograph connected (this is using the Modbus TCP/IP protocol). Slave Address is the Modbus I D of the chromatograph. Port Send is the port number that the flow computer will use to send data. Timeout is specified in milliseconds and allows you to specify a timeout value for recieving data. NTP It is possible to configure the FC2000 to obtain it's time via the Network Time Protocol (NTP). This can be setup by ticking the Enable box on the NTP tab. Upto 3 NTP servers are configurable, each with it's own IP address and Port. Select the number of servers via the pull-down menu. From Port: This is the Source port that the FC2000 will use. Variation From GMT: This is the time-zone that the FC2000 is in. Update rate: This is how often the FC2000 will poll the server Min & Max Adjust: These are the minimum and maximum amounts the FC2000's clock will be adjusted by. Timeout: After the specified period of time the FC2000 will move on to the next server if no response is recieved from the current server. Use Alarms: Select what level of alarm to raise should an error occur. Server Update Limit: Maximum amount of time since the last time-server adjustment. The following is a description of the active data used: Name Meaning Leap Indicator: This is a two-bit code warning of an impending leap second to be inserted/deleted in the last minute of the current day. This field is significant only in server messages, where the values are defined as follows: LI LI Meaning 0 no warning Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 197 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 1 last minute has 61 seconds 2 last minute has 59 seconds 3 alarm condition (clock not synchronized) Version Version Number (VN): This is a three-bit integer indicating the NTP/SNTP version number, currently 4. This is a three-bit number indicating the protocol mode. The values are defined as follows: Mode Meaning 0 reserved 1 symmetric active 2 symmetric passive 3 client 4 server 5 broadcast 6 reserved for NTP control message 7 reserved for private use In unicast and manycast modes, the client sets this field to 3 (client) in the request, and the server sets it to 4 (server) in the reply. In broadcast mode, the server sets this field to 5 (broadcast). The other modes are not used by SNTP servers and clients. This is an eight-bit unsigned integer indicating the stratum. This field is significant only in SNTP server messages, where the values are defined as follows: Stratum Meaning 0 kiss-o'-death message 1 primary reference (e.g., synchronized by radio clock) 2-15 secondary reference (synchronized by NTP or SNTP) 16-255 reserved

Mode

Stratum

This is an eight-bit unsigned integer used as an exponent of two, where the resulting value is the maximum interval between successive messages in seconds. This field is significant only in SNTP server messages, where the values range from 4 (16 s) to 17 (131,072 s -- about 36 h) This is an eight-bit signed integer used as an exponent of two, where the resulting value is the precision of the system Prec clock in seconds. This field is significant only in server messages, where the values range from -6 for mains-frequency clocks to -20 for microsecond clocks found in some workstations. This is a 32-bit signed fixed-point number indicating half the total roundtrip delay to the primary reference source, in RootDelay seconds with the fraction point between bits 15 and 16. This is a 32-bit unsigned fixed-point number indicating the maximum error due to the clock frequency tolerance, in RootDis seconds with the fraction point between bits 15 and 16. RefId This is a 32-bit bitstring identifying the particular reference source. RefTs & This field is the time the system clock was last set or corrected, in 64-bit timestamp format. RefTf OriTs & This is the time at which the request departed the client for the server, in 64-bit timestamp format. OriTf RecTs & This is the time at which the request arrived at the server or the reply arrived at the client, in 64-bit timestamp format. RecTf TraTs & This is the time at which the request departed the client or the reply departed the server, in 64-bit timestamp format. TraTf Poll

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 198 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.78. STATION CONTROLLER This page sets up all the data to be read from each of the Flow computers and all of the data to be written to each of the flow computers. The page is split into a number of sections, on the left hand side a tree of all the component var iables as they appear on the display of the M2000. On the right hand side a page for the selected data to be shown under either a Read tab or a Write tab. The selected data to be Read should be dragged across from the Tree to the Read tab page. Once dropped onto this page the dat a will be given a default set of addresses and other data, THIS PROCESS IS AUTOMATIC and does not require any changes to be made by the user. The Start Address and Latch Address can be altered by changing the number in the appropriate box and then using the Update button adjacent to the Latch address window but this should not normally be necessary. The process for setting up the Write data is identical. Once the Station Controller Setup is complete it should be Saved u sing the Save Setup button it can be saved as a .mbs file for use in the M2000 f low computers and a .scs file for use in other station controllers. Previously saved files can be loaded using the Load Setup button.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 199 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.79. CHANGE ID TEXT To Change the Display Text of the M2000. NOTE THIS IS AN ADVANCED FEATURE IN THE M2000 SET-UP SOFTWARE AND SHOULD ONLY BE ALTERED BY OPERATORS WITH EXPERIENCE OF SETTING UP THE DISPLAY PAGES AND TEXT ITEMS. The function of this set-up page is to allow the operator to alter the Variable description or Page Title to another form. For example the symbol +Vb could be changed into +VL or the Page Title Main Totals could be translated into a foreign language. The page is split into three sections, on t he left hand side a tree of all the component variables and page t itles as they appear on the display of the M2000. On the right hand side a list of variables or Page titles that have been changed, showing both the original default symbols together with the new symbols or translation. At the bottom of the page some fixed functions:Counter Prefix positive Allows the + symbol used for positive counters to be changed to a different symbol e.g. A Counter Prefix negative Allows the - symbol used for negative counters to be changed to a different symbol e.g. B The procedure for changing Text items is as follows:a) Select the item to be changed from the tree and drag it into the right hand side of the page. b) A dialog box will appear containing the text of the item to be changed followed by the word INDEX (in reverse). The operator is then free to alter erase or change the text as desired up to a maximum of 24 characters, if it is required to add the stream (or INDEX) number to the end of the item then the INDEX button should be pressed. If it is required to effect the same change to all streams then tick the Affect all streams tick box. c) Once the new text has been entered, press the OK button, the old and new text /symbols will then appear in the list on the right hand side of the page. If the text string contains an INDEX then the word @INDEX@ will be at the end of the item. The tree on the left hand side of the page and all other trees in the software will always appear in the default state and not as the changed text or symbols. Although the Windows software allows up to 24 characters to be entered some of the data fields on the Model 2000 display will not accommodate this number of characters, when this is attempted the M2000 will only display the first X characters that it is able to fit in the field space.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 200 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.80. CHANGE ID UNITS NOTE: This is an advanced feature in the Model 2000 Setup Software and should only be altered by operators with experience of setting up the display pages and text items. To Change the Display Units of the M2000. The function of this set-up page is to allow the operator to alter the Variable units to another form. For example the units of +Vb could be changed into sm^3. The page is split into two sections, on the left hand side a tree of all the component variables and page titles as they appear on the display of the Model 2000. On the right hand side a list of variables that have been changed, showing both the original default units together with the new units. The procedure for changing ID units is as follows:a) b) c) Select the item to be changed from the tree and drag it into the right hand side of the page. A dialog box will appear containing the units of the item to be changed. The operator is then free to alter erase or change the units as desired up to a maximum of 24 characters. If it is required to effect the same change to all streams then tick the Affect all streams tick box. Once the new units have been entered, press the OK button, the old and new units will then appear in the list on the right hand side of the page.

Although the Windows software allows up to 24 characters to be entered some of the data fields on the Model 2000 display will not accommodate this number of characters, when this is attempted the M2000 will only display the first X characters that it is able to fit in the field space.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 201 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Event log set-up This page sets up the Preset ids that will be monitored for change by the Event Log. In the Event log of the Model 2000 it is possible to specifically monitor the value of up to 20 preset parameters or ids. The operator selects the Preset variable from the tree on the left hand side of the page, that item can then be dragged and dropped across to the Monitored Preset ids list on the right hand side of the page. Up to a maximum of 20 items can be selected, these will be monitored for the value being changed within the Event log. If a change is detected then the Old value the new value and the time and date of the change will be recorded. The Event log byte order for communication out of the Model 2000 can be selected from the pull down menu items, 1234 , 4321 , 2143 and 3421.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 202 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.81. AUDIT LOG It is possible to read the M2000 Audit Log using the M2000 Windows software. The Audit Log is divided into two sections:EVENTS Items as listed together with the time and date that they occurred. and ALARMS Alarms, Faults or Warnings together with the time and date they were set and the time and date they were reset.
Event Status Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 29 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 EVENT TYPE No Event Power ON Reset New .S19 file downloaded Event log cleared Calibration Data changed Front Panel Settings changed New Time/Date Set using EDIT mode New Time/Date Set using M2000 Windows Software New Time/Date Set using Modbus communication Preset Data changed using EDIT mode Preset Data changed using M2000 Windows Software Modbus Data written to M2000 Maintenance Mode switched ON Maintenance Mode switched OFF Proving Mode switched ON Proving Mode switched OFF P/T Calibrate Mode switched ON P/T Calibrate Mode switched OFF Security Switch No 1 changed from OFF to ON Security Switch No 1 changed from ON to OFF Security Switch No 2 changed from OFF to ON Security Switch No 2 changed from ON to OFF Security Switch No 3 changed from OFF to ON Security Switch No 3 changed from ON to OFF Security Switch No 4 changed from OFF to ON Security Switch No 4 changed from ON to OFF Totals Hold Button operated All Alarm History cleared Fault History cleared Accountable Alarm History cleared Non Accountable Alarm History cleared Warnings History cleared Display pages have changed Information pages have changed Input Board settings have changed Output Board settings have changed by EDIT mode Output Board settings have changed by M2000 Windows software Modbus settings have changed Print Job settings have changed

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 203 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES


Event Status Code 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 to 74 75 to 94 EVENT TYPE Data to Print settings have changed Port Settings have changed Unit Security settings have changed Ethernet settings have changed Counter Prefix table has changed Preset ids in Event log have changed Lubrication Start 1 Lubrication Start 2 Lubrication Start 3 Lubrication Start 4 Lubrication Start 5 Lubrication Error 1 Lubrication Error 2 Lubrication Error 3 Lubrication Error 4 Lubrication Error 5 Time Set by digital Input New meter K factor written Stream 1 switched Online Stream 1 switched Offline Stream 2 switched Online Stream 2 switched Offline Stream 3 switched Online Stream 3 switched Offline Stream 4 switched Online Stream 4 switched Offline Stream 5 switched Online Stream 5 switched Offline Active Data Report changed Name text table changed Units text table changed Reserved for Future Use Preset id Numbers 1 to 20 in Event log have changed

Liquid M2000 only

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 204 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.82. FUNCTION EDITOR This page sets up the Function Editor. NOTE THIS IS AN ADVANCED FEATURE IN THE M2000 SET-UP SOFTWARE AND SHOULD ONLY BE ALTERED BY OPERATORS WITH EXPERIENCE OF SETTING UP THE FUNCTION EDITOR. The Function Editor Page allows the operator to create Custom Status words that can be used simply as a means of transferring data (via Modbus communication) or for controlling digital outputs or similar functions. A New status word is created as follows:Select the New button A Blank Status Word with 32 individual bits will be shown. This Word must first be assigned a name in the box ID to set . In general this is selected from the Variables Tree /Local Variables/Blank IDs where 20 blanks Unsigned Integers or 20 Blank Doubles are available for use. The selected ID should be dragged across to the ID to set box and dropped in it. The Status tab should now be pressed. Individual or multiple status bits can be dragged across to the appropriate status bit number as required. Bits that are not to be used can be left blank. The New status word can be set to follow the status bit settings or to Latch when the status bit is activated. This function is set by the tick box Latched for each status word. The Blank ID created can be accessed via any of the Variable Trees on the appropriate pages for Example the Modbus Page if it is required to remotely read the Status of the new Blank ID. The Name of the Blank ID can also be altered by using the Change ID text function.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 205 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.83. READING EVENT LOG DATA VIA MODBUS As well as reading the EVENT Log Data via the Front Panel port of the M2000 the data can also be read using any configured Modbus port. (See Port Set up section) The data must be read using 3 special commands defined as follows;Modbus Function 20 (14h) This function should be used to retrieve the next event number. Only the modbus ID, function code and CRC are required in the request. The reply will contain four bytes of data that form an unsigned short. This is the next event number that will be used. Request Modbus ID: Function Code: CRC: Reply Modbus ID: Function Code: ---------------------Event Number (Hi): Event Number: Event Number: Event Number (Lo): ---------------------CRC:

Modbus Code 21 (15h) This function can be used to read a shortened version of the event log. This shortened event log onl y contains the basic information for each event. When requesting data the start event is the event number you want to read from, the first event is event number 1. The number of events is the number of events that you require, including the start event. To keep to existing modbus standards a packet should be no longer than 255 bytes, so the maximum number of events that can be read in one request is 19. If you try to read more than 19 events the M2000 will return exception code 03 (Illegal Data Value). The reply will consist of a modbus header, the data and a checksum. The header is formed of the modbus ID, function code and the number of bytes being sent. The data for each event will be 13 bytes long, so depending on the number of events requested the data will be repeated in multiples of 13. Request Modbus ID: Function Code: Start Event (Hi): Start Event: Start Event: Start Event (Lo): Number of Events: CRC: Reply Modbus ID: Function Code: Number of Bytes: ------------------------Event Status Code: Event Number (Hi): Event Number: Event Number: Event Number (Lo): Seconds (Hi): Seconds: Seconds: Seconds (Lo): Days (Hi): Days: Days: Days (Lo): ------------------------CRC:

The 13 bytes of data that make up the event information are as follows: Event Status Code: 1 byte. As Listed. Event Number: 4 bytes. The order in which the events occurred. Seconds: 4 bytes. The number of seconds since 00:00 of the current day. Days: 4 bytes. The number of days since 01-01-2000.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 206 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES Modbus Code 22 (16h). This modbus function reads the detailed version of the event log, it is designed to be used with software provided by Instromet. Code 16h is as code 15h with 2 exceptions. The maximum number of events that can be read in one r equest is 7, and the data for 1 event is 33 bytes long. Request Reply Modbus ID: Modbus ID: Function Code: Function Code: Start Event (Hi): Number of Bytes: Start Event (Lo): ------------------------Number of Events: Event Status Code: CRC: Event Number (Hi): Event Number: Event Number: Event Number (Lo): Seconds (Hi): Seconds: Seconds: Seconds (Lo): Days (Hi): Days: Days: Days (Lo): ID Number (Hi): ID Number (Lo): ID Index (Hi): ID Index (Lo): From Value (Hi): From Value: From Value: From Value: From Value: From Value (Lo): To Value (Hi): To Value: To Value: To Value: To Value: To Value (Lo): ------------------------CRC: The 33 bytes of data that make up the event information are as follows: Event Status Code: 1 byte. As Listed. Event Number: 4 bytes. The order in which the events occurred. Seconds: 4 bytes. The number of seconds since 00:00 of the current day. Days: 4 bytes. The number of days since 01-01-2000. ID Number: 2 bytes. The full ID number used by the windows software. ID Index: 2 bytes. The stream index used by the windows software. From: 8 bytes. The value that the ID has changed from. To: 8 bytes. The value that the ID has changed to.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 207 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.84. PROVER LOOP UNITS The Prover Loop Units page selects units for Pressure and Temperature used in the prover system. The units of pressure to be used can be selected on this page, the Pressure Units pull down menu offers the choice between bar, kPa, kg/cm2 and psi. The Abs/Gau pull down menu offers the use of absolute or gauge pressure measurement, if gauge is selected then a value for mean atmospheric pressure p.atmos will need to be entered, in the units selected. The units of temperature to be used can be selected on this page, the Temperature Units pull down menu offers the choice between C or F. The number of decimal places used to display the parameters Pressure and Temperature can also be set on this page, for each item the choice is 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 208 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.85. PROVER LOOP PRESSURE The Pressure Transmitter inputs for the prover system can be set up on this page. This setup page consists of three set-up tabs, Inlet, Outlet and General. The Inlet tab sets parameters associated with pressure measurement on the inlet side of the prove loop. The Outlet tab sets parameters associated with pressure measurement on the outlet side of the prove loop. The general tab sets parameters associated with pressure measurement during the prove process. It is possible to have either inlet, outlet or both pressure sensor measurement. Inlet , pressure measurement on the Inlet side of the prover loop. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used pressure value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation) or 2 Sensors for multiple transmitter operation. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that each of the connected Pressure Sensors can be scaled using a simple equation as follows:Where

P1 Scale = Offset .1 + ( R .1 P1 Tx )
P1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 P1 Tx Pressure P1Scale is the value passed t o the multiple transmitter selection process. Pressure P1 Range Scaling Factor. Pressure P1 Offset Scaling Factor. Pressure P1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of pressure. Sensor Deviation sets the allowable difference between all pressure transmitter values, before an accountable pressure deviation alarm is raised. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time before a Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated in seconds, if this parameter is set a Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. Pressure Max and Pressure Min are the range of the pressure transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured pressure should rise above these values then an accountable pressure alarm would be indicated. The Selection List offers the selection of the available pressure values that can be used and the order in which those values would be used in the event of alarm or non availability of any parameters. The pull down menus 1st Choice through to 3rd Choice determine the order in which parameters are used. For each choice the following parameters are available and can be selected. Sensor 1, Sensor 2 and Average. Outlet, pressure measurement on the Outlet side of the prover loop. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used pressure value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation) or 2 Sensors for multiple transmitter operation. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that each of the connected Pressure Sensors can be scaled using a simple equation as follows:Where

P1 Scale = Offset .1 + ( R .1 P1 Tx )
P1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 P1 Tx Pressure P1Scale is the value passed t o the multiple transmitter selection process. Pressure P1 Range Scaling Factor. Pressure P1 Offset Scaling Factor. Pressure P1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of pressure. Sensor Deviation sets the allowable difference between all pressure transmitter values, before an accountable pressure deviation alarm is raised. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time before a Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated in seconds, if this parameter is set a Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. Pressure Max and Pressure Min are the range of the pressure transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured pressure should rise above these values then an accountable pressure alarm would be indicated. The Selection List offers the selection of the available pressure values that can be used and the order in which those values would be used in the event of alarm or non availability of any parameters. The pull down menus 1st Choice through to 3rd Choice

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 209 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES determine the order in which parameters are used. For each choice the following parameters are available and can be selected. Sensor 1, Sensor 2 and Average. General, pressure measurement on the Inlet side of the prover loop. The Input selection allows the selection between Inlet (only), Outlet (only) or Average (of Inlet and Outlet) Value to be used in the prove function. Average Sensor Deviation sets the allowable difference between pressure transmitter values. (Note this is only used if the average of Inlet and Outlet is selected). The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time in seconds during which the sensors must be in deviation before a Sensor Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated. Proving Deviation sets the allowable difference between the current pressure transmitter values and the value recorded at start of the prove sequence. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time in seconds befor e a Proving Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated, if this parameter is set a Proving Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. Line Deviation sets the allowable differ ence between the measurement line pressure transmitter values and the prove pressure transmitter value. The Stability Timeout sets the stabilisation time at the beginning of the proving sequence in seconds.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 210 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.86. PROVER LOOP TEMPERATURE The Temperature Transmitter inputs for the prover system can be set up on this page. This setup page consists of three set-up tabs, Inlet, Outlet and General. The Inlet tab sets parameters associated with temperature measurement on the inlet side of the prove loop. The Outlet tab sets parameters associated with temperature measurement on the outlet side of the prove loop. The general tab sets parameters associated with temperature measurement during the prove process. It is possible to have either inlet, outlet or both temperature sensor measurement. Inlet , temperature measurement on the Inlet side of the prover loop. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used temperature value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation) or 2 Sensors for multiple transmitter operation. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that each of the connected Temperature Sensors can be scaled using a simple equation as f ollows:Where

T1 Scale = Offset .1 + ( R .1 T1 Tx )
T1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 T1 Tx Temperature T1Scale is the value passed to the multiple transmitter selection process. Temperature T1 Range Scaling Factor. Temperature T1 Offset Scaling Factor. Temperature T1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of temperature. Sensor Deviation sets the allowable difference between all temperature transmitter values, before an accountable temperature deviation alarm is raised. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time before a Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated in seconds, if this parameter is set a Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. Temperature Max and Temperature Min are the range of the temperature transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured temperature should rise above these values then an accountable temperature alarm would be indicated. The Selection List offers the selection of the available temperature values that can be used and the order in which those values would be used in the event of alarm or non availability of any parameters. The pull down menus 1st Choice through to 3rd Choice determine the order in which parameters are used. For each choice the following parameters are available and can be selected. Sensor 1, Sensor 2 and Average. Outlet, temperature measurement on the Outlet side of the prover loop. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used temperature value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation) or 2 Sensors for multiple transmitter operation. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that each of the connected Temperature Sensors can be scaled using a simple equation as f ollows:-

T1 Scale = Offset .1 + ( R .1 T1 Tx )
Where T1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 T1 Tx Temperature T1Scale is the value passed to the multiple transmitter selection process. Temperature T1 Range Scaling Factor. Temperature T1 Offset Scaling Factor. Temperature T1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of temperature. Sensor Deviation sets the allowable difference between all temperature transmitter values, before an accountable temperature deviation alarm is raised. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time before a Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated in seconds, if this parameter is set a Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. Temperature Max and Temperature Min are the range of the temperature transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured temperature should rise above these values then an accountable temperature alarm would be indicated. The Selection List offers the selection of the available temperature values that can be used and the order in which those values would be used in the event of alarm or non availability of any parameters. The pull down menus 1st Choice through to 3rd Choice Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 211 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES determine the order in which parameters are used. For each choice the following parameters are available and can be selected. Sensor 1, Sensor 2 and Average. General, temperature measurement on the Inlet side of the prover loop. The Input selection allows the selection between Inlet (only), Outlet (only) or Average (of Inlet and Outlet) Value to be used in the prove function. Average Sensor Deviation sets the allowable difference between temperature transmitter values. (Note this is only used if the average of Inlet and Outlet is selected). The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time in seconds during which the sensors must be in deviation before a Sensor Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated. Proving Deviation sets the allowable difference between the current temperature transmitter values and the value recorded at start of the prove sequence. The Deviation Timeout sets the delay time in seconds before a Proving Deviation Limit alarm will be indicated, if this parameter is set a Proving Deviation Limit alarm must be set continuously for that time period before the alarm will be indicated. Line Deviation sets the allowable difference between the measurement line temperature transmitter values and the prove temperature transmitter value. The Stability Timeout sets the stabilisation time at the beginning of the proving sequence in seconds.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 212 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.87. DENSITY LOOP UNITS The Density Loop Units page selects units for Pressure and Temperature used in the density loop of the prover system. The units of pressure to be used can be selected on this page, the Pressure Units pull down menu offers the choice between bar, kPa, kg/cm2 and psi. The Abs/Gau pull down menu offers the use of absolute or gauge pressure measurement, if gauge is selected then a value for mean atmospheric pressure p.atmos will need to be entered, in the units selected. The units of temperature to be used can be selected on this page, the Temperature Units pull down menu offers the choice between C or F. The number of decimal places used to display the parameters Pressure and Temperature can also be set on this page, for each item the choice is 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places. The prover calculates using the base pressure and base temperature entered for P Base and T Base. Alternative calculations for Beta factor compressibility can be selected by pull down menu, see section Liquid Correction for calculation details.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 213 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.88. DENSITY LOOP PRESSURE The Density Loop Pressure Transmitter inputs for the system can be set up on this page. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used pressure value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation), 2 Sensors or None in which case the value used will be the Keypad value in this case no alarm will be raised. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that each of the connected Pressure Sensors can be scaled using a simple equation as follows:Where

P1 Scale = Offset .1 + ( R .1 P1 Tx )
P1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 P1 Tx Pressure P1Scale is the value passed to the multiple transmitter selection process. Pressure P1 Range Scaling Factor. Pressure P1 Offset Scaling Factor. Pressure P1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of pressure. The Keypad Value is the manually entered value of pressure that would be used if all normal values are in Alarm or if selected to be used. Pressure Max and Pressure Min are the range of the pressure transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured pressure should rise above these values then an accountable pressure alarm would be indicated. Pressure High and Pressure Low alarms operate at the high alarm set value PHi and the low alarm set value PLo pressure measurement outside these values will cause a non accountabl e alarm to be indicated.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 214 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.89. DENSITY LOOP TEMPERATURE The Density Loop Temperature Transmitter inputs for the system can be set up on this page. Number of Transmitters selects from a pull down menu the number of transmitters or inputs that will be used in the determination of the used tem perature value. This can be 1 Sensor (for single transmitter operation), 2 Sensors or None in which case the value used will be the Keypad value in this case no alarm will be raised. The Model 2000 can also be configured so that each of the connected Temperature Sensors can be scaled using a simple equation as follows:Where

T1 Scale = Offset .1 + ( R .1 T1 Tx )
T1 Scale R.1 Offset.1 T1 Tx Temperature T1Scale is the value passed to the multiple transmitter selection process. Temperature T1 Range Scaling Factor. Temperature T1 Offset Scaling Factor. Temperature T1Tx Actual measured value.

Scaling factors R.1 and Offset.1 are entered on this page if required. If this function is not required the value R.1 should be left in its default of 1 and the value Offset.1 in its default of 0 when this is done the equation will not affect the value of temperature. The Keypad Value is the manually entered value of temperature that would be used if all normal values are in Alarm or if selected to be used. Temperature Max and Temperature Min are the range of the temperature transmitter inputs connected to the Corrector. If the measured temperature should rise above these values then an accountable temperature alarm would be indicated. Temperature High and Temperature Low alarms operate at the high alarm set value THi and the low alarm set value TLo temperature measurement outside these values will cause a non accountable alarm to be indicated.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 215 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.90. PROVER SETTINGS The basic operation of the prove loop is set up on this page. The page is divided into 5 separate functions all of which relate to the prove functions these are:Connected Computers refers to the number of line measurement flow computers connected to the system the number is selected from the pull down menu Num.Units the allowable range is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Associated with each connected flow computer is a communication id. these default to 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 and normally would not be altered from those values. Initiate Sequence selects from a pull down menu the method used to initiate a prove sequence, either Automatic & Manual or Manual only. Automatic & Manual means that the proving sequence would re-start automatically when any of the re-prove conditions are met and it could also be initiated by manual command. Manual only means that the re-prove sequence can only be initiated by m anual command. Proving Deviation sets up the allowable deviation in the Mass flow value and the density value, during a prove before the prove run would be aborted. Qm Deviation sets the deviation value in kg/hr and Deviation Timeout sets the time period that the deviation must be present for before the run is aborted, in seconds. Rho Deviation sets the deviation value in kg/m3 and Rho Deviation Timeout sets the time period that the deviation must be present for before the run is aborted, in seconds. Reprove Limits sets the limits in measured variables Pressure, Temperature, Density and flow rate so that if the measured variable exceeds the limit value a reprove sequence is initiated. Pres Reprove sets the value for Line Pressure in bara. Temp Reprove sets the value for Line Temperature in degrees C. Dens Reprove sets the limit in Line Density in kg/m3. Flow Reprove sets the limit in volume flow in m3. K Update relates to the actions taken once a prove sequence is complete. The K Download pull down menu offers the option of when the new meter K Factor is downloaded to the appropriate Line flow computer. Always means that any new value of K is always downloaded. Automatic means that the new K value is automatically downloaded provided the new value is within the Auto Deviation limit from the Ref K src. After User Acceptance means that the new K factor is downloaded provided the new value is within the Man. Deviation limit from the Ref K src. Never means the new value is never downloaded. Ref K src refers to the source of the Reference K factor which can either be a Preset Number or the Last Calculated Prove value. Qm Stab. Timeout determines the maximum length of time to wait for the value of Qm to be stable before commencing the Prove run. Qm Std Dev is the standard deviation value of Qm as measured over the previous 20 seconds of time, if the value of Qm is within this value and the time since start is less than the Qm Stab Timeout value then the prove run will commence.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 216 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.91. FOUR WAY VALVE The basic operation of the four way valve in the prove loop is set up on this page. Pulse Length in seconds sets the duration of the pulse required to operate the Valve and to move it from one position to the next. Transition Time in seconds sets the length of the transition period of the valve during which valve leak detection is inh ibited. Leak Detection method is selected between Digital and Sensor. Digital refers to Leak detection using a pressure switch input which is ON or OFF and would normally be connected to a Digital status input. See Digital Input Section. Sensor refers to Leak detection using a pressure sensor analogue input. See Analogue Input Section. If Sensor is selected then the following additional items need to be entered. The units of Differential pressure to be used can be selected, the Dp Units pull down menu offers the choice between barg, m bar, psig, mm w.g (water gauge) and inches w.g .(water gauge). The number of decimal places used to display the Dp value can also be set the choice is 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places. The Dp Max and Dp Min values of the sensor input must also be set on this page in the selected units.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 217 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.92. PROVER LOOP INFORMATION The basic information about the set up of the Prover Loop is set up on this page. The pull down menu determines which combinations of the prover ball Detector switches will be used. Allowable combinations are 1+3, 1+4, 2+4, 2+3 or All switches. Max Runs determine the maximum number of runs to make up a prove Sequence and Successful Runs is the number of runs in the maximum number that must be successful in order to complete a successful prove. The pull down menu determines if prover Pulse Interpolation is to be used No Interpolation means that every prover pulse is counted but not interpolation of data is required Pulse Limit sets the number of pulses to be counted. Dual Chronometry means that intermediate pulse timing is set which allows the maximum number of prover pulses required for each run is much lower due to the measurement of intermediate pulse times. Forward Time sets the time taken for the ball to travel from the last detector switch to the launch chamber in seconds. Reverse Time sets the time taken for the ball to travel from the first detector switch to the launch chamber in seconds. Loop Time sets the time taken to traverse the loop from Launch chamber to Launch chamber. It is recommended that all three of the traverse times should always be set on the high tolerance side of the value. Use Repeatability tick box, if not enabled then a prove cycle will complete if the Successful runs value has been exceeded and the Max runs value has not. Use Repeatability tick box, if enabled uses a statistical method to determine the number of successful runs needed to determine a new K factor value. The value of successful runs must exceed a minimum of 5 and be less than a maximum of 20 , the actual value of runs needed is determined using the following method. An estimator for the Mean K-factor ,m, is given by Equation 1. Assuming that all K factors ,X, follow a normal distribution with standard deviation ,s, and average ,/X, the estimator for the Mean K factor ,m, will follow a Student-t distribution with ,(n-1), degree of freedom.

1)

s s P X - t a < m < X+ ta = 1- a ,n - 1 ,n - 1 n n 2 2

The uncertainty band ,d, (confidence level) at 95% confidence level (a=5%) for the estimator for the Mean K-factor ,m,. is given by Equation 2 2)

d = 200 t a
2

s
,n - 1

X n

Equation 2 gives an uncertainty band for the average of the proving results and shall be less or equal to the NPD repeatability of 0.050% band for an acceptable prove cycle.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 218 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.93. PROVER CALCULATIONS The basic information about the calculations used in the Prover Loop is set up on this page. The majority of parameters entered on this page relate to the calculations for the prover that relate to thermal and pressure expansion. 18) 19) Where CTSp CPSp t0 tp lp Dp t Ep pp p0 N Vb

CTS p = (1 + ( t p - t 0 ) l p 10 -6 )

CPS p = (1 + (p p - p 0 ))
: :

Dp (Ep t )
Equation 18) Equation 19) DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY MEASURED DATA ENTRY

: : : : : : : : :
:

Correction for prover expansion due to temperature to API 12.2.5.1 1st Edition Oct 1995 Correction for prover expansion due to pressure to API 12.2.5.2 1st Edition Oct 1995 Reference Temperature of meter in C Prover Liquid Temperature in C Cubical expansion coefficient of the prover (often used 3*Linear)/ K Prover inner Diameter in mm at p0 & t0 ref. pressure and temp. Prover wall thickness in mm at p0 & t0 ref. pressure and temp. Modulus of Elasticity of prover material in Bar Prover Liquid pressure in Bar.a Reference pressure in Bar.a Number of turbine meter pulses generated during the prover period. Prover base volume at p0 & t0 ref. pressure and temp.

Vb Switches 1 + 3 , 1 + 4 , 2 + 4 , 2 + 3 set the prover base volume at reference conditions between each of the possible detector switch combinations. Compressibility factor Beta is selected from the pull down menu and API constants K0, K1 and K2 appropriate for the liquid being measured are entered.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 219 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 4.0 HELP PAGES 4.94. VALVE CONTROL This page allows control of either analog or digital valves. Analog Controls a 4-20mA output that needs to be configured seperatly on the output board page using valve.ana.output# (where # is the valve selected). The setpoint for this valve is controlled by valve.ana.setpoint#. Data can be written via modbus or entered on the scren using the edit pages. The setpoint can be cleared by writing the value 1e+038 (--- on the display) and the default value used. The default value is used until a setpoint is provided. If a value greater then the maximum limit or less then the minimum limit is entered, the default value will be used. Digital The default state controls the valve output at power-up. The exact output settings need to be configured separatly on the output board page using the advanced valve setting and valve.dig.output# id. The digital value output is controlled using valve.dig.dur# and valve.dig.setpoint#. Valve.dig.dur# controls how long the valve should remain active if the setpoint is set to time. valve.dig.setpoint# controls the function of the valve using the following values: 0 - Valve idle: Default state is used. 1 - Valve Off: Output is switched off. 2 - Valve On: Output is switched on. 3 - Valve Timer: Output is switched on for the duration entered in valve.dig.dur#. The time remaining can be chekced by looking at valve.remaining# Both valve.dig.dur# and valve.dig.setpoint# can be controlled via modbus or on the display using the edit pages.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 220 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE 5. DATA TREE Section 5 contains the details of the Data Tree Structure within the Model 2000 , this defines all the parameters that can appear on the display, be printed or can be accessed via any Modbus communication port. These items are split int a Number of Sections listed on the following pages:Preset Data Active Data Local Values Counters Station Controller. Any items shown in italics indicates that item is not a numeric value but a selectable type e.g. on or off . It will however when read via the Modbus communication port be represented as a number 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 etc. Any items shown in the colour RED indicates that item is currently allowed to be written to via the Modbus communication port. Please note these pages are listed for Software version M2000 V5.2 and that earlier versions may not contain all the listed parameters.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 221 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE 5.1. PRESET DATA
Preset Data Folder Machine Type (Type of Flow Computer i.e. 1 Stream Turbine) PID Controller Folder PID Controller 1 Folder Enable PID Controller 1 Yes or No Forward or Reverse direction Set Point Preset Value Proportional Band Value Integral Time Value Derivative Time Value Minimum Value Maximum Value PID Controller 2 Folder PID Controller 3 Folder Grab Sampler Folder Grab Sampler 1 Folder Sampler Units ml or cc Resume sampling after low flow condition Manually or Automatically Flow Rate to be used for sampling calculation from list Vb, Vn, M etc. Cylinder Size in cc or ml Cylinder full Alarm level in % Grab size in cc or ml Expected Production quantity in flow units End Sampling Time and Date Start Sampling Time and Date Sampler 1 enabled Yes or No Flow Direction positive or negative Low Flow Cut-off value in flow rate units Cylinder level warning alarm in % Deviation Alarm level in % between expected and actual production Length of Sample Pulse in seconds Flowing Stream to be sampled Unit Size Small (1 ) or Large ( 1000) Expected Production quantity in flow units (1000) Sample Duration Mode Stop Date or Period If Duration mode is Period, Time in days Maximum Sampler speed in grabs per flow unit Maximum Sampler speed in grabs per flow unit(1000) Sampler values can be updated After a Reset or Any Time Grab Sampler 2 Folder Station Folder Station Sum Flags Folder Stream 1 Sum, Subtract, Average or No sum Stream 2 Sum, Subtract, Average or No sum Stream 3 Sum, Subtract, Average or No sum Station Display Scaling Factor Folder Station Total scaling factor for Vb Totals Station Total scaling factor for Vn Totals Station Total scaling factor for E Totals Station Total scaling factor for M Totals Station Temperature Input 1 Folder Station Temperature 1 input high alarm Station Temperature 1 input low alarm Station Temperature 1 input max alarm Station Temperature 1 input min alarm Station Temperature 1 input range calibration Station Temperature 1 input offset calibration Station Temperature 1 input On or Off Station Temperature Input 2 Folder Station Temperature 2 input high alarm Station Temperature 2 input low alarm Station Temperature 2 input max alarm Station Temperature 2 input min alarm Station Temperature 2 input range calibration Station Temperature 2 input offset calibration Station Temperature 2 input On or Off Station Pressure Input 1 Folder o 1 Preset Data Machine Type o 1 PID Controller o1 PID 1 enable.1 reverse.1 SP_preset.1 Pband.1 Int_Time.1 Der_Time.1 Min.1 Max.1 o0 PID 2 o0 PID 3 o 1 Grab Sampler o1 Sampler 1 Units.1 Low Flow Resume.1 Flow Rate Select.1 Cylinder Size.1 Cylinder Full.1 Grab Size.1 Expected Production.1 End Date.1 Start Date.1 Enabled.1 Direction.1 Lo Flow Cut.1 Cylinder Alarm.1 Deviation.1 Pulse Duration.1 Stream.1 Unit Size.1 Large Expected Production.1 Use Duration.1 Period.1 Max Sampler Speed.1 Large Max Sampler Speed.1 Can Update.1 o0 Sampler 2 o 1 Station o1 Sum Flags s.Sum.1 s.Sum.2 s.Sum.3 o1 Multiplying Factors s.twfb.1 s.twfn.1 s.twfe.1 s.twfm.1 o1 Temperature 1 s.temp.hi.1 s.temp.lo.1 s.temp.max.1 s.temp.min.1 s.temp.r.1 s.temp.offset.1 Use Station Temp.1 o1 Temperature 2 s.temp.hi.2 s.temp.lo.2 s.temp.max.2 s.temp.min.2 s.temp.r.2 s.temp.offset.2 Use Station Temp.2 o1 Pressure 1

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 222 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


s.pres.hi.1 Station Pressure 1 input high alarm s.pres.lo.1 Station Pressure 1 input low alarm s.pres.max.1 Station Pressure 1 input max alarm s.pres.min.1 Station Pressure 1 input min alarm s.pres.r.1 Station Pressure 1 input range calibration s.pres.offset.1 Station Pressure 1 input offset calibration Use Station Pres.1 Station Pressure 1 input On or Off o1 Pressure 2 Station Pressure Input 2 Folder s.pres.hi.2 Station Pressure 2 input high alarm s.pres.lo.2 Station Pressure 2 input low alarm s.pres.max.2 Station Pressure 2 input max alarm s.pres.min.2 Station Pressure 2 input min alarm s.pres.r.2 Station Pressure 2 input range calibration s.pres.offset.2 Station Pressure 2 input offset calibration Use Station Pres.1 Station Pressure 1 input On or Off o1 Units Station Units Folder S. Pressure Units Station Pressure Units used ,bar, kg/cm2, Kpa, psi S. Pressure Abs/Gauge Station Pressure Absolute or Gauge S. Temperature Units Station Temperature Units C or F S. Temperature DPs Station Temperature Display number of decimal places S. Pressure DPs Station Pressure Display number of decimal places o1 Comparison Flags Comparison Flags Folder Stn.Comparison.1 Station Comparison 1 Stream 1,2 or3 Stn.Comparison.2 Station Comparison 2 Stream 1,2 or3 o1 Counter Deviation Counter Deviation Folder Vb.deviation Hourly Vb Flow limit deviation in % Vv.deviation Hourly Vn Flow limit deviation in % Modbus Timeout Modbus Communication timeout before Modbus Alarm indicated o1 Mode Switches Mode Switch Folder S.Maintenance Mode Use extended maintenance mode Yes or No S.Maintenance Cut Off Extended Maintenance Mode Low flow cut off in kg. Stream Maintenance Mode Determines if the station maintenance mode is applied to all streams. o 1 General General Folder o1 Gas Data Gas Data Folder o 1 Molar Masses Molar Masses Folder C (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Methane N2 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Nitrogen CO2 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of CO2 C2 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Ethane C3 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Propane H20 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of H2O H2S (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of H2S H2 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Hydrogen CO (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of CO O2 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Oxygen i-C4 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of iso-Butane n-C4 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of n-Butane i-C5 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of iso-Pentane n-C5 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of n-Pentane n-C6 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Hexane n-C7 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Heptane n-C8 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Octane n-C9 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Nonane n-C10 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Decane He (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Helium Ar (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Argon neo-C5 (Molar Mass) Molar Mass of neo-Pentane IC6H14(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of 2, Methylpentane MC6H14(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of 3, Methylpentane NEO_C6H14(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of 2,2, Dimethylbutane DC6H14(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of 2,3, Dimethylbutane C2H4(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Ethylene C3H6(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Propylene C4H8(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of 1, Butene CC4H8(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of cis 2 Butene TC4H8(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of trans 2 Butene IC4H8(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of 2 Methylpropene PC5H10(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of 1 Pentene C3H4(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of Propadiene AC4H6(Molar Mass) Molar Mass of 1,2 Butadiene

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 223 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


BC4H6(Molar Mass) C2H2(Molar Mass) CC5H10(Molar Mass) MC6H12(Molar Mass) EC6H12(Molar Mass) C6H12(Molar Mass) MC7H14(Molar Mass) EC8H16(Molar Mass) C6H6(Molar Mass) C7H8(Molar Mass) EC8H10(Molar Mass) C8H10(Molar Mass) CH3OH(Molar Mass) CH4S(Molar Mass) NH3(Molar Mass) HCN(Molar Mass) OCS(Molar Mass) CS2(Molar Mass) o1 Passwords Password 1 Password 2 Password 3 Event log byte order Counter Rollover Micromotion Rollover Latch NAC LED Use HART Units Clear alarms when fully secure o 1 Lubrication o1 Lubrication 1 Mode Counter Frequency Pulses between Start time When Min Flowrate Number of Strokes Duration Pause Use Pressure Input Use Piston Input Use Oil Input Piston Deviation Pressure Delay o 1 Stream 1 Stream type.1 o1 Turbine Data impw meter.1 impw monitor.1 Tu BR.1 Meter correction.1 o1 Ultrasonic Data UL.Paths.1 UL.P/T corr.1 UL.Linear.1 UL.Ref.Temp.1 UL.Alpha.1 UL.Ref.Pres.1 UL.Diameter.1 UL.Thickness.1 UL.E.1 UL.Efficiency.1 US Meter Eq.1 UL Conversion.1 UL.VoS Acc Deviation.1 UL. VoS nAcc Deviation.1 UL.VoS Acc Timeout.1 UL. VoS nAcc Timeout.1 o1 Orifice Data Or.Lo dp max.1 Or.Hi dp max.1 Molar Mass of 1,3 Butadiene Molar Mass of Acetylene Molar Mass of Cyclopentane Molar Mass of Methylcyclopentane Molar Mass of Ethylcyclopentane Molar Mass of Cyclohexane Molar Mass of Methylcyclohexane Molar Mass of Ethylcyclohexane Molar Mass of Benzene Molar Mass of Toluene Molar Mass of Ethylbenzene Molar Mass of 0 Xylene Molar Mass of Methanol Molar Mass of Methanethion Molar Mass of Ammonia Molar Mass of Hydrogen Cyanide Molar Mass of Carbonyl sulphide Molar Mass of Carbon disulphide Modbus Passwords Folder Modbus Password No 1 Modbus Password No 2 Modbus Password No 3 Event log byte order Counter Rollover at 100 billion (64bit) or 1 billion (32bit) Counter Rollover value used for Micromotion Coriolis meters Latch Non Accountable Alarms LEDs on Alarm Yes or No Use or Ignore Units received from HART transmitters Determines if the alarms can be cleared when the unit is fully secure Lubrication Folder Lubrication Module 1 Lubrication mode Counter lubrication intetrval should be based on Manually configured lubrication frequency Number of pulses between lubrication intervals Time to begin lubrication If lubrication should only be carried out based on the flow rate Minimum flowrate to lubricate Number of strokes in the lubrication cycle Duration of stroke Pause between strokes Select if pressure alarm should be used Select if piston alarm should be used Select if oil alarm should be used Allowable piston deviation before alarm is indicated Delay in seconds before the pressure alarm is activated Stream 1 Folder Stream 1 flow computer type Turbine Data Folder Meter input impw scaling factor Monitor input impw scaling factor Turbine Meter Blade Ratio Meter Linearity correction entered as % Error or Meter Factor Ultrasonic Meter Data Folder Number of paths Pressure/Temperature correction off, weld or flange Linearity correction off or 20 point Reference Temperature Alpha factor Reference Pressure Meter Diameter Wall thickness Modulus of elasticity of meter Measurement efficiency on per cent Equation Standard or ISO6976 or ISO6976 (no z or Zb) Units conversion None, Metric to Imperial or Imperial to Metric Allowable deviation between measured and calculated VoS for accountable alarm Allowable deviation between measured and calculated VoS for non-accountable alarm Time the VoS deviation must be present before an accountable alarm is raised Time the VoS deviation must be present before an non-accountable alarm is raised Orifice Data Folder Low DP Range maximum High DP Range Maximum

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 224 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Or.dp Xmtrs.1 Or.Exp Fac.1 Or Tapping.1 Or.CoD Eqn.1 Or.calc std.1 Or.mu pt.1 Or.mu eqn.1 Or.mu 0.1 Or.t 0.1 Or.t 1.1 Or Dt 0.1 Or.dt 0.1 Or.LD.1 Or.Ld.1 Or.K.1 Or.Linear.1 Or.qM max.1 Or.Preset CoD.1 Temp Up/Dn.1 Or.Hidp min.1 Or.Lodp min.1 Or.joule thomson.1 Or.K Equation.1 Or.K Ref.1 Or.hi2lo.1 Or.lo2hi.1 Or.K11.1 Or.K12.1 Or.K13.1 Or.K18.1 Or.K19.1 Or.K20.1 o 1 GOST Bluntness.1 TauT yr.1 TauT yr.1 TauY yr.1 TauY yr.1 ri.1 a.1 Length.1 Correction.1 da0.1 da1.1 da2.1 Da0.1 Da1.1 Da2.1 dpT.1 o1 Venturi Tube (Type1 and 2) Ven.Tube Type.1 Ven.Exp Fac.1 Ven Dt.1 Ven dt.1 Ven K.1 Ven Dyn Visc.1 Ven Pre loss.1 Ven Preset CoD.1 Ven LD.1 Ven Ld.1 Ven t 1.1 Ven t 0.1 o1 Coriolis rho WM.1 rho CS.1 rho WS.1 Coriolis Type.1 Coriolis ID.1 Use Coriolis Pulse Input.1 Coriolis Deviation.1 Coriolis Freq Scale.1 Coriolis Alarm Mask.1 Coriolis Freq Min.1 Coriolis Frequency.1 Coriolis Value.1 Number of DP transmitters 1 or 2 Expansion factor equation Upstream or Downstream Tappings calculation Flange, Corner or D+D/2 Coefficient of Discharge Calculation Reader Harris or Stolz Orifice Calculation ISO 5167, AGA 3 (1995), Preset, ISO5167/6976 or AGA3 (1965) Preset Value of Dynamic viscosity Dynamic viscosity calculated (Method 1), calculated (Method 2) or preset Reference Dynamic Viscosity Pipe Reference Temperature Orifice Reference Temperature Pipe Diameter in mm at reference Temperature Orifice Diameter in mm at reference Temperature Pipe Thermal expansion factor Orifice Thermal expansion Preset value of K Isentropic Exponent Linearity correction Off or 5 point Maximum Mass flow rate Preset Coefficient of Discharge Temperature measurement Upstream or Downstream High range DP minimum value Low range DP minimum value Preset value of Joule Thomson coefficient Calculate Specific Heats Ratio or Preset (Isentropic Exponent) Specific Heats calculation K reference value Dp High Range to Low range change over point in % of Dp Low Max. Dp Low Range to High range change over point in % of Dp Low Max. Dynamic viscosity Calculation Method 2 Constant K11 Dynamic viscosity Calculation Method 2 Constant K12 Dynamic viscosity Calculation Method 2 Constant K13 Specific Heats calculation K18 constant value Specific Heats calculation K19 constant value Specific Heats calculation K20 constant value Method of bluntness calculation Year of Calibration Month of Calibration Year of Calibration Month of Calibration Initial radius of the orifice plate entry edge Bluntness parameter Length of a linear section of the meter run Temperature correction method applied to the pipe Temperature correction factor Temperature correction factor Temperature correction factor Temperature correction factor Temperature correction factor Temperature correction factor Change in pressure over a length of run Venturi Tube Folder Venturi Tube Type As Cast, Machined, Rough Weld or Preset CoD Expansion Factor Upstream or Downstream Pipe Diameter in mm at Ref Temperature Throat Diameter in mm at Ref Temperature Isentropic Exponent Dynamic Viscosity Meter Pressure Loss Preset Coefficient of Discharge Thermal expansion factor of pipe Thermal expansion factor of Venturi Reference Temperature of pipe Reference Temperature of Venturi Coriolis Meter Folder Water Line Density in kg/m3 Condensate Base Density in kg/m3 Water Base Density in kg/m3 Coriolis meter Type Not Configured or RFT9739 Coriolis meter Modbus communication ID Coriolis meter Use pulse input or No pulse input Coriolis meter Deviation in kg between serial and pulse counters Coriolis meter Frequency Input Scaler Coriolis meter Alarm mask individual bit settings Coriolis meter Minimum Input Frequency in Hz Coriolis meter Pulse Output frequency in Hz Coriolis meter Pulse Output scaling value in kg

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 225 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Coriolis Use Reset.1 Coriolis Use Alarm.1 Coriolis Use Density.1 Coriolis Use Pressure.1 Coriolis Use Temperature.1 Coriolis Main Counter.1 Coriolis Deviation Time.1 o1 Wet Gas Equation (Type 1) rho calc.1 WGCEQsel.1 A0.1 A1.1 A2.1 A10.1 A11.1 A20.1 B0.1 B1.1 B2.1 B10.1 B11.1 B20.1 C0.1 C1.1 C2.1 C10.1 C11.1 C20.1 cdl.1 pllF.1 plsF.1 Wmf.1 Cmf.1 M.1 o 1 Constants A.1 B.1 C.1 o1 Wet Gas Equation (Type2) Wmf Gas.1 rhoC Std.1 CoD sel.1 o 1 Red Red1.1 RedN.1 Red10.1 o 1 Cod Cod1.1 CodN.1 Cod10.1 o 1 Constants A.1 B.1 C.1 D.1 E.1 F.1 G.1 H.1 J.1 YC.1 YW Liquid.1 YM.1 Expansion Equation.1 o1 API K0.1 K1.1 K2.1 PE.1 beta.1 Coriolis Meter Mode switches Use Meter Reset Yes or No Coriolis Meter Mode switches Use Meter Alarm Yes or No Coriolis Meter Mode switches Use Meter Density Yes or No Coriolis Meter Mode switches Use Meter Pressure Yes or No Coriolis Meter Mode switches Use Meter Temperature Yes or No Use Counter value from Serial Modbus or from Pulse Output Coriolis Meter Deviation between Pulse and serial time between checks Wet Gas Equation Folder Density calculation Use co-efficient or Use Tables. Wet Gas Cor. selection, Dickinson/Jamieson, Steven, Chisholm, Homogeneous or De Leeuw Gas Line Density Calculation coefficient Gas Line Density Calculation coefficient Gas Line Density Calculation coefficient Gas Line Density Calculation coefficient Gas Line Density Calculation coefficient Gas Line Density Calculation coefficient Liquid Line Density Calculation coefficient Liquid Line Density Calculation coefficient Liquid Line Density Calculation coefficient Liquid Line Density Calculation coefficient Liquid Line Density Calculation coefficient Liquid Line Density Calculation coefficient Gas Mass Fraction Calculation coefficient Gas Mass Fraction Calculation coefficient Gas Mass Fraction Calculation coefficient Gas Mass Fraction Calculation coefficient Gas Mass Fraction Calculation coefficient Gas Mass Fraction Calculation coefficient Pipe Diameter in mm at Ref Temperature Liquid Line Density (FLASH) in kg/m3 Liquid Base density (FLASH) in kg/m3 Water Mass Fraction Condensate Mass Fraction Murdock Calibration Factor default 1.26 Venturi Constants Folder Venturi throat parameter A Venturi throat parameter B Venturi throat parameter C Wet Gas Equation Type 2 Calculation folder Mass Fraction of Water (Gas phase) Standard Density for Condensate in kg/m3 Coefficient of Discharge calculation method Preset or Interpolated from Table Reynolds Number Folder Reynolds Number No.1 Reynolds Number No.N Reynolds Number No.10 Coefficient of Discharge Folder Coefficient of Discharge No. 1 Coefficient of Discharge No. N Coefficient of Discharge No. 10 Calculation Constants Folder Calculation Constant Calculation Constant Calculation Constant Calculation Constant Calculation Constant Calculation Constant Calculation Constant Calculation Constant Calculation Constant Condensate to Gas Mass ratio Water (Liquid Phase) to Gas Mass ratio Methanol to Gas Mass ratio Temp. correction None (downstrm), Upstrm (ISO5167 1997), Upstrm (ISO 5167 2003) API Constants folder API Constant K0 default 613.9723 API Constant K1 default 0 API Constant K2 default 0 Equilibrium Pressure Beta equation selection API 11.2.1(1984) or Alternative (Downer equation)

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 226 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


o1 Linearity Correction Linear Corr.1 o 1 Linearisation % Qmax 0.1 % Qmax N.1 % Qmax 19.1 %Er.rd 0.1 %Er.rd N.1 %Er.rd 19.1 o1 Table Z Factor o 1 Table Headings Temperature interval 1.1 Temperature interval N.1 Temperature interval 10.1 Pressure interval 1.1 Pressure interval N.1 Pressure interval 10.1 o 1 Table Values Z (P1 : T1).1 Z (PN : TN).1 Z (P10 : T10).1 o1 Liquid Data o 1 Specific Gravity Spec Grav.1 Sg Max.1 Sg Min.1 Sg High.1 Sg Low.1 o 1 Line Density Line Density.1 o 1 Base Density Rho S Select.1 Rho S Preset1 o 1 CTL SG Temp 0 F.1 SG Temp 20 F.1 SG Temp 40 F.1 SG Temp 60 F.1 SG Temp 80 F.1 SG Temp 100 F.1 SG Temp 125 F.1 SG Temp 150 F.1 SG Temp 200 F.1 SG Temp 250 F.1 SG Temp 300 F.1 o 1 CTS t 0.1 lambda m.1 Use CTS.1 o 1 CPS Dm.1 t.1 Em.1 p0.1 alpha t.1 K 0.1 K 1.1 K 2.1 Use CPS.1 o1 Density Table o 1 Table Headings Temperature Interval 1.1 Temperature Interval 10.1 Density Interval 1.1 Density Interval 10.1 Linearity Correction Folder Linearity Correction Stream 1 Linearisation Factors Flow rate point 0 in percent of Q max Flow rate point N in percent of Q max Flow rate point 19 in percent of Q max Percent Error in flow rate at point 0 Percent Error in flow rate at point N Percent Error in flow rate at point 19 Table Z Factor Folder Temperature and Pressure values for Z factor Table Temperature value 1 in Z factor table Temperature value N in Z factor table Temperature value 10 in Z factor table Pressure value 1 in Z factor table Pressure value N in Z factor table Pressure value 10 in Z factor table Z factor Table Values Table Z Factor value at Pressure 1 and Temperature 1 Table Z Factor value at Pressure N and Temperature N Table Z Factor value at Pressure 10 and Temperature 10 Liquid Data Folder Specific Gravity Folder Specific Gravity Value Specific Gravity Maximum Value Specific Gravity Minimum Value Specific Gravity High Alarm Value Specific Gravity Low Alarm Value Line Density Folder Line Density Value Base Density Folder Source of Rho S Value Low Range, High Range, Table or Preset Preset Value of Rho S CTL Folder Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 0 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 20 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 40 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 60 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 80 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 100 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 125 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 150 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 200 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 250 degrees F Specific Gravity Value at a temperature of 300 degrees F CTS Folder Reference Temperature Temperature coefficient of the Meter Body Use CTS Correction Yes or No CPS Folder Meter Inner Diameter in mm at Ref. Pressure and Temperature Wall thickness in mm at Ref. Pressure and Temperature Modulus of Elasticity of Meter Material in bar Reference Pressure Preset (not used) Coefficient of Thermal expansion of Liquid. API Constant K0 API Constant K1 API Constant K2 Use CPS Correction Yes or No Density Table Folder Temperature Interval Value 1.1 to Temperature Interval Value 10.1 Density Interval Value 1.1 to Density Interval Value 10.1

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 227 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


o 1 Table Values Density (1 : 1) .1 to Density (10 : 10) .1 o1 Mode E.calc.1 ATot en.1 Tot en.1 Tot Loq.1 Flw Loq.1 Vn Error Cntrs.1 Vn Normal Cntrs.1 Acc Alarm Low Flow.1 Non Acc Alarm Low Flow.1 Non Acc LED Low Flow.1 Stop Acc Alarm Flow Low.1 MM Preset Flow.1 Calc CO2.1 Reject Invalid Gas Composition.1 Dp High Acc.1 Dp Low Acc.1 o1 Base Conditions tb.1 pb.1 dens air.1 Gravity.1 o1 Equation Z type.1 Zn preset.1 Z preset.1 Zn hi.1 Zn lo.1 Hs.comb.1 Use rn.1 Normalisation.1 o1 Flow f min.1 Q max.1 Hi.q.1 Lo.q.1 Preset Flow.1 o1 Display Factors twfb.1 twfn.1 twfe.1 twfm.1 o1 Temperature te hi.1 te lo.1 te max.1 te min.1 te alm.1 te alm delay.1 te hi/lo hysteresis.1 te max/min hysteresis.1 o1 Pressure pr hi.1 pr lo.1 pr max.1 pr min.1 pr hi/lo hysteresis.1 pr max/min hysteresis.1 o1 Data Sources Component Source (Normal).1 Component Source (Error).1 Density Table Values Density Value 1 1 to (Table Maximum size 10 * 10 ) Density Value 10 10 Mode Switch Folder Energy Calculation using Hi or Hs Vb Alarm Totals enabled during an accountable alarm Vb Totals enabled during an accountable alarm Counters disabled when in Lo q condition Flow rates set to 0 (zero) when in Lo q condition Vn Alarm Totals enabled during an accountable alarm Vn Totals enabled during an accountable alarm Accountable alarms disabled when in low flow condition Non accountable alarms disabled when in low flow condition Non accountable alarm LED disabled when in low flow condition Stop any accountable alarm digital output when in low flow condition When in Maintenance Mode enable Preset Value of line flow rate Calculate CO2 Emission Factor Yes or No Reject ALL gas data if any single component is in alarm Yes or No Use Dp High Range Max and Min Alarms Yes or No Use Dp Low Range Max and Min Alarms Yes or No Base condition folder Temperature base Pressure base Base density of air Acceleration due to Gravity Compressibility Folder Z factor Equation type Zn preset value Z preset value Zn high alarm Zn low alarm Hs combustion temperature factor used (SGERG only) Input is rn (normal density convert to relative density Yes or No Normalisation is None, 100% or 100%-non-measured components Flow Folder f min cut-off value Q max value High q alarm level Low q alarm level Preset Flow rate for use in Maintenance Mode only (Must be enabled by Mode switch) Display scaling factor folder Stream Total scaling factor for Vb Totals Stream Total scaling factor for Vn Totals Stream Total scaling factor for E Totals Stream Total scaling factor for M Totals Temperature Folder Temperature stream 1 input High alarm Temperature stream 1 input Low alarm Temperature stream 1 input max alarm Temperature stream 1 input min alarm Temperature alarm value Temperature alarm delay in seconds Temperature Hi Lo alarm hysteresis value in deg C Temperature Max/Min alarm hysteresis value in deg C Pressure Folder Pressure stream 1 input High alarm Pressure stream 1 input Low alarm Pressure stream 1 input max alarm Pressure stream 1 input min alarm Pressure Hi Lo alarm hysteresis value in bara Pressure Max/Min alarm hysteresis value in bara Gas Data Sources Folder Gas component source in Normal operating conditions Chromat, Modbus, Analogue, Hourly Average or Daily Average Gas component source in Error or Alarm operating conditions

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 228 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Component Averages.1 Heating Value Source.1 Back up rd source.1 o1 Gas Data o 1 Keypad rd (Keypad).1 Hs (Keypad).1 Hi (Keypad).1 C (Keypad).1 N2 (Keypad).1 CO2 (Keypad).1 C2 (Keypad).1 C3 (Keypad).1 H2O (Keypad).1 H2S (Keypad).1 H2 (Keypad).1 CO (Keypad).1 O2 (Keypad).1 i-C4 (Keypad).1 n-C4 (Keypad).1 i-C5 (Keypad).1 n-C5 (Keypad).1 n-C6 (Keypad).1 n-C7 (Keypad).1 n-C8 (Keypad).1 n-C9 (Keypad).1 n-C10 (Keypad).1 He (Keypad).1 Ar (Keypad).1 neo-C5 (Keypad).1 IC6H14(Keypad) MC6H14(Keypad) NEO_C6H14(Keypad) DC6H14(Keypad) C2H4(Keypad) C3H6(Keypad) C4H8(Keypad) CC4H8(Keypad) TC4H8(Keypad) IC4H8(Keypad) PC5H10(Keypad) C3H4(Keypad) AC4H6(Keypad) BC4H6(Keypad) C2H2(Keypad) CC5H10(Keypad) MC6H12(Keypad) EC6H12(Keypad) C6H12(Keypad) MC7H14(Keypad) EC8H16(Keypad) C6H6(Keypad) C7H8(Keypad) EC8H10(Keypad) C8H10(Keypad) CH3OH(Keypad) CH4S(Keypad) NH3(Keypad) HCN(Keypad) OCS(Keypad) CS2(Keypad) rn (Keypad).1 o 1 Max rd (Low).1 o 1 Min rd (Min).1 o 1 High Keypad, Last Good Value, Chromat, Modbus , Analogue, Hourly Average or Daily Average Gas component averages source Chromat, Modbus or Analogue Heating Value (Hs and Hi) source (Orifice Density type only) Modbus or ISO 6976 Back up Relative Density source (Orifice Density type only) Modbus or ISO 6976 (This assumes rd meter is first choice) Gas Data Folders Gas Data Keypad Folder Keypad Value of Relative Density Keypad Value of Superior Heating Keypad Value of Inferior Heating Keypad Value of Methane Keypad Value of Nitrogen Keypad Value of Carbon Dioxide Keypad Value of Ethane Keypad Value of Propane Keypad Value of Water Vapour Keypad Value of Hydrogen Sulphide Keypad Value of Hydrogen Keypad Value of Carbon Monoxide Keypad Value of Oxygen Keypad Value of i-Butane Keypad Value of n-Butane Keypad Value of i-Pentane Keypad Value of n-Pentane Keypad Value of n-Hexane Keypad Value of n-Heptane Keypad Value of n-Octane Keypad Value of n-Nonane Keypad Value of n-Decane Keypad Value of Helium Keypad Value of Argon Keypad Value of neo-Pentane Keypad Value of 2, Methylpentane Keypad Value of 3, Methylpentane Keypad Value of 2,2, Dimethylbutane Keypad Value of 2,3, Dimethylbutane Keypad Value of Ethylene Keypad Value of Propylene Keypad Value of 1, Butene Keypad Value of cis 2 Butene Keypad Value of trans 2 Butene Keypad Value of 2 Methylpropene Keypad Value of 1 Pentene Keypad Value of Propadiene Keypad Value of 1,2 Butadiene Keypad Value of 1,3 Butadiene Keypad Value of Acetylene Keypad Value of Cyclopentane Keypad Value of Methylcyclopentane Keypad Value of Ethylcyclopentane Keypad Value of Cyclohexane Keypad Value of Methylcyclohexane Keypad Value of Ethylcyclohexane Keypad Value of Benzene Keypad Value of Toluene Keypad Value of Ethylbenzene Keypad Value of 0 Xylene Keypad Value of Methanol Keypad Value of Methanethion Keypad Value of Ammonia Keypad Value of Hydrogen Cyanide Keypad Value of Carbonyl sulphide Keypad Value of Carbon disulphide Normal Density Keypad Value Gas Data Maximum folder Relative Density Max Value etc. Gas Data Minimum folder Relative Density Min Value etc. Gas Data High Alarm folder

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 229 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


rd (High).1 o 1 Low rd (Low).1 o 1 CATS Data o1 Calorific Values o1 Superior C (Hs Cats).1 N2 (Hs Cats).1 CO2 (Hs Cats).1 C2 (Hs Cats).1 C3 (Hs Cats).1 H2O (Hs Cats).1 H2S (Hs Cats).1 H2 (Hs Cats).1 CO (Hs Cats).1 O2 (Hs Cats).1 i-C4 (Hs Cats).1 n-C4 (Hs Cats).1 i-C5 (Hs Cats).1 n-C5 (Hs Cats).1 n-C6 (Hs Cats).1 n-C7 (Hs Cats).1 n-C8 (Hs Cats).1 n-C9 (Hs Cats).1 n-C10 (Hs Cats).1 He (Hs Cats).1 Ar (Hs Cats).1 neo-C5 (Hs Cats).1 o1 Inferior C (Hi Cats).1 N2 (Hi Cats).1 CO2 (Hi Cats).1 C2 (Hi Cats).1 C3 (Hi Cats).1 H2O (Hi Cats).1 H2S (Hi Cats).1 H2 (Hi Cats).1 CO (Hi Cats).1 O2 (Hi Cats).1 i-C4 (Hi Cats).1 n-C4 (Hi Cats).1 i-C5 (Hi Cats).1 n-C5 (Hi Cats).1 n-C6 (Hi Cats).1 n-C7 (Hi Cats).1 n-C8 (Hi Cats).1 n-C9 (Hi Cats).1 n-C10 (Hi Cats).1 He (Hi Cats).1 Ar (Hi Cats).1 neo-C5 (Hi Cats).1 o 1 ISO 5167/6976 Data Z air.1 o1 Calorific Values o1 Superior C (Hs).1 N2 (Hs).1 CO2 (Hs).1 C2 (Hs).1 C3 (Hs).1 H2O (Hs).1 H2S (Hs).1 H2 (Hs).1 CO (Hs).1 O2 (Hs).1 i-C4 (Hs).1 n-C4 (Hs).1 i-C5 (Hs).1 n-C5 (Hs).1 n-C6 (Hs).1 Relative Density High Value etc. Gas Data Low Alarm folder Relative Density Low Value etc. CATS Data Folder CATS Calorific Values for Gas Components Gas Data Component Superior Heating Value Folder Methane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Nitrogen Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon Dioxide Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Propane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Water Vapour Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Sulphide Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon Monoxide Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Oxygen Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol i-Butane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Butane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol i-Pentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Pentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Hexane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Heptane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Octane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Nonane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Decane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Helium Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Argon Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol neo-Pentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Gas Data Component Inferior Heating Value Folder Methane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Nitrogen Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon Dioxide Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Propane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Water Vapour Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Sulphide Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon Monoxide Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Oxygen Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol i-Butane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Butane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol i-Pentane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Pentane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Hexane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Heptane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Octane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Nonane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Decane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Helium Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Argon Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol neo-Pentane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Gas Component Data for ISO 6976 calculation Compressibility of Air at Base conditions Calorific Values for Gas Components Gas Data Component Superior Heating Value Folder Methane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Nitrogen Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon Dioxide Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Propane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Water Vapour Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Sulphide Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon Monoxide Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Oxygen Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol i-Butane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Butane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol i-Pentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Pentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Hexane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 230 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


n-C7 (Hs).1 n-C8 (Hs).1 n-C9 (Hs).1 n-C10 (Hs).1 He (Hs).1 Ar (Hs).1 neo-C5 (Hs).1 IC6H14(Hs) MC6H14(Hs) NEO_C6H14(Hs) DC6H14(Hs) C2H4(Hs) C3H6(Hs) C4H8(Hs) CC4H8(Hs) TC4H8(Hs) IC4H8(Hs) PC5H10(Hs) C3H4(Hs) AC4H6(Hs) BC4H6(Hs) C2H2(Hs) CC5H10(Hs) MC6H12(Hs) EC6H12(Hs) C6H12(Hs) MC7H14(Hs) EC8H16(Hs) C6H6(Hs) C7H8(Hs) EC8H10(Hs) C8H10(Hs) CH3OH(Hs) CH4S(Hs) NH3(Hs) HCN(Hs) OCS(Hs) CS2(Hs) o1 Inferior C (Hi).1 N2 (Hi).1 CO2 (Hi).1 C2 (Hi).1 C3 (Hi).1 H2O (Hi).1 H2S (Hi).1 H2 (Hi).1 CO (Hi).1 O2 (Hi).1 i-C4 (Hi).1 n-C4 (Hi).1 i-C5 (Hi).1 n-C5 (Hi).1 n-C6 (Hi).1 n-C7 (Hi).1 n-C8 (Hi).1 n-C9 (Hi).1 n-C10 (Hi).1 He (Hi).1 Ar (Hi).1 neo-C5 (Hi).1 IC6H14(Hi) MC6H14(Hi) NEO_C6H14(Hi) DC6H14(Hi) C2H4(Hi) C3H6(Hi) C4H8(Hi) CC4H8(Hi) TC4H8(Hi) IC4H8(Hi) PC5H10(Hi) C3H4(Hi) AC4H6(Hi) BC4H6(Hi) C2H2(Hi) n-Heptane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Octane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Nonane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Decane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Helium Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Argon Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol neo-Pentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 2, Methylpentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 3, Methylpentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 2,2, Dimethylbutane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 2,3, Dimethylbutane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethylene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Propylene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 1, Butene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol cis 2 Butene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol trans 2 Butene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 2 Methylpropene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 1 Pentene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Propadiene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 1,2 Butadiene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 1,3 Butadiene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Acetylene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Cyclopentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Methylcyclopentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethylcyclopentane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Cyclohexane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Methylcyclohexane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethylcyclohexane Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Benzene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Toluene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethylbenzene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol 0 Xylene Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Methanol Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Methanethion Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ammonia Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Cyanide Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbonyl sulphide Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon disulphide Superior Heating Value in KJ/mol Gas Data Component Inferior Heating Value Folder Methane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Nitrogen Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon Dioxide Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Propane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Water Vapour Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Sulphide Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon Monoxide Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Oxygen Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol i-Butane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Butane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol i-Pentane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Pentane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Hexane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Heptane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Octane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Nonane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol n-Decane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Helium Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Argon Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol neo-Pentane Value Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 2, Methylpentane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 3, Methylpentane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 2,2, Dimethylbutane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 2,3, Dimethylbutane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethylene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Propylene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 1, Butene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol cis 2 Butene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol trans 2 Butene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 2 Methylpropene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 1 Pentene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Propadiene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 1,2 Butadiene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 1,3 Butadiene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Acetylene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 231 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


CC5H10(Hi) MC6H12(Hi) EC6H12(Hi) C6H12(Hi) MC7H14(Hi) EC8H16(Hi) C6H6(Hi) C7H8(Hi) EC8H10(Hi) C8H10(Hi) CH3OH(Hi) CH4S(Hi) NH3(Hi) HCN(Hi) OCS(Hi) CS2(Hi) o1 Root B C (Root B).1 N2 (Root B).1 CO2 (Root B).1 C2 (Root B).1 C3 (Root B).1 H2O (Root B).1 H2S (Root B).1 H2 (Root B).1 CO (Root B).1 O2 (Root B).1 i-C4 (Root B).1 n-C4 (Root B).1 i-C5 (Root B).1 n-C5 (Root B).1 n-C6 (Root B).1 n-C7 (Root B).1 n-C8 (Root B).1 n-C9 (Root B).1 n-C10 (Root B).1 He (Root B).1 Ar (Root B).1 neo-C5 (Root B).1 IC6H14(Root B) MC6H14(Root B) NEO_C6H14(Root B) DC6H14(Root B) C2H4(Root B) C3H6(Root B) C4H8(Root B) CC4H8(Root B) TC4H8(Root B) IC4H8(Root B) PC5H10(Root B) C3H4(Root B) AC4H6(Root B) BC4H6(Root B) C2H2(Root B) CC5H10(Root B) MC6H12(Root B) EC6H12(Root B) C6H12(Root B) MC7H14(Root B) EC8H16(Root B) C6H6(Root B) C7H8(Root B) EC8H10(Root B) C8H10(Root B) CH3OH(Root B) CH4S(Root B) NH3(Root B) HCN(Root B) OCS(Root B) CS2(Root B) Mass/Volume Based.1 Chrm Str.1 o1 Multiple Transmitters Cyclopentane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Methylcyclopentane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethylcyclopentane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Cyclohexane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Methylcyclohexane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethylcyclohexane Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Benzene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Toluene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ethylbenzene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol 0 Xylene Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Methanol Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Methanethion Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Ammonia Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Hydrogen Cyanide Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbonyl sulphide Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Carbon disulphide Inferior Heating Value in KJ/mol Gas Data Component Square Root of B Value Folder Methane Square Root of B Value Nitrogen Square Root of B Value Carbon Dioxide Superior Heating Value Ethane Square Root of B Value Propane Square Root of B Value Water Vapour Square Root of B Value Hydrogen Sulphide Square Root of B Value Hydrogen Square Root of B Value Carbon Monoxide Square Root of B Value Oxygen Square Root of B Value i-Butane Square Root of B Value n-Butane Square Root of B Value i-Pentane Square Root of B Value n-Pentane Square Root of B Value n-Hexane Square Root of B Value n-Heptane Square Root of B Value n-Octane Square Root of B Value n-Nonane Square Root of B Value n-Decane Square Root of B Value Helium Square Root of B Value Argon Square Root of B Value neo-Pentane Square Root of B Value 2, Methylpentane Square Root of B Value 3, Methylpentane Square Root of B Value 2,2, Dimethylbutane Square Root of B Value 2,3, Dimethylbutane Square Root of B Value Ethylene Square Root of B Value Propylene Square Root of B Value 1, Butene Square Root of B Value cis 2 Butene Square Root of B Value trans 2 Butene Square Root of B Value 2 Methylpropene Square Root of B Value 1 Pentene Square Root of B Value Propadiene Square Root of B Value 1,2 Butadiene Square Root of B Value 1,3 Butadiene Square Root of B Value Acetylene Square Root of B Value Cyclopentane Square Root of B Value Methylcyclopentane Square Root of B Value Ethylcyclopentane Square Root of B Value l Cyclohexane Square Root of B Value Methylcyclohexane Square Root of B Value Ethylcyclohexane Square Root of B Value Benzene Square Root of B Value Toluene Square Root of B Value Ethylbenzene Square Root of B Value 0 Xylene Square Root of B Value Methanol Square Root of B Value Methanethion Square Root of B Value Ammonia Square Root of B Value Hydrogen Cyanide Square Root of B Value Carbonyl sulphide Square Root of B Value Carbon disulphide Square Root of B Value Heating Value Calculation based upon Volume or Mass Gas Chromatograph Stream Number none or 1 to 12 to be used Multiple transmitters folder

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 232 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


o 1 Pressure MT.pr Sensors.1 MT.pr Deviation.1 o1 Selections MT.pr sel 1.1 MT.pr sel 2.1 MT.pr sel 3.1 MT.pr sel 4.1 MT.pr sel 5.1 MT.pr sel 6.1 MT.pr Keypad.1 MT.pr r1.1 MT.pr r2.1 MT.pr r3.1 MT.pr off1.1 MT.pr off2.1 MT.pr off3.1 MT.pr dev Timeout.1 MT.pr Ave.dev.1 o 1 Temperature MT.te Sensors.1 MT.te Deviation.1 o1 Selections MT.te sel 1.1 MT.te sel 2.1 MT.te sel 3.1 MT.te sel 4.1 MT.te sel 5.1 MT.te sel 6.1 MT.te Keypad.1 MT.te r1.1 MT.te r2.1 MT.te r3.1 MT.te off1.1 MT.te off2.1 MT.te off3.1 MT.te dev Timeout.1 MT.te Ave.dev.1 o 1 Dp High MT.dp hi Sensors.1 MT.dp hi Deviation.1 o1 Selections MT.dp hi sel 1.1 MT.dp hi sel 2.1 MT.dp hi sel 3.1 MT.dp hi sel 4.1 MT.dp hi sel 5.1 MT. dp hi sel 6.1 MT.dp hi Key.1 MT.dp hi hi.1 MT.dp hi lo.1 MT.dp hi dev Timeout.1 MT.dp hi Ave.dev.1 o 1 Dp Low MT.dp lo Sensors.1 MT.dp lo Deviation.1 o1 Selections MT.dp lo sel 1.1 MT.dp lo sel 2.1 MT.dp lo sel 3.1 MT.dp lo sel 4.1 MT.dp lo sel 5.1 MT.dp lo sel 6.1 MT.dp.lo Key.1 MT.dp lo hi .1 MT.dp lo lo.1 MT.dp lo dev Timeout.1 MT.dp lo Ave.dev.1 o1 Units Pressure Folder Number of Sensors to be used 1, 2 or 3 Deviation between sensors Selection order folder 1st choice pressure used value 2nd choice pressure used value 3rd choice pressure used value 4th choice pressure used value 5th choice pressure used value 6th choice pressure used value Pressure Keypad Value Pressure sensor 1 range calibration value Pressure sensor 2 range calibration value Pressure sensor 3 range calibration value Pressure sensor 1 offset calibration value Pressure sensor 2 offset calibration value Pressure sensor 3 offset calibration value Timeout before Deviation is indicated Deviation from Average before an alarm is indicated Temperature Folder Number of Sensors to be used 1, 2 or 3 Deviation between sensors Selection order folder 1st choice pressure used value 2nd choice pressure used value 3rd choice pressure used value 4th choice pressure used value 5th choice pressure used value 6th choice pressure used value Temperature Keypad Value Temperature sensor 1 range calibration value Temperature sensor 2 range calibration value Temperature sensor 3 range calibration value Temperature sensor 1 offset calibration value Temperature sensor 2 offset calibration value Temperature sensor 3 offset calibration value Timeout before Deviation is indicated Deviation from Average before an alarm is indicated DP High range Folder Number of Sensors to be used 1, 2 or 3 Deviation between sensors Selection order folder 1st choice pressure used value 2nd choice pressure used value 3rd choice pressure used value 4th choice pressure used value 5th choice pressure used value 6th choice pressure used value DP High range Keypad value DP High range High alarm value DP High range Low alarm value Timeout before Deviation is indicated Deviation from Average before an alarm is indicated DP Low range Folder Number of Sensors to be used 1, 2 or 3 Deviation between sensors Selection order folder 1st choice pressure used value 2nd choice pressure used value 3rd choice pressure used value 4th choice pressure used value 5th choice pressure used value 6th choice pressure used value DP Low range Keypad value DP Low range High alarm value DP Low range Low alarm value Timeout before Deviation is indicated Deviation from Average before an alarm is indicated Units Folder

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 233 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Pressure Units.1 Abs/Gau.1 p atmos.1 Temperature Units.1 Density Units.1 No Pressure DPs.1 No Temperature DPs.1 No DP Hi DPs.1 No DP Lo DPs.1 dp Units.1 rd Sig Fig..1 gasdata Sig Fig..1 Hs Sig Fig..1 o1 Density o 1 Density.1 o1 Solartron Preset Data o1 Density coefficients K0m1.1 K1m1.1 K2m1.1 K3m1.1 K4m1.1 K5m1.1 K6m1.1 K18m1.1 K19m1.1 Am1.1 o1 Calculated Calibration Gas Coefficients KVos m1.1 K1cc m1.1 K2cc m1.1 K3cc m1.1 K4cc m1.1 o1 Specific Heat SH Source.m1.1 SH K18.m1.1 SH K19.m1.1 SH K20.m1.1 Y0 m1.1 Preset Cc m1.1 Preset Cg m1.1 Calc or use preset Cc m1.1 Calc or use preset Cg m1.1 Calc or ignore pt m1.1 Density Correction m1.1 Dens High m1.1 Dens Low m1.1 Freq Offset m1.1 Calibration Temperature m1.1 o1 Sarasota Preset Data D0 m1.1 K m1.1 T0 m1.1 Tco.m1.1 Pco.m1.1 Tcal.m1.1 Pcal.m1.1 Equationl.m1.1 Density Hi/Lo Hysteresis.m1.1 Temp Source.m1.1 Temp Max.m1.1 Temp Min.m1.1 Temp Keypad.m1.11 o 0 Density.2 o 1 Density Selection Dens sel 1.1 Dens sel 2.1 Dens sel 3.1 Pressure Units used ,bar, Mpa, Kpa, kg/cm2 or psi Pressure Absolute or Gauge Mean Atmospheric pressure Temperature Units in C, F or K Density Units Pressure Display number of decimal places Temperature Display number of decimal places DP High range Display number of decimal places DP Low range Display number of decimal places DP Units used, bar, mbar or psi Relative Density Number of Significant Figures Gas Data Number of Significant Figures Heating Value Number of Significant Figures Density Folder Density Sensor 1Folder Solartron Preset Data Folder Density coefficients folder Density coefficient K0 Density coefficient K1 Density coefficient K2 Density coefficient K3 Density coefficient K4 Density coefficient K5 Density coefficient K6 Density coefficient K18 Density coefficient K19 Density coefficient A Gas coefficients folder Density coefficient K Vos Density coefficient K1cc Density coefficient K2cc Density coefficient K3cc Density coefficient K4cc Specific Heat Calculation Folder Specific Heat Source Preset or Calculated Specific Heat coefficient K18 Specific Heat coefficient K19 Specific Heat coefficient K20 Density coefficient Y0 Preset Velocity of sound in calibration gas Preset Velocity of sound in flowing gas Calculated or preset velocity of sound in calibration gas Calculated or preset velocity of sound in flowing gas Calculate temperature correction for Density Yes or No Calculate Velocity of sound correction for density Yes , No or User Equations Density High Alarm value Density Low Alarm value Frequency offset value Density Calibration Temperature value Sarasota Preset Data Folder Density coefficient D0 Density coefficient K Density coefficient T0 Temperature coefficient Pressure coefficient Calibration Temperature Calibration Pressure Sensor Type Solartron or Sarasota Density Hi/Lo Alarm Hysteresis Density temp. correction source, Keypad, upstrm, downstrm or internal Density temperature Maximum value Density temperature Minimum value Density temperature Keypad value Density Sensor 2 Folder (Duplicate of Stream 1) Density Selection Data Folder 1st choice density used value 2nd choice density used value 3rd choice density used value

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 234 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Dens sel 4.1 Dens sel 5.1 Dens sel 6.1 Number of Meters.1 Density Deviation.1 Density Keypad.1 Density Max.1 Density Min.1 o1 Relative Density K0.1 K2.1 Use Rel Dens meter.1 rd Deviation.1 K Values.1 Gx.1 Gy.1 Tx.1 Ty.1 o 0 Stream 2 o 0 Stream 3 o 1 Chromat Chromat type Chromat ID Chromat Time Chromat Status Chromat C6code Chromat hex Chromat hept Chromat oct Chromat non Chromat dec Chromat i-C5 Chromat n-C5 Chromat neo-C5 Chromat str Chromat Use Time o1 Addresses N2 addr CO2 addr RD addr HS addr HI addr C addr C2 addr C3 addr i-C4 addr n-C4 addr i-C5 addr n-C5 addr C6+ addr wobbe.s addr o1 Max N2 max CO2 max RD max HS max HI max C max C2 max C3 max i-C4 max n-C4 max i-C5 max n-C5 max C6+ max wobbe.s max o1 Min N2 min CO2 min RD min HS min 4th choice density used value 5th choice density used value 6th choice density used value Number of Density Meters 1 or 2 Density Deviation between sources Density Keypad value Density Maximum Alarm value Density Minimum Alarm value Relative Density Folder Relative Density coefficient K0 Relative Density coefficient K2 Use Frequency type Relative Density Meter Yes or No Relative Density deviation between sources K0 and K2 Preset or Calculated Constant Gx Constant Gy Constant Tx Constant Ty Stream 2 Duplicate of Stream 1 Stream 3 Duplicate of Stream 1 Chromatograph folder Chromatograph type Chromatograph Modbus communication ID Chromatograph read interval Use or ignore Chromatograph status information C6+ location code Percentage of Hexane in the C6+ or C5+ value Percentage of Heptane in the C6+ or C5+ value Percentage of Octane in the C6+ or C5+ value Percentage of Nonane in the C6+ or C5+ value Percentage of Decane in the C6+ or C5+ value Percentage of i-Pentane in the C5+ value Percentage of n-Pentane in the C5+ value Percentage of neo-Pentane in the C5+ value Chromat Stream Number Used or Ignore (ABB Optichrome 4 Stream Only) Use Chromat Time to update M2000 Yes or No (OSC-01-E Only) Modbus Gas Address Folder (Siemens Optichrome Only) Modbus Address for N2 value Modbus Address for CO2 value Modbus Address for Relative Density value Modbus Address for Hs value Modbus Address for Hi value Modbus Address for Methane value Modbus Address for Ethane value Modbus Address for Propane value Modbus Address for i-Butane value Modbus Address for n-Butane value Modbus Address for i-Pentane value Modbus Address for n-Pentane value Modbus Address for C6+ value Modbus Address for wobbe s value Maximum Scaling factor Folder (Siemens Optichrome Only) Maximum scaled value for N2 Maximum scaled value for CO2 Maximum scaled value for Relative Density Maximum scaled value for Hs Maximum scaled value for Hi Maximum scaled value for Methane Maximum scaled value for Ethane Maximum scaled value for Propane Maximum scaled value for i-Butane Maximum scaled value for n-Butane Maximum scaled value for i-Pentane Maximum scaled value for n-Pentane Maximum scaled value for C6+ Maximum scaled value for wobbe s Minimum Scaling factor Folder (Siemens Optichrome Only) Minimum scaled value for N2 Minimum scaled value for CO2 Minimum scaled value for Relative Density Minimum scaled value for Hs

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 235 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


HI min C min C2 min C3 min i-C4 min n-C4 min i-C5 min n-C5 min C6+ min wobbe.s min Data FS Status FS Analyser ChAlive Calibration Address Reset Address Use Chromat rn Write time to encal o1 Encal Component Codes Component 1 Component 2 Component 3 Component 4 Component 5 Component 6 Component 7 Component 8 Component 9 Component 10 Component 11 Component 12 Component 13 Component 14 Component 15 Component 16 Component 17 Component 18 Component 19 Component 20 Component 21 Component 22 Component 23 Component 24 o 1 Ensonic o1 Significant Digits SD Sequence number o 1 Calculation Data SD Calc Avg Z SD Calc Avg RD SD Calc Avg Wobbe SD Calc Avg hs SD Calc Avg hi SD Calc Avg CO2 SD Calc Avg Density SD Calc Output Z SD Calc Output RD SD Calc Output Wobbe SD Calc Output hs SD Calc Output hi SD Calc Output CO2 SD Calc Output Density SD Calc Input Th SD Calc Input Ph SD Calc Input Pl SD Calc Input VOSh SD Calc Input VOSl SD US H VCalc SD US L VCalc SD Q Total SD IPB T Temp SD IPB H Temp SD IPB L Temp SD CO2 Pres Minimum scaled value for Hi Minimum scaled value for Methane Minimum scaled value for Ethane Minimum scaled value for Propane Minimum scaled value for i-Butane Minimum scaled value for n-Butane Minimum scaled value for i-Pentane Minimum scaled value for n-Pentane Minimum scaled value for C6+ Minimum scaled value for wobbe s Full scale scaling factor for all data Full scale scaling factor for status data Analyser Number Send Keep Alive command Yes or No Modbus address for Calibration command (ENSONIC Only) Modbus address for Reset command (ENSONIC Only) Use the Value of rn received from the Gas Chromatograph Yes or No Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Component code for the Encal 3000 Ensonic Folder Significant Digits Folder Calculation Data Folder

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 236 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


o 1 Gas Composition SD Avg Nitrogen SD Avg Methane SD Avg Ethane SD Avg Propane SD Avg i-Butane SD Avg n-Butane SD Avg i-Pentane SD Avg n-Pentane SD Avg n-Hexane SD Avg n-Heptane SD Avg n-Octane SD Avg Helium o1 Minimum o 1 Calculation Data Min Calc Avg Z Min Calc Avg RD Min Calc Avg Wobbe Min Calc Avg hs Min Calc Avg hi Min Calc Avg CO2 Min Calc Avg Density Min Calc Output Z Min Calc Output RD Min Calc Output Wobbe Min Calc Output hs Min Calc Output hi Min Calc Output CO2 Min Calc Output Density Min Calc Input Th Min Calc Input Ph Min Calc Input Pl Min Calc Input VOSh Min Calc Input VOSl Min US H VCalc Min US L VCalc Min Q Total Min IPB T Temp Min IPB H Temp Min IPB L Temp Min CO2 Pres o 1 Gas Composition Min Avg Nitrogen Min Avg Methane Min Avg Ethane Min Avg Propane Min Avg i-Butane Min Avg n-Butane Min Avg i-Pentane Min Avg n-Pentane Min Avg n-Hexane Min Avg n-Heptane Min Avg n-Octane Min Avg Helium o1 Maximum o 1 Calculation Data Max Calc Avg Z Max Calc Avg RD Max Calc Avg Wobbe Max Calc Avg hs Max Calc Avg hi Max Calc Avg CO2 Max Calc Avg Density Max Calc Output Z Max Calc Output RD Max Calc Output Wobbe Max Calc Output hs Max Calc Output hi Max Calc Output CO2 Max Calc Output Density Max Calc Input Th Max Calc Input Ph Gas Composition Folder

Minimum Folder Calculation Data Folder

Gas Composition Folder

Maximum Folder Calculation Data Folder

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 237 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Max Calc Input Pl Max Calc Input VOSh Max Calc Input VOSl Max US H VCalc Max US L VCalc Max Q Total Max IPB T Temp Max IPB H Temp Max IPB L Temp Max CO2 Pres o 1 Gas Composition Max Avg Nitrogen Max Avg Methane Max Avg Ethane Max Avg Propane Max Avg i-Butane Max Avg n-Butane Max Avg i-Pentane Max Avg n-Pentane Max Avg n-Hexane Max Avg n-Heptane Max Avg n-Octane Max Avg Helium o 1 Units Energy Units Metric/Imperial Mass Units Input Energy Units

Gas Composition Folder

Units Folder Calculation Energy Units GJ/m3, MJ/m3, kWh/m3, kcal/m3, thrms/m3 or btu Volume Units in Metric or Imperial Units Mass Units in Metric or Imperial Units Units of Energy received as Input (same selection as Calculation Energy Units

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 238 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE 5.2. ACTIVE DATA
Active Data Folder PID Controller Folder Value of PID Output 1 Value of PID Output 2 Value of PID Output 3 Grab Sampler Folder Sampler 1 Folder Current calculated Volume in sample can. Current Volume between each sample. Volume since last sample taken. Remaining Volume required to fill the sample cylinder Number of grabs taken per mass/volume unit Total number of sample pulses required to fill can Number of pulse taken so far Number of pulse needed from present to fill can Sampler 1 Alarms Sampler 1 Latched current hour alarms Sampler 1 Latched current day alarms Sampler 1 Latched previous (last) hour alarms Sampler 1 Latched previous (last) day alarms Value of Can level indication Indicates when a sample taken, Output on (1) during sample otherwise off (0) Number of Samples taken Current calculated volume in the sample cylinder Current Status of Sampler Current Volume between each sample (Large Units) Volume since last sample taken (Large Units) Number of grabs taken per mass/volume unit (Large Units) Sampler 2 (Duplicate of Sampler 1) Lubrication Folder Lubrication 1 Folder Indicates if the current lubrication module is active Indicates if the output to the lubrication system is active Strokes remaining in the current lubrication cycle Strokes made in the current lubrication cycle Number of piston pulses received in the current lubrication cycle Time the lubrication cycle last started Time the lubrication cycle last finished Lubrication module alarm Time remaining before pressure alarm is activated Total number of pulses since last lubrication ended Number of pulses remaining before next lubrication cycle starts Station Folder Modbus Gas Data Received Relative density Superior Heating Value Inferior Heating Value Methane Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide Ethane Propane Water Vapour Hydrogen Sulphide Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide Oxygen i-Butane n-Butane i-Pentane n-Pentane n-Hexane n-Heptane n-Octane n-Nonane n-Decane Helium Argon Wobbe Index (Superior) Wobbe Index (Inferior) neo-Pentane o 1 Active Data o 1 PID Controller PID output 1 PID output 2 PID output 3 o 1 Grab Sampler o1 Sampler 1 Current Volume.1 Sample Volume.1 Running Volume.1 Remaining Volume.1 Sample Rate.1 Required Pulses.1 Current Pulses.1 Remaining Pulses.1 Alarm.1 Alarm.La.Cur.Hr.1 Alarm.La.Cur.Dy.1 Alarm.La.Last.Hr.1 Alarm.La.Last.Dy.1 Can Input.1 Grab Now.1 Sample Count.1 Estimated Volume.1 Status.1 Large Sample Volume.1 Large Running Volume.1 Large Sample Rate.1 o0 Sampler 2 o 1 Lubrication Module o1 Lubrication 1 Active Output Strokes remaining Strokes made Piston Inputs Last lubrication start Last lubrication end Alarm Pressure Current Pulse Total Pulses Remaining o 1 Station o1 Modbus Gas Data Received rd(Modbus Rec) Hs(Modbus Rec) Hi(Modbus Rec) C(Modbus Rec) N2(Modbus Rec) CO2(Modbus Rec) C2(Modbus Rec) C3(Modbus Rec) H2O(Modbus Rec) H2S(Modbus Rec) H2(Modbus Rec) CO(Modbus Rec) O2(Modbus Rec) i-C4(Modbus Rec) n-C4(Modbus Rec) i-C5(Modbus Rec) n-C5(Modbus Rec) n-C6(Modbus Rec) n-C7(Modbus Rec) n-C8(Modbus Rec) n-C9(Modbus Rec) n-C10(Modbus Rec) He(Modbus Rec) Ar(Modbus Rec) WOBBE.S(Modbus Rec) WOBBE.I(Modbus Rec) NeoC5(Modbus Rec)

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 239 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


C6+(Modbus Rec) RN(Modbus Rec) o1 Analog Gas Data Received rd(Analog Rec) Hs(Analog Rec) Hi(Analog Rec) C(Analog Rec) N2(Analog Rec) CO2(Analog Rec) C2(Analog Rec) C3(Analog Rec) H2O(Analog Rec) H2S(Analog Rec) H2(Analog Rec) CO(Analog Rec) O2(Analog Rec) i-C4(Analog Rec) n-C4(Analog Rec) i-C5(Analog Rec) n-C5(Analog Rec) n-C6(Analog Rec) n-C7(Analog Rec) n-C8(Analog Rec) n-C9(Analog Rec) n-C10(Analog Rec) He(Analog Rec) Ar(Analog Rec) WOBBE.S(Analog Rec) WOBBE.I(Analog Rec) NeoC5(Analog Rec) C6+(Analog Rec) RN(Analog Rec) o1 Station Alarms o 1 Normal Modbus Alarm EG Status Stn Pres 1 Alarm Stn Temp 1 Alarm Stn Pres 2 Alarm Stn Temp 2 Alarm o 1 Latched o1 Current o1 Hourly Modbus Alarm.La.Cur.Hr EG Status.La.Cur.Hr Stn Pres 1 Alarm.La.Cur.Hr Stn Temp 1 Alarm.La.Cur.Hr Stn Pres 2 Alarm.La.Cur.Hr Stn Temp 2 Alarm.La.Cur.Hr o1 Daily Modbus Alarm.La.Cur.Dy EG Status.La.Cur.Dy Stn Pres 1 Alarm.La.Cur.Dy Stn Temp 1 Alarm.La.Cur.Dy Stn Pres 2 Alarm.La.Cur.Dy Stn Temp 2 Alarm.La.Cur.Dy o1 Last o1 Hourly Modbus Alarm.La.Last.Hr EG Status.La.Last.Hr Stn Pres 1 Alarm.La.Last.Hr Stn Temp 1 Alarm.La.Last.Hr Stn Pres 2 Alarm.La.Last.Hr Stn Temp 2 Alarm.La.Last.Hr o1 Daily Modbus Alarm.La.Last.Dy EG Status.La.Last.Dy Stn Pres 1 Alarm.La.Last.Dy Stn Temp 1 Alarm.La.Last.Dy Stn Pres 2 Alarm.La.Last.Dy Stn Temp 2 Alarm.La.Cur.Dy C6+ Normal density Analog Gas Data Received Relative density Superior Heating Value Inferior Heating Value Methane Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide Ethane Propane Water Vapour Hydrogen Sulphide Hydrogen Carbon Monoxide Oxygen i-Butane n-Butane i-Pentane n-Pentane n-Hexane n-Heptane n-Octane n-Nonane n-Decane Helium Argon Wobbe Index (Superior) Wobbe Index (Inferior) neo-Pentane C6+ Normal density Station Alarms Folder Normal alarms Modbus Write Timeout Alarm (i.e. No Modbus write has occurred within a set time period) General Alarm Register bit 0 General, bit1 Str1, bit2 Str2, bit3 Str3 bits 4-15 not used Station Pressure 1 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 1 Input Alarm status Station Pressure 2 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 2 Input Alarm status Latched Alarms Current Time period Hours Modbus Write Timeout Alarm (i.e. No Modbus write has occurred within a set time period) General Alarm Register bit 0 General, bit1 Str1, bit2 Str2, bit3 Str3 bits 4-15 not used Station Pressure 1 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 1 Input Alarm status Station Pressure 2 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 2 Input Alarm status Days Modbus Write Timeout Alarm (i.e. No Modbus write has occurred within a set time period) General Alarm Register bit 0 General, bit1 Str1, bit2 Str2, bit3 Str3 bits 4-15 not used Station Pressure 1 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 1 Input Alarm status Station Pressure 2 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 2 Input Alarm status Previous (or Last) Time period Hours Modbus Write Timeout Alarm (i.e. No Modbus write has occurred within a set time period) General Alarm Register bit 0 General, bit1 Str1, bit2 Str2, bit3 Str3 bits 4-15 not used Station Pressure 1 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 1 Input Alarm status Station Pressure 2 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 2 Input Alarm status Days Modbus Write Timeout Alarm (i.e. No Modbus write has occurred within a set time period) General Alarm Register bit 0 General, bit1 Str1, bit2 Str2, bit3 Str3 bits 4-15 not used Station Pressure 1 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 1 Input Alarm status Station Pressure 2 Input Alarm status Station Temperature 2 Input Alarm status

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 240 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


o1 Flow Rates Sqb Sqbc Sqn SqE SqM SqMc Sqbc(hr) Sqdry SqGw SqNw SqNc SqGc SqMg SqMg sa t SqMg dry SqML SqM_tp_corr SqMC SqMW SqMM SqM_hc SqnG SqnC SqnW SqE o 1 Daily Sqb daily Sqbc p/t daily Sqn daily SqE daily SqM daily SqMc daily Sqdry daily SqMg daily SqMg sat daily SqMg dry daily SqML daily SqM_tp_corr daily SqMC daily SqMW daily SqMM daily SqM_hc daily SqnG daily SqnC daily SqnW daily SqE daily o 1 Per Second Sqb sec Sqbc p/t sec Sqn sec SqE sec SqM sec SqMc sec Sqdry sec SqMg sec SqMg sat sec SqMg dry sec SqML sec SqM_tp_corr sec SqMC sec SqMW sec SqMM sec SqM_hc sec SqnG sec SqnC sec SqnW sec SqE sec o 1 Per Minute Sqb min Sqbc p/t min Sqn min SqE min Hourly Station Flow rates Hourly Station flow rate from meter Hourly Station flow rate from meter corrected for nonlinearity Hourly Corrected Volume Station flow rate Hourly Energy Station flow rate Hourly Mass Station flow rate Hourly Mass Station Flow rate corrected for nonlinearity Hourly Station flow rate from meter(US) corrected for Pressure and Temperature expansion. Hourly dry gas Volume Station flow rate Coriolis Gross volume flow rate of Water at line conditions in m3/hr Coriolis Normal volume flow rate of Water at base conditions in m3/hr Coriolis Normal volume flow rate of Condensate at base conditions in m3/hr Coriolis Gross volume flow rate of Condensate at line conditions in m3/hr Wet gas 2 Two phase mass flow rate in kg/hr Wet gas 2 Water saturated (Wet) De-Leeuw Mass flow rate in kg/hr Wet gas 2 Dry gas mass flow rate in kg/hr Wet gas 2 Liquid mass flow rate in kg/hr Wet gas 2 Corrected two phase mass flow rate in kg/hr Wet gas 2 Condensate mass flow rate in kg/hr Wet gas 2 Water mass flow rate in kg/hr Wet gas 2 Methanol mass flow rate in kg/hr Wet gas 2 Total Hydrocarbon mass flow rate in kg/hr Wet gas 2 Standard dry gas volume flow rate in m3/hr Wet gas 2 Standard condensate volume flow rate in m3/hr Wet gas 2 Standard water volume flow rate in m3/hr Wet gas 2 Gas Volume Energy flow rate in MJ/hr Daily Station Flow rates Daily Station flow rate from meter Daily Station flow rate from meter corrected for nonlinearity Daily Corrected Volume Station flow rate Daily Energy Station flow rate Daily Mass Station flow rate Daily Mass Station Flow rate corrected for nonlinearity Daily dry gas Volume Station flow rate Wet gas 2 Two phase mass flow rate in kg/day Wet gas 2 Water saturated (Wet) De-Leeuw Mass flow rate in kg/day Wet gas 2 Dry gas mass flow rate in kg/day Wet gas 2 Liquid mass flow rate in kg/day Wet gas 2 Corrected two phase mass flow rate in kg/day Wet gas 2 Condensate mass flow rate in kg/day Wet gas 2 Water mass flow rate in kg/day Wet gas 2 Methanol mass flow rate in kg/day Wet gas 2 Total Hydrocarbon mass flow rate in kg/day Wet gas 2 Standard dry gas volume flow rate in m3/day Wet gas 2 Standard condensate volume flow rate in m3/day Wet gas 2 Standard water volume flow rate in m3/day Wet gas 2 Gas Volume Energy flow rate in MJ/day Per Second Station Flow rates Per Second Station flow rate from meter Per Second Station flow rate from meter corrected for nonlinearity Per Second Corrected Volume Station flow rate Per Second Energy Station flow rate Per Second Mass Station flow rate Per Second Mass Station Flow rate corrected for nonlinearity Per Second dry gas Volume Station flow rate Wet gas 2 Two phase mass flow rate in kg/second Wet gas 2 Water saturated (Wet) De-Leeuw Mass flow rate in kg/second Wet gas 2 Dry gas mass flow rate in kg/second Wet gas 2 Liquid mass flow rate in kg/second Wet gas 2 Corrected two phase mass flow rate in kg/second Wet gas 2 Condensate mass flow rate in kg/second Wet gas 2 Water mass flow rate in kg/second Wet gas 2 Methanol mass flow rate in kg/second Wet gas 2 Total Hydrocarbon mass flow rate in kg/second Wet gas 2 Standard dry gas volume flow rate in m3/second Wet gas 2 Standard condensate volume flow rate in m3/second Wet gas 2 Standard water volume flow rate in m3/second Wet gas 2 Gas Volume Energy flow rate in MJ/second Per Minute Station Flow rates Per Minute Station flow rate from meter Per Minute Station flow rate from meter corrected for nonlinearity Per Minute Corrected Volume Station flow rate Per Minute Energy Station flow rate

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 241 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


SqM min SqMc min Sqdry min o1 Temperature Stn Temp 1 Stn Temp 2 Stn Temp Line 1 Stn Temp Line Status 1 Stn Temp Line 2 Stn Temp Line Status 2 Stn Temp Corr 1 Stn Temp Corr 2 o1 Pressure Stn Pres 1 Stn Pres 2 Stn Pres Line 1 Stn Pres Line Status 1 Stn Pres Line 2 Stn Pres Line Status 2 Stn Pres Corr 1 Stn Pres Corr 2 o1 Comparison Comparison Vb Comparison Vn o 1 Digital Inputs o1 Digital Inputs Slot 2 Digital i/p 1.2 Digital i/p 2.2 Digital i/p 3.2 o 1 Smart Index SI readout SI TWF SI Status SI Scaled cntr o 1 Stream 1 o1 Turbine Input freq .1 freq mon.1 o1 Liquid Data o 1 sg o1 sg received sg chr Rec.1 sg mod Rec.1 sg ang Rec.1 o1 sg used sg used.1 o1 sg hourly average sg hr Avg.1 o1 sg daily average sg day avg.1 o 1 CTL CTL.1 CTL Value o 1 CTS CTS.1 CTS Value o 1 CPS CPS.1 CPS Value o 1 CPL CPL.1 CPL Value rho T .1 rho S.1 Beta.1 A.1 Per Minute Mass Station flow rate Per Minute Mass Station Flow rate corrected for nonlinearity Per Minute dry gas Volume Station flow rate Station Temperature Folder Station Temperature 1 sensor value Station Temperature 2 sensor value Station Temperature 1 Station Temperature 1 Status Station Temperature 2 Station Temperature 2 Status Station Temperature 1 corrected for Range and Offset Station Temperature 2 corrected for Range and Offset Station Pressure Folder Station Pressure 1 sensor value Station Pressure 2 sensor value Station Pressure 1 Station Pressure 1 Status Station Pressure 2 Station Pressure 2 Status Station Pressure 1 corrected for Range and Offset Station Pressure 2 corrected for Range and Offset Station Comparison Folder Station Comparison Vb result Station Comparison Vn result Digital Inputs Folder Digital Inputs Slot N folder Status of Digital input 1 on Input Board in Slot 2 Status of Digital input 2 on Input Board in Slot 2 Status of Digital input 3 on Input Board in Slot 2 Smart Index results folder Received Counter Value from Smart Index Smart Index scaling Factor Status of Smart Index Counter Value of Smart Index scaled by TWF Stream 1 Folder Turbine Input Folder Measured Frequency of Meter 1 input in Hz Measured Frequency of Monitor 1 input in Hz Liquid Input Folder SG Folder SG Received Values SG Value received from a Chromatograph SG Value received from Modbus communication port SG Value received from an Analogue Input SG Value Used SG Hourly Average Value SG Daily Average Value CTL Folder CTS Folder CPS Folder CPL Folder Density at base Temperature and Line Pressure Base Density of Liquid Compressibility Factor Factor A

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 242 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


B .1 d.1 G.1 Tc.1 Tr.1 Alpha t.1 o1 Ultrasonic Comms Status US Manufacturer.1 US Comms Status.1 o1 Instromet Ultrasonic Data Code.1 V Status.1 C/R Status.1 Meter type.1 ValSamples 1.1 ValSamples 2.1 ValSamples 3.1 ValSamples 4.1 ValSamples 5.1 Agclevel_A 1.1 Agclevel_A 2.1 Agclevel_A 3.1 Agclevel_A 4.1 Agclevel_A 5.1 Agclevel_B 1.1 Agclevel_B 2.1 Agclevel_B 3.1 Agclevel_B 4.1 Agclevel_B 5.1 QLine.1 QBase.1 Spd of Sound.1 Gas Vel.1 Num Paths.1 Samp Rate.1 Agclimit_A 1.1 Agclimit_A 2.1 Agclimit_A 3.1 Agclimit_A 4.1 Agclimit_A 5.1 Agclimit_B 1.1 Agclimit_B 2.1 Agclimit_B 3.1 Agclimit_B 4.1 Agclimit_B 5.1 Qpres.1 Qtemp.1 Stability.1 Cpp 1.1 Cpp 2.1 Cpp 3.1 Cpp 4.1 Cpp 5.1 Vpp 1.1 Vpp 2.1 Vpp 3.1 Vpp 4.1 Vpp 5.1 Meter type.1 Seq number.1 For Volume.1 Rev Volume.1 T Spare.1 Diag bits 1.1 Diag bits 2.1 Diag bits 3.1 Diag bits 4.1 Diag bits 5.1 Efficiency 1.1 Efficiency 2.1 Efficiency 3.1 Efficiency 4.1 Efficiency 5.1 o1 FlowSIC 600 Data Factor B Relative Density at 15 C Base Density of Liquid divided by 1000 Critical Temperature in degrees R Line Temperature in degrees R Coefficient of thermal expansion of liquid General US Meter Folder Meter Manufacturer 0=unknown, 1=Instromet, 2=Sick Eng, 3=Daniel, 4=Panametric 0=OK, 1,=Port Problem, 2=waiting, 3=Msc Error, 4=Comms problem Instromet US Meter Folder Reply code 35(Q_DATA) , 36(Q_XDATA) or 37(U_DATA) V Status field C/R Status field Flow Meter type ID Number of valid samples path 1 stream 1 Number of valid samples path 2 stream 1 Number of valid samples path 3 stream 1 Number of valid samples path 4 stream 1 Number of valid samples path 5 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 1 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 2 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 3 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 4 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 5 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 1 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 2 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 3 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 4 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 5 stream 1 Volume flow at Line conditions in m3/hr Volume flow at base conditions (if available) in m3/hr Speed of sound in m/s Gas velocity after profile correction in m/s Number of Acoustic paths Number of acquired samples AGC Limit value transducer A path 1 stream 1 AGC Limit value transducer A path 2 stream 1 AGC Limit value transducer A path 3 stream 1 AGC Limit value transducer A path 4 stream 1 AGC Limit value transducer A path 5 stream 1 AGC Limit value transducer B path 1 stream 1 AGC Limit value transducer B path 2 stream 1 AGC Limit value transducer B path 3 stream 1 AGC Limit value transducer B path 4 stream 1 AGC Limit value transducer B path 5 stream 1 Pressure if available in Kpa Temperature if available in K Obsolete (Additional Status information) Speed of Sound in path 1 stream 1 in m/s Speed of Sound in path 2 stream 1 in m/s Speed of Sound in path 3 stream 1 in m/s Speed of Sound in path 4 stream 1 in m/s Speed of Sound in path 5 stream 1 in m/s Gas velocity in path 1 stream 1 in m/s Gas velocity in path 2 stream 1 in m/s Gas velocity in path 3 stream 1 in m/s Gas velocity in path 4 stream 1 in m/s Gas velocity in path 5 stream 1 in m/s Flow Meter type ID Measurement interval sequence number Meter Accumulated forward line volume in m3 Meter Accumulated reverse line volume in m3 Reserved for Twin Sonic applications Diagnostic information for path 1 stream 1 Diagnostic information for path 2 stream 1 Diagnostic information for path 3 stream 1 Diagnostic information for path 4 stream 1 Diagnostic information for path 5 stream 1 Calculated efficiency for path 1 stream 1 Calculated efficiency for path 2 stream 1 Calculated efficiency for path 3 stream 1 Calculated efficiency for path 4 stream 1 Calculated efficiency for path 5 stream 1 ABB Total Sonic Meter Folder

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 243 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


V Status.1 C/R Status.1 Meter type.1 ValSamples 1.1 ValSamples 2.1 ValSamples 3.1 ValSamples 4.1 ValSamples 5.1 Agclevel_A 1.1 Agclevel_A 2.1 Agclevel_A 3.1 Agclevel_A 4.1 Agclevel_A 5.1 Agclevel_B 1.1 Agclevel_B 2.1 Agclevel_B 3.1 Agclevel_B 4.1 Agclevel_B 5.1 QLine.1 QBase.1 Spd of Sound.1 Gas Vel.1 Status 0.1 Status 1.1 Status 2.1 Status 3.1 Pos Volume.1 Pos Volume Err.1 Neg Volume.1 Neg Volume Err.1 Vel sound 0.1 Vel sound 1.1 Vel sound 2.1 Vel sound 3.1 Vel gas 0.1 Vel gas 1.1 Vel gas 2.1 Vel gas 3.1 snr A 0.1 snr A 1.1 snr A 2.1 snr A 3.1 snr B 0.1 snr B 1.1 snr B 2.1 snr B 3.1 o1 Daniels Seniorsonic Spd of Sound.1 Gas Vel.1 Cpp 1.1 Cpp 2.1 Cpp 3.1 Cpp 4.1 Vpp 1.1 Vpp 2.1 Vpp 3.1 Vpp 4.1 DS Status 1.1 DS Status 2.1 DS Status 3.1 DS Status 4.1 DS Gen Status.1 DS Fail 1.0.1 DS Fail 1.1.1 DS Fail 1.2.1 DS Fail 1.3.1 DS Fail 2.0.1 DS Fail 2.1.1 DS Fail 2.2.1 DS Fail 2.3.1 DS Data Quality.1 DS Un Corr Vol.1 DS Un Corr Vol Frac.1 DS Vol Of Flow.1 DS N Un Corr Vol.1 DS N Un Corr Vol Frac.1 V Status field C/R Status field Flow Meter type ID Number of valid samples path 1 stream 1 Number of valid samples path 2 stream 1 Number of valid samples path 3 stream 1 Number of valid samples path 4 stream 1 Number of valid samples path 5 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 1 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 2 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 3 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 4 stream 1 AGC Level transducer A path 5 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 1 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 2 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 3 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 4 stream 1 AGC Level transducer B path 5 stream 1 Volume flow at Line conditions in m3/hr Volume flow at base conditions (if available) in m3/hr Speed of sound in m/s Gas velocity after profile correction in m/s Status Register 0 Status Register 1 Status Register 2 Status Register 3 Volume in Positive direction normal conditions Volume in Positive direction error conditions Volume in Negative direction normal conditions Volume in Negative direction error conditions Velocity of sound path 0 stream 1 Velocity of sound path 1 stream 1 Velocity of sound path 2 stream 1 Velocity of sound path 3 stream 1 Velocity of gas path 0 stream 1 Velocity of gas path 1 stream 1 Velocity of gas path 2 stream 1 Velocity of gas path 3 stream 1 Signal to noise ratio transducer A path 0 stream 1 Signal to noise ratio transducer A path 1 stream 1 Signal to noise ratio transducer A path 2 stream 1 Signal to noise ratio transducer A path 3 stream 1 Signal to noise ratio transducer B path 0 stream 1 Signal to noise ratio transducer B path 1 stream 1 Signal to noise ratio transducer B path 2 stream 1 Signal to noise ratio transducer B path 3 stream 1 Daniels Senior Sonic Meter Folder Speed of Sound Gas Velocity Speed of Sound in path 1 stream 1 in m/s Speed of Sound in path 2 stream 1 in m/s Speed of Sound in path 3 stream 1 in m/s Speed of Sound in path 4 stream 1 in m/s Gas velocity in path 1 stream 1 in m/s Gas velocity in path 2 stream 1 in m/s Gas velocity in path 3 stream 1 in m/s Gas velocity in path 4 stream 1 in m/s Status path 1 Status path 2 Status path 3 Status path 4 General Status Number of failures in path 1 direction 1 Number of failures in path 2 direction 1 Number of failures in path 3 direction 1 Number of failures in path 4 direction 1 Number of failures in path 1 direction 2 Number of failures in path 2 direction 2 Number of failures in path 3 direction 2 Number of failures in path 4 direction 2 Flow Data Quality indicator Uncorrected Volume Positive Uncorrected Volume Fraction Positive Positive Volume over flow Count Uncorrected Volume Negative Uncorrected Volume Fraction Negative

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 244 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


DS N Vol Of Flow.1 DS CTSm.1 DS CPSm.1 DS Strain.1 DS Cre.1 DS Re.1 o1 Panametric GM868 V Status.1 Spd of Sound.1 Q Line.1 Q Base.1 For Volume.1 Rev Volume.1 pa density.1 pa ss up.1 pa ss dn.1 pa pressure.1 pa temperature.1 pa ctr scale.1 pa pos ctr.1 pa neg ctr.1 o1 Panametric IGM878 IGM878 Status.1 IGM878 Avg Velocity.1 IGM878 fpv.1 IGM878 kv.1 IGM878 SoS.1 IGM878 pressure.1 IGM878 temperature.1 IGM878 hx.1 IGM878 SoS hi.1 IGM878 SoS lo.1 IGM878 v hi.1 IGM878 v lo.1 IGM878 ss lo.1 IGM878 amp hi.1 IGM878 amp lo.1 IGM878 avg.1 IGM878 update.1 IGM878 version.1 IGM878 checksum.1 IGM878 paths.1 IGM878 address.1 IGM878 act flow.1 IGM878 act pos.1 IGM878 act neg.1 IGM878 nrm flow.1 IGM878 nrm pos.1 IGM878 nrm neg.1 IGM878 mass flow.1 IGM878 mass pos.1 IGM878 mass neg.1 IGM878 egy flow.1 IGM878 egy pos.1 IGM878 egy neg.1 IGM878 A velocity.1 IGM878 A SoS.1 IGM878 A err.1 IGM878 A lst err.1 IGM878 B velocity.1 IGM878 B SoS.1 IGM878 B err.1 IGM878 B lst err.1 IGM878 C velocity.1 IGM878 C SoS.1 IGM878 C err.1 IGM878 C lst err.1 IGM878 D velocity.1 IGM878 D SoS.1 IGM878 D err.1 IGM878 D lst err.1 IGM878 E velocity.1 IGM878 E SoS.1 IGM878 E err.1 IGM878 E lst err.1 Negative Volume over flow Count CTSm Correction Factor Meter expansion due to Temperature CPSm Correction Factor Meter expansion due to Pressure Linear Expansion coefficient for Spool Body (/barg) Reynolds Number Correction Factor Reynolds Number Panametric GM868 Meter Folder V Status field Speed of Sound Line flow rate Base flow rate Forward Volume Total Reverse Volume Total Density Speed of sound upstream Speed of sound downstream Pressure Temperature Counter Scale Factor Positive Counter Negative Counter Panametric IGM878 Meter Folder Status register Average velosity Super comppressibility Kinematic viscocity Speed of sound Pressure Temperature Heating Value Speed of sound high limit Speed of sound low limit Velocity high limit Velocity low limit signal strength low limit Amplitude high limit Amplitude low limit Number in average Internal update rate Software version Checksum Number of paths Modbus address Actual volume flow rate Actual positive total Actual negative total Normal volume flow rate Normal positive total Normal negative total Mass flow rate Mass positive total Mass negative total Energy flow rate Energy positive total Energy negative total Path A velocity Path A speed of sound Path A error Path A last error Path B velocity Path B speed of sound Path B error Path B last error Path C velocity Path C speed of sound Path C error Path C last error Path D velocity Path D speed of sound Path D error Path D last error Path E velocity Path E speed of sound Path E error Path E last error

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 245 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


IGM878 F velocity.1 IGM878 F SoS.1 IGM878 F err.1 IGM878 F lst err.1 IGM878 SS Hi.1 IGM878 Density.1 o1 Wet Gas Equation Frg.1 thi.1 Pg t1.1 Pl t1.1 Xmg.1 X.1 WGC.1 Pgl.1 Pgs.1 Usg.1 x.1 o1 Wet Gas Equation Frg.1 thi.1 Usg.1 Y.1 F DL.1 o1 Wet Gas Mass Fractions / Ratios X.1 YL.1 ZC.1 ZW.1 ZM.1 Zchk.1 o1 Wet Gas Density Calculations rho W.1 rho W std.1 rho C.1 rho L.1 rho M.1 o1 API Liquid alpha T.1 beta.1 CTLm.1 CPLm.1 rho S.1 rho M.1 o1 Venturi Tube Data pres loss.1 pres dn.1 Beta .1 e.1 Red.1 CoD.1 Pipe D.1 Throat d.1 dphi.1 dplo.1 dp used.1 o1 Orifice Data dphi.1 dplo.1 dpused.1 mupt.1 D.1 d.1 Beta.1 e.1 Red.1 Cod.1 K Calc.1 dp select.1 o 1 GOST Path F velocity Path F speed of sound Path F error Path F last error Signal strength high limit Density Wet Gas Equation type 1 Folder Froude Number pressure ratio Gas Line density from table Liquid Line density from table Gas Mass Fraction Lockhart Martinelli parameter Wet Gas Correlation factor Density of gas at line conditions in kg/m3 Density of gas at base conditions in kg/m3 Superficial Gas velocity Intermediate Calculation Wet Gas Equation type 2 Folder Froude Number pressure ratio Superficial Gas velocity Lockhart Martinelli parameter Wet Gas Correction to De-Leeuw Wet Gas Mass Fractions / Ratios Folder Gas Mass Fraction Liquid to Gas Mass ratio Condensate Mass Fraction Water Mass Fraction Methanol Mass Fraction Mass Fraction Check Calculation Wet Gas Density Calculations Folder Line Density of Water in kg/m3 Base Density of Water in kg/m3 Line Density of Condensate in kg/m3 Line Density of Liquid in kg/m3 Line Density of Methanol in kg/m3 API Liquid Folder Calculated value of alpha Calculated value ofbeta Coefficient of Thermal Expansion for meter CTLm Pressure Volume correction factor CPLm Base Density of Liquid in kg/m3 (Coriolis metering only) Line Density of Liquid in kg/m3 (Coriolis metering only) Venturi Tube Folder Pressure Loss Downstream Pressure Beta Ratio Expansion factor Reynolds Number Coefficient of Discharge Pipe Diameter Throat Diameter Differential Pressure High range current used value Differential Pressure Low range current used value Differential Pressure current used value Orifice Plate Folder Differential Pressure High range current used value Differential Pressure Low range current used value Differential Pressure current used value Mu dynamic Viscosity Pipe Diameter Orifice Diameter Calculated Beta ratio Calculated expansion factor Calculated Reynolds Number Calculated Coefficient of Discharge Calculated value of Isentropic Exponent Indication if dp Hi range (1) is currently in use or dp Lo range (0) is currently in use. GOST Folder

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 246 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


En.1 Fc.1 Fr.1 Fop.1 Re.1 Hff.1 Ra.1 Rr.1 W.1 Ra max.1 Ra min.1 TauT.1 TauY.1 o1 AGA3 (1965) C.1 Fb.1 Fpb.1 Ftb.1 Ftf.1 Fg.1 Fpv.1 Fr.1 Fq.1 Y.1 o1 Coriolis Received Mass Flow.1 Density.1 Temperature.1 Volume flow.1 Pressure.1 Mass Total.1 Mass Invent.1 Volume Total.1 Volume Invent.1 Read State.1 Last Read State.1 Alarm.1 Status.1 o1 Coriolis ZC.1 ZW.1 Zchk.1 Pulse Input.1 Frequency.1 Rho st.1 rho C.1 o1 Equation Z.1 Zn.1 K.1 CFV.1 YM.1 CO2 E.F..1 o1 Gas Data o 1 Gas Data (Used) rd (Used).1 Hs (Used).1 Hi (Used).1 C (Used).1 N2 (Used).1 CO2 (Used).1 C2 (Used).1 C3 (Used).1 H2O (Used).1 H2S (Used).1 H2 (Used).1 CO (Used).1 O2 (Used).1 i-C4 (Used).1 n-C4 (Used).1 i-C5 (Used).1 n-C5 (Used).1 Entry factor Bluntness factor Roughness factor Temperature correction factor Radius of orifice plate entry edge Hydraulic friction factor Mean deviation of roughness Equilivent roughness Maximum roughness Minimum roughness Time since last calibration Time since last calibration AGA3 (1965) Folder AGA 3 Factor C AGA 3 Factor Fb AGA 3 Factor Fpb AGA 3 Factor Ftb AGA 3 Factor Ftf AGA 3 Factor Fg AGA 3 Factor Fpv AGA 3 Factor Fr AGA 3 Factor Fq AGA 3 Factor Y Coriolis Received Folder Mass Flow rate received Density received Temperature received Volume Flow rate received Pressure received Mass flow total received Mass flow Inventory total received Volume flow total received Volume flow Inventory total received Current Read state of Coriolis meter Previous Read state of Coriolis meter Alarm register received Status register received Coriolis Folder Condensate Mass Fraction Water Mass Fraction Mass Fraction Check Calculation Pulse input count from the Coriolis meter Frequency input from Coriolis meter in Hz Status of Density value from a Meter (0) or Keypad entered (1) Line Density of Condensate at metering conditions in kg/m3 Equation Folder Calculated Compressibility Factor Calculated Base Compressibility Factor Calculated K factor =Z/Zn Calculated Volume Correction Factor Calculated Flow rate linearity correction factor Calculated CO2 Emission Factor (Enabled by Mode Switch 13) Gas Data Folder Used Gas Data Used Value of Relative Density Used Value of Superior Heating Used Value of Inferior Heating Used Value of Methane Used Value of Nitrogen Used Value of Carbon Dioxide Used Value of Ethane Used Value of Propane Used Value of Water Vapour Used Value of Hydrogen Sulphide Used Value of Hydrogen Used Value of Carbon Monoxide Used Value of Oxygen Used Value of i-Butane Used Value of n-Butane Used Value of i-Pentane Used Value of n-Pentane

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 247 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


n-C6 (Used).1 n-C7 (Used).1 n-C8 (Used).1 n-C9 (Used).1 n-C10 (Used).1 He (Used).1 Ar (Used).1 neo-C5 (Used).1 IC6H14(Used) MC6H14(Used) NEO_C6H14(Used) DC6H14(Used) C2H4(Used) C3H6(Used) C4H8(Used) CC4H8(Used) TC4H8(Used) IC4H8(Used) PC5H10(Used) C3H4(Used) AC4H6(Used) BC4H6(Used) C2H2(Used) CC5H10(Used) MC6H12(Used) EC6H12(Used) C6H12(Used) MC7H14(Used) EC8H16(Used) C6H6(Used) C7H8(Used) EC8H10(Used) C8H10(Used) CH3OH(Used) CH4S(Used) NH3(Used) HCN(Used) OCS(Used) CS2(Used) rn (Used).1 o 1 Gas Data Used (Status) rd (Used St).1 o 1 Chromat Gas Data Received rd (Chromat Rec).1 o 1 Chromat Gas Data Received (Statuses) rd (Chromat Rec St).1 o 1 Modbus Gas Data Received rd (Modbus Rec).1 o 1 Modbus Gas Data Received (Statuses) rd (Modbus Rec St).1 o 1 Analogue Gas Data Received rd (Analogue Rec).1 o 1 Analogue Gas Data Received (Statuses) rd (Analogue Rec St).1 o 1 Gas Hour Average rd (hr avg).1 o 1 Gas Day Average rd (day avg).1 Used Value of n-Hexane Used Value of n-Heptane Used Value of n-Octane Used Value of n-Nonane Used Value of n-Decane Used Value of Helium Used Value of Argon Used Value of neo-Pentane Used Value of 2, Methylpentane Used Value of 3, Methylpentane Used Value of 2,2, Dimethylbutane Used Value of 2,3, Dimethylbutane Used Value of Ethylene Used Value of Propylene Used Value of 1, Butene Used Value of cis 2 Butene Used Value of trans 2 Butene Used Value of 2 Methylpropene Used Value of 1 Pentene Used Value of Propadiene Used Value of 1,2 Butadiene Used Value of 1,3 Butadiene Used Value of Acetylene Used Value of Cyclopentane Used Value of Methylcyclopentane Used Value of Ethylcyclopentane Used Value of Cyclohexane Used Value of Methylcyclohexane Used Value of Ethylcyclohexane Used Value of Benzene Used Value of Toluene Used Value of Ethylbenzene Used Value of 0 Xylene Used Value of Methanol Used Value of Methanethion Used Value of Ammonia Used Value of Hydrogen Cyanide Used Value of Carbonyl sulphide Used Value of Carbon disulphide normal density Value Used Used Gas Data Statuses Relative Density Used Value Status etc. Chromat Received Gas Data Relative Density Chromat Received Value etc. Chromat Received Gas Data Statuses Relative Density Chromat Received Value Status etc. Modbus Received Gas Data Relative Density Modbus Received Value etc. Modbus Received Gas Data Statuses Relative Density Modbus Received Value Status etc. Analogue Received Gas Data Relative Density Analogue Received Value etc. Analogue Received Gas Data Statuses Relative Density Analogue Received Value Status etc. Gas Data Previous Hours Average Relative Density Previous Hours Average etc. Gas Data Previous Days Average Relative Density Previous Days Average etc.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 248 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


o 1 Chromat WOBBE S(Chromat Rec).1 WOBBE I(Chromat Rec).1 C6+(Chromat Rec).1 C5+(Chromat Rec).1 Comp.Sum(Chromat Rec).1 o 1 Modbus WOBBE S(Modbus Rec).1 WOBBE I(Modbus Rec).1 C6+(Modbus Rec).1 o 1 Analogue WOBBE S(Analogue Rec).1 WOBBE I(Analogue Rec).1 C6+(Analogue Rec).1 o 1 Calculated o1 Rd Meter Meter rd.1 Meterrd st.1 o1 Calculated rd(Calc).1 Hs(Calc).1 Hi(Calc).1 C(Calc).1 N2(Calc).1 CO2(Calc).1 C2(Calc).1 C3(Calc).1 H2O(Calc).1 H2S(Calc).1 H2(Calc).1 CO(Calc).1 O2(Calc).1 i-C4(Calc).1 n-C4(Calc).1 i-C5(Calc).1 n-C5(Calc).1 n-C6(Calc).1 n-C7(Calc).1 n-C8(Calc).1 n-C9(Calc).1 n-C10(Calc).1 He(Calc).1 Ar(Calc).1 NeoC5(Calc).1 IC6H14(Calc) MC6H14(Calc) NEO_C6H14(Calc) DC6H14(Calc) C2H4(Calc) C3H6(Calc) C4H8(Calc) CC4H8(Calc) TC4H8(Calc) IC4H8(Calc) PC5H10(Calc) C3H4(Calc) AC4H6(Calc) BC4H6(Calc) C2H2(Calc) CC5H10(Calc) MC6H12(Calc) EC6H12(Calc) C6H12(Calc) MC7H14(Calc) EC8H16(Calc) C6H6(Calc) C7H8(Calc) EC8H10(Calc) C8H10(Calc) CH3OH(Calc) CH4S(Calc) NH3(Calc) HCN(Calc) Chromatograph received values Superior Wobbe Value received Inferior Wobbe Value received C6+ value received C5+ value received (ABB 3100 Only) Component Sum value received (ABB 3100 Only) Modbus received values Superior Wobbe Value received Inferior Wobbe Value received C6+ value received Analogue received values Superior Wobbe Value received Inferior Wobbe Value received C6+ value received Calculated values from ISO 6976 Relative Density Sensor Measured Value of Relative Density from Meter Status of Measured Value of Relative Density from Meter Calculated values from ISO 6976 Calculated Relative Density Calculated Superior Heating Value Calculated Inferior Heating Value Calculated Methane Value Calculated Nitrogen Value Calculated Carbon Monoxide Value Calculated Ethane Value Calculated Propane Value Calculated Water Vapour Value Calculated Hydrogen Sulphide Value Calculated Hydrogen Value Calculated Carbon Monoxide Value Calculated Oxygen Value Calculated i-Butane Value Calculated n-Butane Value Calculated i-Pentane Value Calculated n-Pentane Value Calculated n-Hexane Value Calculated n-Heptane Value Calculated n-Octane Value Calculated n-Nonane Value Calculated n-Decane Value Calculated Helium Value Calculated Argon Value Calculated neo-Pentane Value Calculated 2, Methylpentane Value Calculated 3, Methylpentane Value Calculated 2,2, Dimethylbutane Value Calculated 2,3, Dimethylbutane Value Calculated Ethylene Value Calculated Propylene Value Calculated 1, Butene Value Calculated cis 2 Butene Value Calculated trans 2 Butene Value Calculated 2 Methylpropene Value Calculated 1 Pentene Value Calculated Propadiene Value Calculated 1,2 Butadiene Value Calculated 1,3 Butadiene Value Calculated Acetylene Value Calculated Cyclopentane Value Calculated Methylcyclopentane Value Calculated Ethylcyclopentane Value Calculated Cyclohexane Value Calculated Methylcyclohexane Value Calculated Ethylcyclohexane Value Calculated Benzene Value Calculated Toluene Value Calculated Ethylbenzene Value Calculated 0 Xylene Value Calculated Methanol Value Calculated Methanethion Value Calculated Ammonia Value Calculated Hydrogen Cyanide Value

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 249 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


OCS(Calc) CS2(Calc) o1 Calculated (Statuses) rd(Calc St).1 Hs(Calc St).1 Hi(Calc St).1 C(Calc St).1 N2(Calc St).1 CO2(Calc St).1 C2(Calc St).1 C3(Calc St).1 H2O(Calc St).1 H2S(Calc St).1 H2(Calc St).1 CO(Calc St).1 O2(Calc St).1 i-C4(Calc St).1 n-C4(Calc St).1 i-C5(Calc St).1 n-C5(Calc St).1 n-C6(Calc St).1 n-C7(Calc St).1 n-C8(Calc St).1 n-C9(Calc St).1 n-C10(Calc St).1 He(Calc St).1 Ar(Calc St).1 NeoC5(Calc St).1 IC6H14(Calc. St) MC6H14(Calc. St) NEO_C6H14(Calc. St) DC6H14(Calc. St) C2H4(Calc. St) C3H6(Calc. St) C4H8(Calc. St) CC4H8(Calc. St) TC4H8(Calc. St) IC4H8(Calc. St) PC5H10(Calc. St) C3H4(Calc. St) AC4H6(Calc. St) BC4H6(Calc. St) C2H2(Calc. St) CC5H10(Calc. St) MC6H12(Calc. St) EC6H12(Calc. St) C6H12(Calc. St) MC7H14(Calc. St) EC8H16(Calc. St) C6H6(Calc. St) C7H8(Calc. St) EC8H10(Calc. St) C8H10(Calc. St) CH3OH(Calc. St) CH4S(Calc. St) NH3(Calc. St) HCN(Calc. St) OCS(Calc. St) CS2(Calc. St) o1 Flow rates o 1 Daily qMg uncor.1 qMg.1 qMl.1 qGg.1 qNg.1 qGl.1 qNl.1 qMw.1 qMc.1 o 1 Hourly o1 Current qMg uncor.1 Calculated Carbonyl sulphide Value Calculated Carbon disulphide Value Calculated values from ISO 6976 Status of Calculated Relative Density Status of Calculated Superior Heating Value Status of Calculated Inferior Heating Value Status of Calculated Methane Value Status of Calculated Nitrogen Value Status of Calculated Carbon Dioxide Value Status of Calculated Ethane Value Status of Calculated Propane Value Status of Calculated Water Vapour Value Status of Calculated Hydrogen Sulphide Value Status of Calculated Hydrogen Value Status of Calculated Carbon Monoxide Value Status of Calculated Oxygen Value Status of Calculated i-Butane Value Status of Calculated n-Butane Value Status of Calculated i-Pentane Value Status of Calculated n-Pentane Value Status of Calculated n-Hexane Value Status of Calculated n-Heptane Value Status of Calculated n-Octane Value Status of Calculated n-Nonane Value Status of Calculated n-Decane Value Status of Calculated Helium Value Status of Calculated Argon Value Status of Calculated neo-Pentane Value Status of 2, Methylpentane Value Status of 3, Methylpentane Value Status of 2,2, Dimethylbutane Value Status of 2,3, Dimethylbutane Value Status of Ethylene Value Status of Propylene Value Status of 1, Butene Value Status of cis 2 Butene Value Status of trans 2 Butene Value Status of 2 Methylpropene Value Status of 1 Pentene Value Status of Propadiene Value Status of 1,2 Butadiene Value Status of 1,3 Butadiene Value Status of Acetylene Value Status of Cyclopentane Value Status of Methylcyclopentane Value Status of Ethylcyclopentane Value Status of Cyclohexane Value Status of Methylcyclohexane Value Status of Ethylcyclohexane Value Status of Benzene Value Status of Toluene Value Status of Ethylbenzene Value Status of 0 Xylene Value Status of Methanol Value Status of Methanethion Value Status of Ammonia Value Status of Hydrogen Cyanide Value Status of Carbonyl sulphide Value Status of Carbon disulphide Value Wet Gas Flow Rates Type 1 Daily Flow rates contract hour to contract hour Two phase mass flow rate in kg/day Gas (Corrected for Liquid Content) Mass Flow rate in kg/day Liquid Mass flow rate in kg/day Gas Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/day Gas Volume flow rate at base conditions in m3/day Liquid Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/day Liquid Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/day Water Mass flow rate in kg/day Condensate Mass flow rate in kg/day Hourly Flow rates Hourly Flow rates Two phase mass flow rate in kg/hr

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 250 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


qMg.1 qMl.1 qGg.1 qNg.1 qGl.1 qNl.1 qMw.1 qMc.1 o1 Positive +qn .1 +qM .1 o1 Negative -qn .1 -qM .1 o 1 Per Second qMg uncor.1 qMg.1 qMl.1 qGg.1 qNg.1 qGl.1 qNl.1 qMw.1 qMc.1 o1 Flow rates o 1 Daily qMg daily.1 qMg sat daily.1 qMg dry daily.1 qML daily.1 qM_tp_corr daily.1 qMC daily.1 qMW daily.1 qMM daily.1 qM_hc daily.1 qnG daily.1 qnC daily.1 qnW daily.1 qE daily.1 o 1 Hourly o1 Current qMg.1 qMg sat.1 qMg dry.1 qML.1 qM_tp_corr.1 qMC.1 qMW.1 qMM.1 qM_hc.1 qnG.1 qnC.1 qnW.1 qE.1 o1 Positive +qn .1 +qM .1 o1 Negative -qn .1 -qM .1 o 1 Per Second qMg sec line.1 qMg sat sec.1 qMg dry sec.1 qML sec.1 qM_tp_corr sec.1 qMC sec.1 qMW sec.1 qMM sec.1 Gas (Corrected for Liquid Content) Mass Flow rate in kg/hr Liquid Mass flow rate in kg/hr Gas Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/hr Gas Volume flow rate at base conditions in m3/hr Liquid Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/hr Liquid Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/hr Water Mass flow rate in kg/hr Condensate Mass flow rate in kg/hr Positive Flow rates Positive corrected volume flow rate Positive mass flow rate Negative Flow rates Negative corrected volume flow rate Negative mass flow rate Per Second Flow rates Two phase mass flow rate in kg/second Gas (Corrected for Liquid Content) Mass Flow rate in kg/second Liquid Mass flow rate in kg/second Gas Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/second Gas Volume flow rate at base conditions in m3/second Liquid Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/second Liquid Volume flow rate at line conditions in m3/second Water Mass flow rate in kg/second Condensate Mass flow rate in kg/second Wet Gas Flow Rates Type 2 Daily Flow rates contract hour to contract hour Two phase mass flow rate in kg/day Water saturated (Wet) De-Leeuw Mass flow rate in kg/day Dry gas mass flow rate in kg/day Liquid mass flow rate in kg/day Corrected two phase mass flow rate in kg/day Condensate mass flow rate in kg/day Water mass flow rate in kg/day Methanol mass flow rate in kg/day Total Hydrocarbon mass flow rate in kg/day Standard dry gas volume flow rate in m3/day Standard condensate volume flow rate in m3/day Standard water volume flow rate in m3/day Gas Volume Energy flow rate in MJ/day Hourly Flow rates Current Hour Hourly Flow rates Two phase mass flow rate in kg/hour Water saturated (Wet) De-Leeuw Mass flow rate in kg/hour Dry gas mass flow rate in kg/hour Liquid mass flow rate in kg/hour Corrected two phase mass flow rate in kg/hour Condensate mass flow rate in kg/hour Water mass flow rate in kg/hour Methanol mass flow rate in kg/hour Total Hydrocarbon mass flow rate in kg/hour Standard dry gas volume flow rate in m3/hour Standard condensate volume flow rate in m3/hour Standard water volume flow rate in m3/hour Gas Volume Energy flow rate in MJ/hour Positive Flow rates Positive corrected volume flow rate Positive mass flow rate Negative Flow rates Negative corrected volume flow rate Negative mass flow rate Per Second Flow rates Two phase mass flow rate in kg/second Water saturated (Wet) De-Leeuw Mass flow rate in kg/second Dry gas mass flow rate in kg/second Liquid mass flow rate in kg/second Corrected two phase mass flow rate in kg/second Condensate mass flow rate in kg/second Water mass flow rate in kg/second Methanol mass flow rate in kg/second

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 251 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


qM_hc sec.1 qnG sec.1 qnC sec.1 qnW sec.1 qE sec.1 o1 Flow rates qMw per.1 qNw per.1 qGw per.1 o 1 Daily qMl.1 qGl.1 qNl.1 qMw.1 qMc.1 qGw.1 qNw.1 qNc.1 qGc.1 qS.1 o 1 Hourly o1 Current qMl.1 qGl.1 qNl.1 qMw.1 qMc.1 qGw.1 qNw.1 qNc.1 qGc.1 qS.1 o1 Positive +qn .1 +qM .1 o1 Negative -qn .1 -qM .1 o 1 Per Second qMl.1 qGl.1 qNl.1 qMw.1 qMc.1 qGw.1 qNw.1 qNc.1 qGc.1 qS.1 o1 Flow rates o 1 Daily qb daily.1 qbc p/t daily.1 qbc daily.1 qn daily.1 qE daily.1 qM daily. 1 qMc daily.1 qdry daily.1 o 1 Hourly o1 Current qb.1 qbc.1 qn.1 qE.1 qM.1 qMc.1 qbc p/t .1 CO2 Flow Rate.1 Total Hydrocarbon mass flow rate in kg/second Standard dry gas volume flow rate in m3/second Standard condensate volume flow rate in m3/second Standard water volume flow rate in m3/second Gas Volume Energy flow rate in MJ/second Coriolis Meters Mass flow rate of Water in % of total flow rate Normal volume flow rate of Water in % of total flow rate Gross volume flow rate of Water in % of total flow rate Daily Flow rates contract hour to contract hour Mass flow rate of Liquid in kg/day Gross volume flow rate of Liquid at line conditions in m3/day Normal volume flow rate of Liquid at base conditions in m3/day Mass flow rate of Water in kg/day Mass flow rate of Condensate in kg/day Gross volume flow rate of Water at line conditions in m3/day Normal volume flow rate of Water at base conditions in m3/day Normal volume flow rate of Condensate at base conditions in m3/day Gross volume flow rate of Condensate at line conditions in m3/day Flow rate from alternate source i.e. either Modbus value or pulse count Hourly Flow rates Current Hour Hourly Flow rates Mass flow rate of Liquid in kg/hour Gross volume flow rate of Liquid at line conditions in m3/hour Normal volume flow rate of Liquid at base conditions in m3/hour Mass flow rate of Water in kg/hour Mass flow rate of Condensate in kg/hour Gross volume flow rate of Water at line conditions in m3/hour Normal volume flow rate of Water at base conditions in m3/hour Normal volume flow rate of Condensate at base conditions in m3/hour Gross volume flow rate of Condensate at line conditions in m3/hour Flow rate from alternate source i.e. either Modbus value or pulse count Positive Flow rates Positive corrected volume flow rate Positive mass flow rate Negative Flow rates Negative corrected volume flow rate Negative mass flow rate Per Second Flow rates Mass flow rate of Liquid in kg/second Gross volume flow rate of Liquid at line conditions in m3/second Normal volume flow rate of Liquid at base conditions in m3/second Mass flow rate of Water in kg/second Mass flow rate of Condensate in kg/second Gross volume flow rate of Water at line conditions in m3/second Normal volume flow rate of Water at base conditions in m3/second Normal volume flow rate of Condensate at base conditions in m3/second Gross volume flow rate of Condensate at line conditions in m3/second Flow rate from alternate source i.e. either Modbus value or pulse count Flow Rates Daily Flow rates contract hour to contract hour Daily line volume flow rate Daily line volume flow rate corrected for p t expansion (US meter only) Daily line volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity Daily corrected volume flow rate Daily Energy flow rate Daily Mass flow rate Daily Mass flow rate corrected for linearity (Orifice plate applications only) Daily dry gas volume flow rate Hourly Flow rates Current Hour Hourly Flow rates Line Volume flow rate Line Volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity Corrected Volume flow rate Energy flow rate Mass flow rate Mass flow rate corrected for linearity (Orifice plate applications only) Hourly line volume flow rate corrected for p t expansion (US meter only) CO2 Flow Rate tonnes/hr(Emission factor Calculation)

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 252 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


qdry.1 o1 Peak +qb pk.1 +qbc pk .1 +qn pk .1 +qE pk .1 +qM pk.1 +qdry pk .1 o1 Peak Times +t_qb.pk.1 +t_qbc.pk.1 +t_qn.pk.1 +t_qE.pk.1 +t_qM.pk.1 +t_qdry.pk.1 o1 Lowest +qb lo.1 +qbc lo .1 +qn lo .1 +qE lo .1 +qM lo.1 +qdry lo .1 o1 Lowest Times +t_qb.lo.1 +t_qbc.lo.1 +t_qn.lo.1 +t_qE.lo.1 +t_qM.lo.1 +t_qdry.lo.1 o1 Positive +qb .1 +qbc .1 +qn .1 +qE .1 +qM .1 o1 Negative -qb .1 -qbc .1 -qn .1 -qE .1 -qM .1 o 1 Per Second qb sec.1 qbc p/t sec.1 qbc sec.1 qn sec.1 qE sec.1 qM sec.1 qMc sec.1 qdry sec.1 o 1 Per Minute qb min.1 qbc p/t min.1 qbc min.1 qn min.1 qE min.1 qM min.1 qMc min.1 qdry min.1 o1 Averages o 1 Pressure o1 Hourly pr.p.hr.avg.1 pr.f.hr.avg.1 o1 Daily pr.p.dy.avg.1 Dry gas Volume flow rate Positive peak Flow rates Peak line volume flow rate Peak line volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity Peak corrected volume flow rate Peak energy flow rate Peak mass flow rate Peak dry gas volume flow rate Time of peak Flow rate Time and date of line volume flow rate peak Time and date of line volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity peak Time and date of corrected volume flow rate peak Time and date of Energy flow rate peak Time and date of Mass flow rate peak Time and date of dry gas volume flow rate peak Positive Lowest Flow rates Lowest line volume flow rate Lowest line volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity Lowest corrected volume flow rate Lowest energy flow rate Lowest mass flow rate Lowest dry gas volume flow rate Time of lowest Flow rate Time and date of line volume flow rate lowest Time and date of line volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity lowest Time and date of corrected volume flow rate lowest Time and date of Energy flow rate lowest Time and date of Mass flow rate lowest Time and date of dry gas volume flow rate lowest Positive Flow rates Positive line volume flow rate Positive line volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity Positive corrected volume flow rate Positive energy flow rate Positive mass flow rate Negative Flow rates Negative line volume flow rate Negative line volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity Negative corrected volume flow rate Negative energy flow rate Negative mass flow rate Per Second Flow rates Per Second line volume flow rate Per Second line volume flow rate corrected for p t expansion (US meter only) Per Second line volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity Per Second corrected volume flow rate Per Second Energy flow rate Per Second Mass flow rate Per Second Mass flow rate corrected for linearity (Orifice plate applications only) Per Second dry gas volume flow rate Per Minute Flow rates Per Minute line volume flow rate Per Minute line volume flow rate corrected for p t expansion (US meter only) Per Minute line volume flow rate corrected for non-linearity Per Minute corrected volume flow rate Per Minute Energy flow rate Per Minute Mass flow rate Per Minute Mass flow rate corrected for linearity (Orifice plate applications only) Per Minute dry gas volume flow rate Pressure and Temperature Averages Pressure Hourly Pressure previous hour time based average Pressure previous hour flow based average Daily Pressure previous day time based average

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 253 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


pr.f.dy.avg.1 o 1 Temperature o1 Hourly te.p.hr.avg.1 te.f.hr.avg.1 o1 Daily te.p.dy.avg.1 te.f.dy.avg.1 o1 Multiple Transmitters o 1 Pressure pres sens 1.1 pres sens 2.1 pres sens 3.1 pres stat 1.1 pres stat 2.1 pres stat 3.1 pres average 1 pres Calc 1 pres select 1 pres Calc 1 pres key_st 1 pres serial 1 pres ser_st 1 pres Avg status 1 pres.corrected1.1 pres.corrected2.1 pres.corrected3.1 pres.gau.Calc 1 o 1 Temperature temp sens 1.1 temp sens 2.1 temp sens 3.1 temp stat 1.1 temp stat 2.1 temp stat 3.1 temp average 1 temp Calc 1 temp select 1 temp Calc 1 temp key_st 1 temp serial 1 temp ser_st 1 temp Avg status 1 temp.corrected1.1 temp.corrected2.1 temp.corrected3.1 o 1 Dp High dphi sens 1.1 dphi sens 2.1 dphi sens 3.1 dphi stat 1.1 dphi stat 2.1 dphi stat 3.1 dphi average 1 dphi Calc 1 dphi select 1 dphi Calc 1 dphi key_st 1 dphi serial 1 dphi ser_st 1 dphi Avg status 1 o 1 Dp Low dplo sens 1.1 dplo sens 2.1 dplo sens 3.1 dplo stat 1.1 dplo stat 2.1 dplo stat 3.1 dplo average 1 dplo Calc 1 dplo select 1 Pressure previous day flow based average Temperature Hourly Temperature previous hour time based average Temperature previous hour flow based average Daily Temperature previous day time based average Temperature previous fay flow based average Multiple Transmitter inputs Pressure Values Value from Pressure Sensor 1.1 Value from Pressure Sensor 2.1 Value from Pressure Sensor 3.1 Status of Pressure Sensor 1.1 Status of Pressure Sensor 2.1 Status of Pressure Sensor 3.1 Average of Pressure Sensors 1.1 , 1.2 & 1.3 Calc Pressure Value Origin of Pressure Calc Value Pressure Calc or default Value Status of Pressure Calc value Serial received Value of Pressure Status of Serial received Value of Pressure Status of Average Pressure Value Value from Pressure Sensor 1.1 corrected for Range and Offset Value from Pressure Sensor 2.1 corrected for Range and Offset Value from Pressure Sensor 3.1 corrected for Range and Offset Calc Pressure Gauge Value Temperature Values Value from Temperature Sensor 1.1 Value from Temperature Sensor 2.1 Value from Temperature Sensor 3.1 Status of Temperature Sensor 1.1 Status of Temperature Sensor 2.1 Status of Temperature Sensor 3.1 Average of Temperature Sensors 1.1 , 1.2 & 1.3 Calc Temperature Value Origin of Temperature Calc Value Temperature Calc or default Value Status of Temperature Calc value Serial received Value of Temperature Status of Serial received Value of Temperature Status of Average Temperature Value Value from Temperature Sensor 1.1 corrected for Range and Offset Value from Temperature Sensor 2.1 corrected for Range and Offset Value from Temperature Sensor 3.1 corrected for Range and Offset Differential Pressure High range Values Value from Dp High range Sensor 1.1 Value from Dp High range Sensor 2.1 Value from Dp High range Sensor 3.1 Status of Dp High range Sensor 1.1 Status of Dp High range Sensor 2.1 Status of Dp High range Sensor 3.1 Average of Dp High range Sensors 1.1 , 1.2 & 1.3 Calc Dp High range Value Origin of Dp High range Calc Value Dp High range Calc or default Value Status of Dp High range Calc value Serial received Value of Dp High range Status of Serial received Value of Dp High range Status of Average Dp High range Value Differential Pressure Low range Values Value from Dp Low range Sensor 1.1 Value from Dp Low range Sensor 2.1 Value from Dp Low range Sensor 3.1 Status of Dp Low range Sensor 1.1 Status of Dp Low range Sensor 2.1 Status of Dp Low range Sensor 3.1 Average of Dp Low range Sensors 1.1 , 1.2 & 1.3 Calc Dp Low range Value Origin of Dp Low range Calc Value

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 254 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


dplo Calc 1 dplo key_st 1 dplo serial 1 dplo ser_st 1 dplo Avg status 1 o1 Alarms o 1 Normal General Acc.1 General Non Acc.1 Turbine Acc.1 Turbine Non Acc .1 Ultrasonic Acc.1 Ultrasonic Non Acc .1 MT Pressure.1 MT Temperature.1 MT dp High.1 MT dp Low.1 Gas Data Max Alarms.1 Gas Data Min Alarms.1 Gas Data High Alarms.1 Gas Data Low Alarms.1 Status 1 (Acc.)1 Status 2 (Temp).1 Liquid Data Max Alarms.1 Liquid Data Min Alarms.1 Liquid Data High Alarms.1 Liquid Data Low Alarms.1 Density Acc Alarms.1 Density Non-Acc Alarms.1 Chromat Alarm.1 Oil Status Non Acc.1 793 bf.1 793 qlo.1 793 qhi.1 793 gen alarm.1 793 gc comms.1 793 gc status1.1 793 gc status2.1 793 gc stream.1 Coriolis nac alarm o 1 Latched o1 Current o1 Hourly General Acc.La.Cur.Hr.1 General Non Acc.La.Cur.Hr.1 Turbine Acc.La.Cur.Hr.1 Turbine Non Acc.La.Cur.Hr .1 Ultrasonic Acc.La.Cur.Hr.1 Ultrasonic Non Acc.La.Cur.Hr .1 MT Pressure.La.Cur.Hr.1 MT Temperature.La.Cur.Hr.1 MT dp High.La.Cur.Hr.1 MT dp Low.La.Cur.Hr.1 Gas Data Max Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Gas Data Min Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Gas Data High Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Gas Data Low Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Status 1 (Acc.) .La.Cur.Hr 1 Status 2 (Temp) .La.Cur.Hr.1 Liquid Data Max Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Liquid Data Min Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Liquid Data High Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Liquid Data Low Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Density Acc Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Density Non-Acc Alarms.La.Cur.Hr.1 Coriolis nac alarm.La.Cur.Hr.1 Chromat Alarm.La.Cur.Hr.1 Oil Status Non Acc.La.Cur.Hr.1 o1 Daily General Acc.La.Cur.Dy.1 General Non Acc.La.Cur.Dy.1 Turbine Acc.La.Cur.Dy.1 Turbine Non Acc.La.Cur.Dy .1 Ultrasonic Acc.La.Cur.Dy.1 Dp Low range Calc or default Value Status of Dp Low range Calc value Serial received Value of Dp Low range Status of Serial received Value of Dp Low range Status of Average Dp Low range Value Alarm Registers Normal Alarms General Accountable Alarm register General Non-accountable Alarm register Turbine Accountable Alarm register Turbine Non-accountable Alarm register Ultrasonic Accountable Alarm register Ultrasonic Non-accountable Alarm register Multiple Pressure Transmitter Alarm register Multiple Temperature Transmitter Alarm register Multiple Differential Pressure High Range Transmitter Alarm register Multiple Differential Pressure Low Range Transmitter Alarm register Gas Data Maximum Alarms register Gas Data Minimum Alarms register Gas Data High Alarms register Gas Data Low Alarms register Special Status Register (Accountable Alarms) Special Status Register (Temperature Alarm) Liquid Data Maximum Alarms register Liquid Data Minimum Alarms register Liquid Data High Alarms register Liquid Data Low Alarms register Density accountable Alarms register Density Non accountable Alarms register Stream 1 Chromatograph Alarms Stream 1 Lubrication Input Status Alarms 793-7SC alarm emulation 793-7SC alarm emulation 793-7SC alarm emulation 793-7SC alarm emulation 793-7SC alarm emulation 793-7SC alarm emulation 793-7SC alarm emulation 793-7SC alarm emulation Coriolis Non Accountable Alarms Latched Alarms Current Period Latched Alarms Current Hourly Latched Alarms General Accountable Alarm register General Non-accountable Alarm register Turbine Accountable Alarm register Turbine Non-accountable Alarm register Ultrasonic Accountable Alarm register Ultrasonic Non-accountable Alarm register Multiple Pressure Transmitter Alarm register Multiple Temperature Transmitter Alarm register Multiple Differential Pressure High Range Transmitter Alarm register Multiple Differential Pressure Low Range Transmitter Alarm register Gas Data Maximum Alarms register Gas Data Minimum Alarms register Gas Data High Alarms register Gas Data Low Alarms register Special Status Register (Accountable Alarms) Special Status Register (Temperature Alarm) Liquid Data Maximum Alarms register Liquid Data Minimum Alarms register Liquid Data High Alarms register Liquid Data Low Alarms register Density accountable Alarms register Density Non accountable Alarms register Coriolis Meter Non accountable Alarms register Stream 1 Chromatograph Alarms Stream 1 Lubrication Input Status Alarms Current Daily Latched Alarms General Accountable Alarm register General Non-accountable Alarm register Turbine Accountable Alarm register Turbine Non-accountable Alarm register Ultrasonic Accountable Alarm register

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 255 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Ultrasonic Non Acc.La.Cur.Dy .1 Ultrasonic Non-accountable Alarm register MT Pressure.La.Cur.Dy.1 Multiple Pressure Transmitter Alarm register MT Temperature.La.Cur.Dy.1 Multiple Temperature Transmitter Alarm register MT dp High.La.Cur.Dy.1 Multiple Differential Pressure High Range Transmitter Alarm register MT dp Low.La.Cur.Dy.1 Multiple Differential Pressure Low Range Transmitter Alarm register Gas Data Max Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Gas Data Maximum Alarms register Gas Data Min Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Gas Data Minimum Alarms register Gas Data High Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Gas Data High Alarms register Gas Data Low Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Gas Data Low Alarms register Status 1 (Acc.) .La.Cur.Dy 1 Special Status Register (Accountable Alarms) Status 2 (Temp) .La.Cur.Dy.1 Special Status Register (Temperature Alarm) Liquid Data Max Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Liquid Data Maximum Alarms register Liquid Data Min Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Liquid Data Minimum Alarms register Liquid Data High Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Liquid Data High Alarms register Liquid Data Low Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Liquid Data Low Alarms register Density Acc Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Density accountable Alarms register Density Non-Acc Alarms.La.Cur.Dy.1 Density Non accountable Alarms register Coriolis nac alarm.La.Cur.Dy.1 Coriolis Meter Non accountable Alarms register Chromat Alarm.La.Cur.Dy.1 Stream 1 Chromatograph Alarms Oil Status Non Acc.La.Cur.Dy.1 Stream 1 Lubrication Input Status Alarms o1 Last Last Period Latched Alarms o1 Hourly Last Hourly Latched Alarms General Acc.La.Last.Hr.1 General Accountable Alarm register General Non Acc.La.Last.Hr.1 General Non-accountable Alarm register Turbine Acc.La.Last.Hr.1 Turbine Accountable Alarm register Turbine Non Acc.La.Last.Hr .1 Turbine Non-accountable Alarm register Ultrasonic Acc.La.Last.Hr.1 Ultrasonic Accountable Alarm register Ultrasonic Non Acc.La.Last.Hr .1 Ultrasonic Non-accountable Alarm register MT Pressure.La.Last.Hr.1 Multiple Pressure Transmitter Alarm register MT Temperature.La.Last.Hr.1 Multiple Temperature Transmitter Alarm register MT dp High.La.Last.Hr.1 Multiple Differential Pressure High Range Transmitter Alarm register MT dp Low.La.Last.Hr.1 Multiple Differential Pressure Low Range Transmitter Alarm register Gas Data Max Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Gas Data Maximum Alarms register Gas Data Min Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Gas Data Minimum Alarms register Gas Data High Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Gas Data High Alarms register Gas Data Low Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Gas Data Low Alarms register Status 1 (Acc.) .La.Last.Hr 1 Special Status Register (Accountable Alarms) Status 2 (Temp) .La.Last.Hr.1 Special Status Register (Temperature Alarm) Liquid Data Max Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Liquid Data Maximum Alarms register Liquid Data Min Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Liquid Data Minimum Alarms register Liquid Data High Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Liquid Data High Alarms register Liquid Data Low Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Liquid Data Low Alarms register Density Acc Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Density accountable Alarms register Density Non-Acc Alarms.La.Last.Hr.1 Density Non accountable Alarms register Coriolis nac alarm.La.Last.Hr.1 Coriolis Meter Non accountable Alarms register Chromat Alarm.La.Last.Hr.1 Stream 1 Chromatograph Alarms Oil Status Non Acc.La.Last.Hr.1 Stream 1 Lubrication Input Status Alarms o1 Daily Last Daily Latched Alarms General Acc.La.Last.Dy.1 General Accountable Alarm register General Non Acc.La.Last.Dy.1 General Non-accountable Alarm register Turbine Acc.La.Last.Dy.1 Turbine Accountable Alarm register Turbine Non Acc.La.Last.Dy .1 Turbine Non-accountable Alarm register Ultrasonic Acc.La.Last.Dy.1 Ultrasonic Accountable Alarm register Ultrasonic Non Acc.La.Last.Dy .1 Ultrasonic Non-accountable Alarm register MT Pressure.La.Last.Dy.1 Multiple Pressure Transmitter Alarm register MT Temperature.La.Last.Dy.1 Multiple Temperature Transmitter Alarm register MT dp High.La.Last.Dy.1 Multiple Differential Pressure High Range Transmitter Alarm register MT dp Low.La.Last.Dy.1 Multiple Differential Pressure Low Range Transmitter Alarm register Gas Data Max Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Gas Data Maximum Alarms register Gas Data Min Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Gas Data Minimum Alarms register Gas Data High Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Gas Data High Alarms register Gas Data Low Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Gas Data Low Alarms register Status 1 (Acc.) .La.Last.Dy 1 Special Status Register (Accountable Alarms) Status 2 (Temp) .La.Last.Dy.1 Special Status Register (Temperature Alarm) Liquid Data Max Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Liquid Data Maximum Alarms register Liquid Data Min Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Liquid Data Minimum Alarms register Liquid Data High Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Liquid Data High Alarms register Liquid Data Low Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Liquid Data Low Alarms register Density Acc Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Density accountable Alarms register Density Non-Acc Alarms.La.Last.Dy.1 Density Non accountable Alarms register Coriolis nac alarm.La.Last.Dy.1 Coriolis Meter Non accountable Alarms register Chromat Alarm.La.Last.Dy.1 Stream 1 Chromatograph Alarms Oil Status Non Acc.La.Last.Dy.1 Stream 1 Lubrication Input Status Alarms o1 ISO 5167/6976 ISO 6976 Calculation Values

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 256 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Molar Mass.1 Line Density.1 Calc Wobbe.s.1 Calc Wobbe.i .1 Base Density.1 o1 CATS Molar Mass.1 Line Density.1 Base Density.1 o1 Density o 1 Density 1 Dens.1 Meter Freq.1 rho 1.1 rho t 1.1 VoS in Gas.1 VoS in CalGas.1 Density.1corrected for Vos & Temp.1 Dens.1 Meter Period.1 rho Up st 1.1 Density Meter 1 status.1 Dens.1 pmx.1 Dens.1 pmx t.1 Dens.1 pmx up.1 Dens.1 pmx Calc.1 Dens.1 pmx status.1 Dens.1 Y Calc.1 Dens.1 t received.1 Dens.1 t Calc.1 Dens.1 t sensor.1 Dens.1 t rec status.1 Dens.1 t Calc status.1 o 1 Density 2 Dens.2 Meter Freq.1 rho 2.1 rho t 2.1 VoS in Gas.2 VoS in CalGas.2 Density.1corrected for Vos & Temp.2 Dens.1 Meter Period.2 rho Up st 2.1 Density Meter 2 status.1 Dens.2 pmx.1 Dens.2 pmx t.1 Dens.2 pmx up.1 Dens.2 pmx Calc.1 Dens.2 pmx status.1 Dens.2 Y Calc.1 Dens.2 t received.1 Dens.2 t Calc.1 Dens.2 t sensor.1 Dens.2 t rec status.1 Dens.2 t Calc status.1 Line Density Calc 1 Line Density Calc Status 1 pmx Calc 1 pmx Calc status 1 Density Average Status 1 Density Average Value 1 rho.p.hr.avg.1 rho.p.dy.avg.1 rho.r.hr.avg.1 rho.r.dy.avg.1 o1 Relative Density rd meter freq.1 rd meter period.1 rd calculated.1 o1 Digital Switches Digital Switch 1.1 Digital Switch 2.1 Digital Switch 3.1 Digital Switch 4.1 Molar Mass of gas Line Density of gas Superior Wobbe of gas Inferior Wobbe of gas Base Density of gas CATS Calculation Values Molar Mass of gas Line Density of gas Base Density of gas Density Folder Density 1 Values Measured Frequency Input for Density meter 1 in Hz Calculated Line Density Line Density value corrected for Temperature Calculated Velocity of Sound in flowing Gas Calculated Velocity of Sound in Calibration Gas Line Density corrected for Temperature and Velocity of Sound effects Measured Period of Input for Density in uSec Density corrected for upstream or downstream measurement Operational status of Density meter 1 Wet Gas Density of Mixture Wet Gas Density of Mixture corrected for Temperature Wet Gas Density of Mixture corrected to upstream measurement Wet Gas Density of Mixture Calc Wet Gas Status (Source) of Density of Mixture Calc Wet Gas Calculated value of Specific Heat Wet Gas Density temperature sensor received value Wet Gas Density temperature sensor Calc value Wet Gas Density temperature sensor selected Wet Gas Density temperature sensor received status Wet Gas Density temperature sensor Calc status Density 2 Values Measured Frequency Input for Density meter 2 in Hz Calculated Line Density Line Density value corrected for Temperature Calculated Velocity of Sound in flowing Gas Calculated Velocity of Sound in Calibration Gas Line Density corrected for Temperature and Velocity of Sound effects Measured Period of Input for Density in uSec Density corrected for upstream or downstream measurement Operational status of Density meter 2 Wet Gas Density of Mixture Wet Gas Density of Mixture corrected for Temperature Wet Gas Density of Mixture corrected to upstream measurement Wet Gas Density of Mixture Calc Wet Gas Status (Source) of Density of Mixture Calc Wet Gas Calculated value of Specific Heat Wet Gas Density temperature sensor received value Wet Gas Density temperature sensor Calc value Wet Gas Density temperature sensor selected Wet Gas Density temperature sensor received status Wet Gas Density temperature sensor Calc status Line Density Calc Value Status of Line Density Calc Value Wet Gas Density of mixture Calc Wet Gas Status of Density of Mixture Calc. Density current status value Current Density Average Value Density previous hour time based average Density previous day time based average Density hourly rolling average Density daily rolling average Relative density (Frequency Input) Values Measured Frequency Input for Relative Density in Hz Measured Period of Input for Relative Density in uSec Calculated Relative Density Digital Switched Inputs Status of switch 1 in slot 1 Status of switch 2 in slot 1 Status of switch 3 in slot 1 Status of switch 1 in slot 2

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 257 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Digital Switch 5.1 Digital Switch 6.1 Digital Switch 7.1 Digital Switch 8.1 Digital Switch 9.1 Digital Switch 10.1 Digital Switch 11.1 Digital Switch 12.1 Digital Switch 13.1 Digital Switch 14.1 Digital Switch 15.1 Stream Flags.1 o 0 Stream 2 o 0 Stream 3 o 1 Chromat Status Chr.Read State Chr.Last Read State Chr.Analysed Stream Chr.Analysis Chr Analysis state Chr.Status.1 Chr.Status.2 Chr.Status.3 Chr.Status.4 Chr.Status.5 Chr.Status.6 Chr.Status.7 Chr.Status.8 Chr.Status.9 Chr.Status.10 Chr.Status.11 Chr.Status.12 Chr.Alarms Chr.Alarms.La.Cur.Hr Chr.Alarms.La.Cur.Dy Chr.Alarms.La.Last.Hr Chr.Alarms.La.Last.Dy Chr..hb-status En Main Status En Alarm Status En Alarm Status 2 o1 Encal 3000 o 1 General Encal 3000 Serial Number Encal 3000 Number Runs Encal 3000 Running Time Encal 3000 Last Stream Encal 3000 Current Stream Encal 3000 Next Stream Encal 3000 Instrument State Encal 3000 Automation State Encal 3000 Sample Type Encal 3000 Calibration Status o 1 New Encal 3000 New RF1 Encal 3000 New RF2 Encal 3000 New RF3 Encal 3000 New RF4 Encal 3000 New RF5 Encal 3000 New RF6 Encal 3000 New RF7 Encal 3000 New RF8 Encal 3000 New RF9 Encal 3000 New RF10 Encal 3000 New RF11 Encal 3000 New RF12 Encal 3000 New RF13 Encal 3000 New RF14 Encal 3000 New RF15 Encal 3000 New RF16 Encal 3000 New RF17 o 1 Current Status of switch 2 in slot 2 Status of switch 3 in slot 2 Status of switch 1 in slot 3 Status of switch 2 in slot 3 Status of switch 3 in slot 3 Status of switch 1 in slot 4 Status of switch 2 in slot 4 Status of switch 3 in slot 4 Status of switch 1 in slot 5 Status of switch 2 in slot 5 Status of switch 3 in slot 5 Indication of Stream condition, i.e. Maintenance Mode or Calibrate or Proving etc. Stream 2 (Duplicate of Stream 1) Stream 3 (Duplicate of Stream 1) Chromatograph operating Status Chromatograph read status of current cycle e.g. Waiting Chromatograph read status of last cycle e.g. Reading Gas Chromatograph Stream Number Status of Gas Chromatograph Status of Gas Chromatograph Detail of Status Word 1 Detail of Status Word 2 Detail of Status Word 3 Detail of Status Word 4 Detail of Status Word 5 Detail of Status Word 6 Detail of Status Word 7 Detail of Status Word 8 Detail of Status Word 9 Detail of Status Word 10 Detail of Status Word 11 Detail of Status Word 12 Chromatograph Accountable Alarms Chromatograph Latched current hour alarms Chromatograph Latched current day alarms Chromatograph Latched previous(last) hour alarms Chromatograph Latched previous(last) day alarms Chromatograph Status (Siemens Optichrome Only) Ensonic Main Status Ensonic Alarm Status Ensonic Alarm Status 2 Encal 3000 General Information

Encal 3000 New Response Factors

Encal 3000 Current Response Factors

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 258 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Encal 3000 Current RF1 Encal 3000 Current RF2 Encal 3000 Current RF3 Encal 3000 Current RF4 Encal 3000 Current RF5 Encal 3000 Current RF6 Encal 3000 Current RF7 Encal 3000 Current RF8 Encal 3000 Current RF9 Encal 3000 Current RF10 Encal 3000 Current RF11 Encal 3000 Current RF12 Encal 3000 Current RF13 Encal 3000 Current RF14 Encal 3000 Current RF15 Encal 3000 Current RF16 Encal 3000 Current RF17 o 1 Initial Encal 3000 Initial RF1 Encal 3000 Initial RF2 Encal 3000 Initial RF3 Encal 3000 Initial RF4 Encal 3000 Initial RF5 Encal 3000 Initial RF6 Encal 3000 Initial RF7 Encal 3000 Initial RF8 Encal 3000 Initial RF9 Encal 3000 Initial RF10 Encal 3000 Initial RF11 Encal 3000 Initial RF12 Encal 3000 Initial RF13 Encal 3000 Initial RF14 Encal 3000 Initial RF15 Encal 3000 Initial RF16 Encal 3000 Initial RF17 o 1 Gaz France Hs.Gaz Hi.Gaz rd.Gaz CO2.Gaz o 1 Warnings General Warnings Modbus Security

Encal 3000 Initial Response Factors

Gaz de France Gas Data Folder Gaz de France value for Hs in w/m3 Gaz de France value for Hi in w/m3 Gaz de France value for rd Gaz de France value for CO2 Warnings General Warnings Current Modbus security level.

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 259 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE 5.3. LOCAL VALUES
Local Values Folder Chromatograph Force the Gas Data Calc to be LGV if this is set ON PID Controller Folder Value of PID setpoint 1 Value of PID setpoint 2 Value of PID setpoint 3 Grab Sampler Folder Sampler 1 Folder Start / Stop sampling Reset Can contents to zero Sampler 2 Folder Start / Stop sampling Reset Can contents to zero Lubrication Folder Lubrication 1 Folder Remaining stroke time Remaining pause time Allows cycle to be tested on request Reset the lubrication data Stream 1 Reset all gas data averages Stream On/Off or Stream Neutralised. Reset Latched Stream Alarms Input signals (Pulse variables) Measured Input from Turbine Meter Input 1 Measured Input from Turbine Monitor Input 1 Measured Input from Coriolis meter Input 1 Density pulse input signals Density 1 Density Sensor 1 No. 1 stream 1 On or Off Density 2 Density Sensor 2 No. 1 stream 1 On or Off Source of Density Input stream 1 Sensor 1, Sensor 2 , AGA 8 or Calc Source of Relative Density Input stream 1 Multiple transmitter input signals Pressure Pressure Sensor No. 1 stream 1 On or Off Pressure Sensor No. 2 stream 1 On or Off Pressure Sensor No. 3 stream 1 On or Off Temperature Temperature Sensor No. 1 stream 1 On or Off Temperature Sensor No. 2 stream 1 On or Off Temperature Sensor No. 3 stream 1 On or Off Dp High Range Differential Pressure High range Sensor No. 1 stream 1 On or Off Differential Pressure High range Sensor No. 2 stream 1 On or Off Differential Pressure High range Sensor No. 3 stream 1 On or Off Dp Low Range Differential Pressure Low range Sensor No. 1 stream 1 On or Off Differential Pressure Low range Sensor No. 2 stream 1 On or Off Differential Pressure Low range Sensor No. 3 stream 1 On or Off Stream 2 o 1 Local Values o 1 Chromat Chromat Last Good Value o 1 PID Controller PID setpoint 1 PID setpoint 2 PID setpoint 3 o 1 Grab Sampler o1 Sampler 1 Start & Stop.1 Can Reset.1 o1 Sampler 2 Start & Stop.2 Can Reset.2 o 1 Lubrication o1 Lubrication 1 Stroke time remaining Pause time remaining Test output Reset o 1 Stream 1 Reset Gas Averages.1 Stream.1 Reset Latched Stream Alarms.1 o1 Input signals Meter Input 1 Monitor Input 1 Coriolis Meter Input 1 o1 Density Input signals o 1 Density 1 Density Sensor 1.1 o 1 Density 2 Density Sensor 2.1 Density Selection 1 rd Selection 1 o1 Multiple transmitters o 1 Pressure pres Sensor 1.1 pres Sensor 2.1 pres Sensor 3.1 o 1 Temperature temp Sensor 1.1 temp Sensor 2.1 temp Sensor 3.1 o 1 Dp High dphi Sensor 1.1 dphi Sensor 2.1 dphi Sensor 3.1 o 1 Dp Low dplo Sensor 1.1 dplo Sensor 2.1 dplo Sensor 3.1 o 1 Stream 2 o0 Input Signals o0 Density Input Signals o1 Multiple transmitters o 0 Pressure o 0 Temperature o 0 Dp High o 0 Dp Low o 1 Stream 3

Stream 3

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 260 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


o0 Input Signals o0 Density Input Signals o1 Multiple transmitters o 0 Pressure o 0 Temperature o 1 Time system time modbus time 793 time o1 EG Time EG Seconds EG Minutes EG Hours EG Day EG Month EG Year o1 System Time Seconds Minutes Hours Day Month Year o 1 General Serial no Unit Maintenance Mode Security Proving Mode Comms Register Data Checksum P/T Calibrate.1 Reset Latched Alarms.1 o1 Valve Switching Valve 1 Open Valve 1 Closed Valve 2 Open Valve 2 Closed o1 Ensonic EN Calibrate EN Reset

Time Folder System Time and Date Modbus Time and Date 793 Time and Date EG Enagas Time Write Folder EG Seconds EG Minutes EG Hours EG Day EG Month EG Year System Time Read Folder Seconds Minutes Hours Day Month Year General Folder Serial Number Maintenance Mode On or Off Current Security setting Proving mode On or Off Register must be written to in order to Reset Modbus Comms timeout Checksum of all Data Entry Values Set Pressure and Temperature transmitters into Calibrate mode 1 Reset all non stream Latched Alarms Valve Switching Folder Valve 1 Open Command Output Valve 1 Closed Command Output Valve 2 Open Command Output Valve 2 Closed Command Output Ensonic Folder Ensonic Calibrate On or Off Ensonic Reset On or Off

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 261 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE 5.4. COUNTERS
Counters Station counters Stream 1 Proving counters Proving Total Line Volume from Meter Proving Total Line Volume from Meter corrected for linearity Proving Total Corrected Volume Proving Total Energy Proving Total Mass Proving Total Line Volume from Meter monitor output Proving Total Mass corrected for linearity Proving Total dry gas Volume Stream 1 Positive direction counters normal flow condition Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter corrected for linearity Eternal Total Corrected Volume Eternal Total Energy Eternal Total Mass Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter monitor output Eternal Total Mass CO2 (Enabled by Mode switch 13) Eternal Total Mass corrected for linearity Eternal Total dry gas Volume Alarm flow condition Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter corrected for linearity Eternal Total Corrected Volume Eternal Total Energy Eternal Total Mass Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter monitor output Eternal Total Mass corrected for linearity Eternal Total dry gas Volume Unhaltable Counters Eternal Total Unhaltable Line Volume Eternal Total Unhaltable Line Volume from Meter corrected for linearity Eternal Total Unhaltable Corrected Volume Eternal Total Unhaltable Energy Eternal Total Unhaltable Mass Eternal Total Unhaltable Line Volume from Meter monitor output Eternal Total Unhaltable Mass corrected for linearity Eternal Total Unhaltable dry gas Volume Held Counters Hold Value of normal flow condition Hold Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter Hold Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter corrected for linearity Hold Eternal Total Corrected Volume Hold Eternal Total Energy Hold Eternal Total Mass Hold Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter monitor output Hold Eternal Total Mass corrected for linearity Hold Eternal Total dry gas Volume Hold Value of error flow condition Hold Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter Hold Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter corrected for linearity Hold Eternal Total Corrected Volume Hold Eternal Total Energy Hold Eternal Total Mass Hold Eternal Total Line Volume from Meter monitor output Hold Eternal Total Mass corrected for linearity Hold Eternal Total dry gas Volume Hold Value of Unhaltable Counters Hold Eternal Total Unhaltable Line Volume Hold Eternal Total Unhaltable Line Volume from Meter corrected for linearity Hold Eternal Total Unhaltable Corrected Volume Hold Eternal Total Unhaltable Energy Hold Eternal Total Unhaltable Mass Hold Eternal Total Unhaltable Line Volume from Meter monitor output Hold Eternal Total Unhaltable Mass corrected for linearity Hold Eternal Total Unhaltable dry gas Volume o 1 Counters o0 Station o1 Stream 1[Proving] Proving Vb.1 Proving Vbc.1 Proving Vn.1 Proving E.1 Proving M.1 Proving Vbm.1 Proving Vmc.1 Proving Vdry.1 o 1 Stream 1[Pos] o 1 Normal +Vb.1 +Vbc.1 +Vn.1 +E.1 +M.1 +Vbm.1 +CO2.1 +Vmc.1 +Vdry.1 o 1 Error +VEb.1 +VEbc.1 +VEn.1 +EE.1 +ME.1 +VEbm.1 +VEmc.1 +VEdry.1 o 1 Unhaltable +Vb.u.1 +Vbc.u.1 +Vn.u.1 +E.u.1 +M.u.1 +Vbm.u.1 +Vmc.u.1 +Vdry.u.1 o 1 Held o1 Normal +Vb.H1 +Vbc.H1 +Vn.H1 +E.H1 +M.H1 +Vbm.H1 +Vmc.H1 +Vdry.H1 o1 Error +VEb.H1 +VEbc.H1 +VEn.H1 +EE.H1 +ME.H1 +VEbm.H1 +VEmc.H1 +VEdry.H1 o1 Unhaltable +Vb.u.H1 +Vbc.u.H1 +Vn.u.H1 +E.u.H1 +M.u.H1 +Vbm.u.H1 +Vmc.u.H1 +Vdry.u.H1

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 262 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


o1 Period Counters o 1 Normal o1 Accumulated o1 Previous o1 Hourly +Vb.ph.ac1 o1 Daily +Vb.pd.ac1 o1 Monthly +Vb.pm.ac1 o1 Non-Accumulated o1 Current o1 Quarterly +Vb.tq.na1 o1 Hourly +Vb.ch.na1 o1 Daily +Vb.cd.na1 o1 Monthly +Vb.cm.na1 o1 Previous o1 Quarterly +Vb.pq.na1 o1 Hourly +Vb.ph.na1 o1 Daily +Vb.pd.na1 o1 Monthly +Vb.pm.na1 o1 Last Day +Vb.ld.na1 o 0 error o 0 Stream 2[Proving] o 0 Stream 2[Pos] o 0 Stream 3[Proving] o 0 Stream 3[Pos] o 0 Stream 1[Neg] o 0 Stream 2[Neg] o 0 Stream 3[Neg] Counters in Time Periods normal flow condition accumulated from meter start in previous time period hourly Total Line Volume from Meter until end of previous hour etc. daily Total Line Volume from Meter until end of previous day etc. monthly Total Line Volume from Meter until end of previous month etc. accumulated only in time period in current time period 15 minutes Total Line Volume from Meter in current 15 mins etc. hourly Total Line Volume from Meter in current hour etc. daily Total Line Volume from Meter in current day etc. monthly Total Line Volume from Meter in current month etc. in previous time period 15 minutes Total Line Volume from Meter in previous 15 mins etc. hourly Total Line Volume from Meter in previous hour etc. daily Total Line Volume from Meter in previous day etc. monthly Total Line Volume from Meter in previous month etc. value at last day of month Total Line Volume from Meter at last day of month etc. Alarm flow condition Stream 2 Proving counters Stream 2 Positive direction counters Stream 3 Proving counters Stream 3 Positive direction counters Stream 1 Negative direction counters Stream 2 Negative direction counters Stream 3 Negative direction counters

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 263 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE


Wet Gas Type 1 Counter symbols, these apply to Unhaltable, Error and Period counters. +Mguc.1 Eternal Total Mass of gas uncorrected for wet gas content +Mgc.1 Eternal Total Mass of gas corrected for wet gas content +Ml.1 Eternal Total Mass of Liquid +VGg.1 Eternal Total Normal Volume Gas at line conditions +VNg.1 Eternal Total Normal Volume Gas at base conditions +VGl.1 Eternal Total Normal Volume Liquid at line conditions +VNl.1 Eternal Total Normal Volume Liquid at base conditions +Mw.1 Eternal Total Mass of Water +Mc.1 Eternal Total Mass of Condensate Wet Gas Type 2 Counter symbols, these apply to Unhaltable, Error and Period counters. +Mg.1 Eternal Total Mass of two phase flow +MgS.1 Eternal Total Mass of Water saturated Wet gas +MgD.1 Eternal Total Mass of Dry Gas +ML.1 Eternal Total Liquid Flow +MTP.1 Eternal Total Corrected two phase mass flow rate (inc. Water) +MC.1 Eternal Total Mass Condensate +MW.1 Eternal Total Mass Water +MM.1 Eternal Total Mass of Water +M hc.1 Eternal Total Mass of Hydro Carbon +VnG.1 Eternal Total Volume Dry gas +VnC.1 Eternal Total Volume Condensate +VnW.1 Eternal Total Volume of Water +VE.1 Eternal Total Energy of Dry Gas Coriolis Meter Counter symbols, these apply to Unhaltable, Error and Period counters. +Ml.1 Eternal Total Mass of Liquid +VGl.1 Eternal Total Volume of Liquid at line conditions +VNl.1 Eternal Total Volume of Liquid at base conditions +Mw.1 Eternal Total Mass of Water +Mc.1 Eternal Total Mass of Condensate +VGw.1 Eternal Total Volume of Water at line conditions +VNw.1 Eternal Total Volume of Water at base conditions +VNc.1 Eternal Total Volume of Condensate at base conditions +VGc.1 Eternal Total Volume of Condensate at line conditions +S.1 Eternal Total from alternate source i.e. Modbus or Pulse Inputs

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 264 of 265

Model 2000 Flow Computer Technical Manual 5.0 DATA TREE 5.5. STATION CONTROLLER
Station Controller Reset Proving Counters on FC # 1 to zero Reset Proving Counters on FC # 2 to zero Reset Proving Counters on FC # 3 to zero Reset Proving Counters on FC # 4 to zero Reset Proving Counters on FC # 5 to zero Reset Station Proving Counters to Zero Station Controller Alarm Station Controller Alarm Latched Current Hour Station Controller Alarm Latched Current Day Station Controller Alarm Latched Previous (Last) Hour Station Controller Alarm Latched Previous (Last) Day Number of Connected Flow Computers Modbus ID of FC #1 Modbus ID of FC #2 Modbus ID of FC #3 Modbus ID of FC #4 Modbus ID of FC #5 Read Status Read Status of FC #1 Read Status of FC #2 Read Status of FC #3 Read Status of FC #4 Read Status of FC #5 Write Status Write Status of FC # 1 Write Status of FC # 2 Write Status of FC # 3 Write Status of FC # 4 Write Status of FC # 5 o 1 Station Controller Reset Proving counters.1 Reset Proving counters.2 Reset Proving counters.3 Reset Proving counters.4 Reset Proving counters.5 Reset Station Proving counters Stn.Cont.Alarm Stn.Cont.Alarm.La.Cur.Hr Stn.Cont.Alarm.La.Cur.Dy Stn.Cont.Alarm.La.Last.Hr Stn.Cont.Alarm.La.Last.Dy o 1 Flow Computers Number of Units Modbus ID 1 Modbus ID 2 Modbus ID 3 Modbus ID 4 Modbus ID 5 o 1 Read Status Modbus Read State ReadStatus.1 ReadStatus.1 ReadStatus.1 ReadStatus.1 ReadStatus.1 o 1 Write Status Modbus Write State WriteStatus.1 WriteStatus.1 WriteStatus.1 WriteStatus.1 WriteStatus.1

Model 2000 Technical Manual Iss 14 (V5.910) 11-04-08 Page 265 of 265